Manuais Ge 2 PDF

Technical
Publications
2202123
Revision 35
CT HiSpeed Series
Functional Check /Adjustment
Copyrighte 1998–2002 by General Electric Company
Operating Documentation
CT HISPEED SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 19 2202123
D THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

WARNING D IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
D DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
D FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS.
D CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

AVERTISSEMENT D SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
D NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
D LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES
DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
D DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN

ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.
WARNUNG
D FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
D VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.
D WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
D ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

AVISO D SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN.
D NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
D LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE
OTRA NATURALEZA.
a
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
D ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA

DISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS.
ATENÇÃO
D SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
D NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.
D O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA
DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,
MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.
D IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE

SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.
AVVERTENZA
D SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
D SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
D NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER
FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
b
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained should
be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to place this
equipment in operation. The General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad to assist and
cooperate in placing this equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, no
practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to
take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to
radiation.
It is important that everyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with the
recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reports
available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the
International Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its agents,
and representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment.
Various protective material and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be
performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed
by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing shall
be performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are
highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required.
In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical
work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party
service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
c
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation “damage in
shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a General
Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the
carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held
for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested
within this 14 day period.
Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (414) 827–3449 / 8*285–3449 immediately after damage is found. At
this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill number, item
damaged and extent of damage.
Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section “S” of the Policy & Procedure Bulletins.
OMISSIONS & ERRORS
GE personnel, please use the GEMS CQA Process to report all omissions, errors, and defects in this documentation.
Customers, please contact your GE Sales or Service representatives.
CAUTION
Do not use the following devices near this equipment. Use of these devices near this equipment could cause
this equipment to malfunction.
Devices not to be used near this equipment:
Devices which intrinsically transmit radio waves such as; cellular phone, radio transceiver, mobile radio transmitter,
radio–controlled toy, etc.
Keep power to these devices turned off when near this equipment.
Medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct technicians, patients and other people who may be
around this equipment to fully comply with the above regulation.
d
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Tab – Section Page REV Rotational Mechanism 2–1 to 2–24 20
– Title page 35 Rotational Operation 3–1 to 3–7 19

Title page rear blank Slip Rings and Brushes 4–1 to 4–20 19
(Warning and other impor- a to d 19 Tilt Operation 5–1 to 5–15 19

tant information) Collimator 6–1 to 6–14 33
(Revision Information) A to D 35 Table and Gantry 7–1 to 7–20 22
1 (Introduction) i 35 5 (Table) i 30
General 1–1 to 1–7 22 Elevation Function 1–1 to 1–6 19

Torque Value for Screw Tightening 2–1 to 2–5 19 Longitudinal Function 2–1 to 2–16 34
Common Procedures 3–1 to 3–34 35 Short Foot Print Function 3–1 to 3–3 19
2 (System) i to v 28 6 (DAS/Detector) i 19
Checks during System Installation 1–1 to 1–19 32 DAS Operation 1–1 to 1–7 33
Software Loading (For V/R 5.5 or 2–1 to 2–68 35 DC Power Supply 2–1 to 2–2 19
later)
7 (X–ray Generator) i 24
Software Loading (For V/R 5.xx) 3–1 to 3–64 25
X–ray Tube 1–1 to 1–5 33
Software Loading (For V/R 4.xx) 4–1 to 4–77 25
KV and mA 2–1 to 2–9 33
Software Loading (For V/R 3.xx or 5–1 to 5–44 25
Lower) 8 (Switch/Jumper Setting) i to ii 35
X–ray Alignment 6–1 to 6–47 30 Operator Console 1–1 to 1–30 35
System Calibration 7–1 to 7–13 25 Gantry 2–1 to 2– 21 34
Image Performance Verification 8–1 to 8–12 28 DAS 3–1 to 3–4 20
3 (Operator Console) i 19 X–ray Generator 4–1 to 4–16 19
OC Components 1–1 to 1–11 19 PDU 5–1 to 5–2 28
OC Operation 2–1 to 2–12 33 Appendix

4 (Gantry) i to ii 29 Symbols and Classification A–1 to A–4 19
DC Power Supplies 1–1 to 1–3 19 – Blank/Rear cover –
A
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
REVISION HISTORY
REV Date Primary Reason for Change

35 12/13/02 Introduction Added: Table Home Lock (sec. 3)
System Added: V7 LFC Information (sec. 2)
Switch/Jumper Added: NPRM JP19 information (sec. 1).
34 09/20/02 System Added: A note for InSite Installation (Sec. 2).
Table Added: Information of the Home Lock function (Sec 2)
Switch/Jumper Added: TGP T5 setting (sec 2)
33 07/03/02 Introduction Corrected: Service menu for V6 (sec 3)
OC Corrected: Service menu for V6 (sec 2)
Gantry Corrected: Service menu for V6 (sec 6)
Table Added: Part No. of Adjustment Tool for Cradle Belt Tension
DAS Corrected: Service menu for V6 (sec 1)
XG Corrected: Service menu for V6 (sec 1, 2)
32 04/19/02 System Changed: X–RAY TUBE OVERHEAT SAFETY (sec1)
31 03/01/02 System Added: V/R 6.00 InSite Software for LFC (sec2)
30 12/21/01 System Changed: POR, ISO Center Alingment (sec6)
Table Added: Cradle Belt Tension
X–ray Generator Changed: MA check (sec2)
29 11/22/01 Gantry Changed: Collimator Aperture ratio for Twin system (sec 6)
28 10/05/01 System Changed: Image Performance Specifications (sec 8)

Changed: LFC for V/R 6 (sec2)
DAS Changed: scan parameters for DAS Data transfer test
Switch/Jumper Added: RMT CNT board for PDU2
27 08/10/01 System Added: V/R 6 System software loading (sec 2)

Changed: Gravity SAG procedure for NXi (sec 6)
Switch / Jumper Added: JP19 (NPRM) jumper setting

Changed: S1 (NPRM) switch setting
26 07/06/01 System Changed: Image Performance Specification (sec 8)
Switch / Jumper Added: NPRM board (sec1)
25 04/20/01 Introduction Changed: Asymmetric Option calibration (sec 3)

Added: Patch Software Procedure (sec3)
System Changed: Entry limitation for Reconfiguration (sec2, 3, 4, 5)

Added : For V5.5 patch procedure (sec 2)
Added: Alignment procedures for Twin (Sec 6)
Added: Asymmetric option note for CT # (sec 7)
Added: Saving ConnectPro parameters (sec 2, 3, 4)
B
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
REVISION HISTORY (continued)

24 03/09/01 Introduction Added: . Option installation for V/R 5.5 (Sec3)
System Added: V/R 5.5 or later software loading (sec2)

Added: Machine number notice (sec 3, 4, 5)
X–ray Generator Corrected: DAS Count Check
Switch / Jumper Changed: TGP Board (Sec2), DTRF Board (Sec 2), CIF Board (Sec 3)
23 12/22/00 Introduction Added: Gantry service angle caution (Sec3)
22 10/27/00 Introduction Minor corrections: Sec. 1.

Added: System state data backup at Option software loading (Sec3)
System Corrected: Bow–tie filter at Adjustment (Sec5, sec6), Laser Imager option setting in the system
configuration (Sec, 2, 3, 4)
DAS/Detector Added: DAS data transfer note,
X–ray Generator Corrected: Max of Max data for DAS Count Check
Added: BS3 or later Gantry for DAS count check
Switch / Jumper Added : New HDD,
21 09/14/00 System Added: . Aurora Information for LFC V4

. . . . . . . . Selection window at LFW for V5 and V4
20 08/18/00 System Improved: Diagnosis settings (LFC–sec2, 3, 4)

Changed: HDD format procedures (LFC–sec2, 3, 4)
Changed: Image Performance table for NX/i, NX/i pro
Gantry Changed 2–3 Rotation Balance.
Switch/Jumper Corrected : CIF SW2 (DAS)
19 07/06/00 – –
Introduction Added a torque conversion table.
System Updated: Linearity Test for calibration, G–SAG, ISO Center, Filter Alignment, Radial Alignment
(Bow–tie filter removal added), HDD labeling Procedures.
Operator Console Adopted the new revision control.
Gantry Corrected Aperture Z–Axis Belt Tension.
Table Adopted the new revision control.
DAS/Detector Changed the DAS Data Transfer Test parameter (No. of Scan).
X–ray Generator Updated the DAS Count Check parameter (Scan Time).
Switch/Jumper Adopted the new revision control.
18 6/02/00 – Software Loading for V5 Dicom print
17 5/19/00 – Image Performance check Table, Software Loading V5, HSDCD Slip Ring
16 5/10/00 – HSDCD Slip Ring updated, Software Loading (V4 format command),
15 2/25/00 – New rawdata HDD, Software Loading (DICOM Print Info.), Aperture Ratio, Radial Alignment Tool,
Gravity SAG, HSDCD Slip Ring, HSDCD Receiver Position
14 2/04/00 – Software Loading (DICOM print camera AE title, others), OGP setting, Option software
13 12/20/99 – Software Loading (ESR info. added), Gantry rear cover belt for mobile system, DAS Offset Data,
Aperture Ratio, DAS Count Check, BOW, G–SAG, Q–Cal, Sample images, KV Check,
C
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
REVISION HISTORY (continued)

12 10/19/99 – Software Loading for V4, Added items of NP++, NPRIF jumper setting
11 8/13/99 – System Calibration, DAS Count Check, Table/Gantry Interlock, Aperture Ratio, KV and mA, Step-
ping Motor Torque, CIF board switch setting, MOD switch/jumper setting, Sony MOD, Added
items of Mobile System.
10 5/28/99 – Gantry Section Error Correction, NPRM switch setting, Software loading, Rev–up procedures for
Ver 2.54, HDD format procedures.
9 4/05/99 – Option software Installation, Check Prior to Applying Power Ground Continuity, Added Warning,
Table Section Error Correction, Software loading
8 2/26/99 – Signal Brush Contact, Software loading, Power Load distribution Check, DAS CIF board switch
setting.
7 1/06/99 – KV–mA stations, System configuration, System software V/R2.5 release, Slip Ring Cleaning,
Radial Alignment
6 11/27/98 – Software loading, Notice for TGP service switches, TGP dip switch descriptions, short–foot–print-
mode, Slip Ring Radial Position
5 10/30/98 – Software loading, Rotation Balance, Slip Ring Radial Position, Tilt Rollers, Table Height Check/
Adjustment,
4 8/31/98 – Clearance between rotational and stationary components, RMT CNT jumper setting, CRT gamma
value, Auto Voice, Japanese era selection
3 7/10/98 – FCA error message, Cradle Notice, H/W diag SCSI test modification, IMS Position, Jumper/
switch settings of RMT CNT, TBL BD, TGP, SUB BD, Cradle relative position check,
2 5/15/98 – Table height spec., NPRIF Rev 1, PCI Host Card, Image Performance Check, DAS Count spec.,
Japanese message, Scan test, Gravity SAG, System Calibration, KV–mA checks, Software Load-
ing, MOD jumper setting,
1 4/10/98 – MA load resister specs, Serial Port Expander switch setting, .
0 4/01/98 – Initial release.
D
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION/NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1-1-1 Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1-1-2 Operator Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-2 HARDWARE CONSTITUTION OF NP, NP+, NP++ AND TWIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
1-3 TORQUE CONVERSION TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
SECTION 2 – TORQUE VALUE FOR SCREW TIGHTENING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 NORMAL SCREWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2-2 HEXAGON SCREWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
SECTION 3 – COMMON PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

3-1 HOW TO REMOVE GANTRY COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-2 INSTALLING GANTRY COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3-2-1 Gantry Cover Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3-2-2 Gantry Service Angle Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3-3 HOW TO REMOVE OC COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3-4 REMOVAL OF PDU COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3-5 BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3-5-1 Saving System State Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3-5-2 Restoring System State Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
3-5-3 Displaying the SMPTE image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
3-5-4 Performing the System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
3-5-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.5x or later 3–15
3-5-6 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.0x or lower 3–28
3-5-7 Installing Revision–up (Patch) Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–30
3-5-7 Installing Revision–up (Patch) Software (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–31
Patch Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–31
3-6 GANTRY SWITCH PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–32
3-7 TABLE HOME LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33
i INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123
ii INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
SECTION 1 – GENERAL
BEFORE USING THIS MANUAL

This CT system is especially dangerous because its heavy gantry continuously rotates at a high speed with high power
electric current (380 ∼ 480 VAC) conducted through its slip rings.
The hazards, although sometimes obvious, need to be recognized since the potential for serious injury or death exists.
WARNING
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY !!
READ AND THOROUGHLY UNDERSTAND THE ‘HISPEED SERIES SAFETY
GUIDELINES/EMC’ MANUAL (2197417) BEFORE PERFORMING ANY PROCEDURE IN THIS
‘FUNCTIONAL CHECK/ADJUSTMENT.’
Use of This Manual

Use this ‘Functional Check/Adjustment’ for the following purposes:
D A during– and post–installation check to ensure that the entire system operates properly.
D As a reference source for Periodic Maintenance which mainly contains abbreviated lists.
D A post–FMI (Field Modification Instruction) check to verify system operation.
D A pre–diagnostic check to verify or determine failure symptoms before or during troubleshooting.
D A post–diagnostic check to verify system operation after repairs, before returning it to the customer to use.
1–1 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
1-1 GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION/NOTICE
1-1-1 Gantry
WARNING
ROTATION AND ELECTROCUTION HAZARDS!
SWITCH OFF THE ‘ROTATE’ AND ‘XG POWER (SAFETY LOOP)’ SWITCHES LOCATED AT
THE REAR OF THE GANTRY BASE BEFORE INSERTING ANY OBJECT INTO OR WORKING
ON THE GANTRY.
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD!
ALWAYS INSERT THE GANTRY AZIMUTH LOCK PIN BEFORE REPLACING THE TUBE, DAS,
DETECTOR, HV TANK, OR OTHER WEIGHTY COMPONENTS.
WARNING
ELECTROCUTION!
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT ON UNSHIELDED TERMINALS. USE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON LIVE EQUIPMENT.
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD!
ANY OF THE FOLLOWINGS WILL INITIATE THE GANTRY ROTATION:
1. POWERING ON THE SYSTEM OR GANTRY.
2. SWITCHING ON THE ‘TABLE/TILT’ SWITCH.
3. PUSHING THE RESET SWITCH ON THE TGP BOARD.
4. PUSHING THE POSITIONING LIGHT BUTTON.
5. RESETTING OR POWERING OFF THE HOST COMPUTER.
6. PUSHING THE RESET SWITCH ON THE DBPCI BOARD.
STAND CLEAR OF THE ROTATING GANTRY.
1–2 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
1-1-2 Operator Console
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD !
IF THE SYSTEM HAS UPS ASSY, MAKE SURE YOU TURN OFF THE UPS POWER BEFORE
YOU ACCESS THE OPERATOR CONSOLE.
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD!
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST ON EXPOSED SURFACES. USE EXTREME CAUTION
WHEN WORKING ON LIVE EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION
Rotating fan assemblies!
Do not place any item into rotating blades. Use extra care when working near fan assemblies.
NOTICE
Turn OFF power before removing or inserting any board or plug.
1–3 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
1-2 HARDWARE CONSTITUTION OF NP, NP+, NP++ AND TWIN
Product Code Name

According to system models or customer options installed on the system, a number of system specifications or func-
tions available may differ from system to system; such are:
D Selectable scan times, MA values, FOV dimensions
D ‘Remote Tilt’ function
D Number of arrays of DAS/detector units, i.e., single or twin DAS/detector subsystem
D ...
However, the ‘HiSpeed’ series scanners are principally grouped into four, for which the following notations are given
respectively:
‘NP’, ‘NP+’, ‘NP++’ and ‘Twin’
In this manual, these notations NP, NP+, NP++, and Twin are used to describe differences among these four groups
and to make descriptions of this manual read simpler.
(However, ‘Twin’ is further grouped into two, that is, ‘NP+ Twin’ and ‘NP++ Twin’. In general outline,
NP+ Twin systems are NP/NP+ systems with a twin DAS/detector, and NP++ Twin systems are NP++ systems
with a twin DAS/detector. These code names also will be used when required.)
Table 1–1 describes the constitution of the major hardware of NP, NP+, NP++, Twin.
Table 1–1 Hardware Constitution
Subsystem/Component NP NP+ NP++ NP+ Twin NP++ Twin

OC – common
Gantry Mechanics – Position- Halogen Laser
ing Light Lamps
Mechanics – others common
Electrics Firmware only is different.
Table IMS Standard or Option Standard Standard or Standard
(Intermediate Support) Option
Others common
DAS – common twin DAS
Detector – common twin detector
X–ray Generator – common (Jedi) NP++ Jedi Jedi NP++ Jedi
X–ray Tube – common (D3142T tube) D3152T D3142T D3152T
tube tube tube
PDU – common
1–4 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
1-3 TORQUE CONVERSION TABLES

Use the following conversion formula and table to change a unit suitable for a torque wrench you have.
[Coversion: kgfScm –> NSm]

Conversion Formula:
xx (NSm) = xxxx (kgfScm) x 0.098
Conversion Table:
1 kgfScm = 0.098 NSm

Coversion: kgfScm –> NSm
kgfScm 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
NSm
0 0 0.0981 0.1961 0.2942 0.3923 0.4903 0.5884 0.6865 0.7845 0.8826
10 0.9807 1.0787 1.1768 1.2748 1.3729 1.4710 1.5690 1.6671 1.7652 1.8632
20 1.9613 2.0594 2.1574 2.2555 2.3536 2.4516 2.5497 2.6478 2.7458 2.8439
30 2.9420 3.0400 3.1381 3.2361 3.3342 3.4323 3.5303 3.6284 3.7265 3.8245
40 3.9226 4.0207 4.1187 4.2168 4.3149 4.4129 4.5110 4.6091 4.7071 4.8052
50 4.9033 5.0013 5.0994 5.1974 5.2955 5.3936 5.4916 5.5897 5.6878 5.7858
60 5.8840 5.9820 6.0800 6.1781 6.2762 6.3742 6.4723 6.5704 6.6684 6.7665
70 6.8646 6.9626 7.0607 7.1587 7.2568 7.3549 7.4529 7.5510 7.6491 7.7474
80 7.8452 7.9433 8.0413 8.1394 8.2375 8.3355 8.4336 8.5317 8.6297 8.7278
90 8.8260 8.9239 9.0220 9.1200 9.2181 9.3162 9.4142 9.5123 9.6104 9.7084
100 9.8065
1–5 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
1-3 Torque Conversion Tables (Continued)
[Coversion: NSm –> kgfScm]

Conversion Formula:
xx (kgfScm) = xxxx (NSm) x 10.2
Conversion Table:
1 NSm = 10.2 kgfScm

Coversion: NSm –> kgfScm
NSm 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
kgfScm
0 0 10 20 31 41 51 61 71 82 92
10 102 112 122 133 143 153 163 173 184 194
20 204 214 224 235 245 255 265 275 286 296
30 306 316 326 337 347 357 367 377 388 398
40 408 418 428 439 449 459 469 479 490 500
50 510 520 530 541 551 561 571 581 592 602
60 612 622 632 643 653 663 673 683 694 704
70 714 724 734 745 755 765 775 785 796 806
80 816 826 836 847 857 867 877 887 898 908
90 918 928 938 949 959 969 979 989 1000 1010
100 1020
1–6 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
1-3 Torque Conversion Tables (Continued)
[Coversion: NSm –> lbfSft]

Conversion Formula:
xx (lbfSft) = xxxx (NSm) x 0.737
xx (NSm) = xxxx (lbfSft) x 1.356
Conversion Table:
1 NSm=0.737 lbfSft
Coversion: NSm –> lbfSft
NSm 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
lbfSft
0 0 0.737 1.474 2.211 2.948 3.685 4.422 5.159 5.896 6.633
10 7.370 8.107 8.844 9.581 10.318 11.055 11.792 12.529 13.266 14.003
20 14.740 15.477 16.214 16.951 17.688 18.425 19.162 19.899 20.636 21.373
30 22.110 22.847 23.584 24.321 25.058 25.795 26.532 27.269 28.006 28.743
40 29.480 30.217 30.954 31.691 32.428 33.165 33.902 34.639 35.376 36.113
50 36.850 37.587 38.324 39.061 39.798 40.535 41.272 42.009 42.746 43.483
60 44.220 44.957 45.694 46.431 47.168 47.905 48.642 49.379 50.116 50.853
70 51.590 52.327 53.064 53.801 54.538 55.275 56.012 56.749 57.486 58.223
80 58.960 59.697 60.434 61.171 61.908 62.645 63.382 64.119 64.856 65.593
90 66.330 67.067 67.804 68.541 69.278 70.015 70.752 71.489 72.226 72.963
100 73.700
1–7 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123
1–8 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
SECTION 2 – TORQUE VALUE FOR SCREW TIGHTENING
CAUTION
Use locktite for screws which are installed to the Gantry rotation block. Use stud bolt with
locktite or nylon nut to prevent loosening if a screw is removed in service maintenance.
CAUTION
When you secure stud bolts with locktite, you must keep the screw torque shown in Table
‘Stud Bolt (Steel) with Locktite.’
Do not rotate the Gantry until the locktite hardens. (75 % of maximum strength after 2 hours;
100 % after 16 hours.)
If it is not possible to wait for the time period mentioned above, use nylon nuts.
TABLE 2–1 Stud Bolt (Steel) with Locktite
Screw Size Torque [kg–cm]

(Unless other-
wise specified)
M4 10
M5 15
M6 35
M8 70
2–1 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
2-1 NORMAL SCREWS

Secure normal screws with the tightening torque shown in the following tables unless otherwise specified.
TABLE 2–2 Pan Head Screw
Screw Size Torque [kg–cm] (Unless otherwise specified)

Brass Steel (4.8) Stainless (Combination)
(Screw & Nut) (Screw & Nut) (Screw & Nut)
M1 0.17 0.18 0.22 If screw and nut
are of different
M 1.2 0.32 0.34 0.42 material, use the
M 1.4 0.49 0.52 0.65 weakest torque.
M 1.7 0.90 0.96 1.2

M2 1.5 1.6 1.9
M 2.2 1.9 2.0 2.5
M 2.3 2.3 2.5 3.1
M 2.5 3.0 3.2 4.0
M 2.6 3.4 3.6 4.5
M3 5.3 5.7 7.1
M 3.5 8.2 8.7 11
M4 12 13 16
M 4.5 17.5 19 23.5
M5 24.5 26.5 33
M6 41.5 44 55
M8 101 108 135
Style
2–2 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
TABLE 2–3 Binder Screw

M1 – – – If screw and nut
are of different
M 1.2 – – – material, use the
M 1.4 – – – weakest torque.
M 1.7 – – –
M2 1.6 1.7 2.1
M 2.2 2.0 2.2 2.7
M 2.3 2.5 2.7 3.4
M 2.5 3.2 3.4 4.2
M 2.6 3.6 3.9 4.8
M3 5.6 6.0 7.5
M 3.5 8.7 9.3 11.5
M4 13 13.5 17
M 4.5 18.5 20 25
M5 26 27.5 34.5
M6 44 47 58.5
M8 107 114 143
Style
2–3 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
TABLE 2–4 Flat Head Screw

M1 0.21 0.22 0.27 If screw and nut
are of different
M 1.2 0.39 0.42 0.52 material, use the
M 1.4 0.61 0.65 0.82 weakest torque.
M 1.7 1.1 1.2 1.5

M2 1.9 2.0 2.5
M 2.2 2.4 2.6 3.2
M 2.3 3.0 3.2 4.0
M 2.5 3.8 4.1 5.1
M 2.6 4.4 4.6 5.8
M3 6.8 7.2 9.0
M 3.5 10.5 11 14
M4 15.5 16.5 20.5
M 4.5 22.5 24 30
M5 31.5 33.5 42
M6 53 56.5 71
M8 130 139 173
Style
2–4 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
2-2 HEXAGON SCREWS

Tighten allen (hexagonal) screws with the torque shown in Table below unless otherwise specified.
TABLE 2–5 Hexagon Screw

Ferrite Aluminum Aluminum Steel (Combination)
(Screw & Nut) (Screw & Nut) Alloy
(Screw & Nut)
M4 35 28 17.5 If screw and nut
are of different
M5 70 56 35 material, use the
M6 117 96.3 58.5 weakest torque.
M8 285 228 142.5

M 10 563 450.4 281.5
M 12 976 780.8 488
Style
or
L L
2–5 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123
2–6 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
SECTION 3 – COMMON PROCEDURES
3-1 HOW TO REMOVE GANTRY COVERS
3-1-1 Gantry Front Cover Removal

1. Remove the four screw caps from the sides of the front cover, then install the four service angle studs onto the
Gantry front cover.
2. Attach the two service angles to the studs.
3. Remove the four front cover mounting bolts, then move the front cover forwards.
4. For the Mobile system ONLY:

Loosen the four service angle stud mounting screws and lift up the front cover all the way, then tighten the screws.
Illustration 3–1 Attaching the Service Angles
For the Mobile system ONLY:
SERVICE
STUDS ANGLE
3–1 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
3-1-1 Gantry Front Cover Removal (Continued)

5. Slightly disengage the front cover and disconnect the Gantry control panel cables from the following connectors
of the FCV BD Assy of the front cover.
D CN1
D CN8
6. Connect the Gantry control panel cable to the inner gantry display board (SDS BD CN1).
Illustration 3–2 Removing the Front Cover from the Frame
FCV BD
SDS BD
CN1
GANTRY FRONT COVER
7. For the Mobile system ONLY:

Move the table to the UP limit, then move the front cover forward as far as possible to get efficient service area.
3–2 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
Gantry Front Cover Removal for a Small Room (with Short–Foot–Print Mode)
Note
Use this method when table height will be set to 500 ~ 800 mm.
1. Set the Gantry to the 0 degree tilt position.
2. Move the cradle to the OUT limit position.
3. Move the table to the DOWN limit position.
4. Cover the cradle with a cloth (or cover protector: 2225358) on the to prevent the front cover from scratches or
damage.
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ Cloth
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
5. Remove the four screw caps from the sides of the front cover, then install the four service angle studs onto the
Gantry front cover.
6. Attach the two service angles to the studs.
7. Slightly disengage the front cover and disconnect the Gantry control panel cables from the following connectors
of the FCV BD Assy of the front cover. See Illustration 3–2.
D CN1
D CN8
8. Connect the Gantry control panel cable to the inner gantry display board (SDS BD CN1).
9. Switch ON the service switch, then rotate the Gantry manually so that the X–ray tube is set to 6 o’clock position.
10. Switch OFF the service switch.
3–3 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123

11. Lift up the front cover, then contact the cover to the edge of the cradle and rotate it toward the cradle so that it
stays on the cradle.
NOTICE
Take care not to damage any Gantry Parts (especially the positioning light) when rotating the
front cover toward the cradle.
3–4 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
3-1-2 Gantry Rear Cover Removal

IMPORTANT NOTE:
For the Mobile system ONLY:
Since the rear cover is fixed using the rear cover belt, release the tensioner and open the
buckle to remove the belt before removing the rear cover. For Belt Installation, refer to Instal-
lation, Section 10–8–2 Cover Installation.
1
Releasing the Belt.
1. To install the service angles to the rear cover, repeat steps 1 to 3 (Front Cover Removal).
Note
The special service angles (Part No. 2213844) can be used for the Gantry installed in a small room.
2. Slightly disengage the rear cover and disconnect the Gantry control panel cables from the following connectors of
the RCV BD Assy of the rear cover.
D CN1
D CN9
3. Connect the Gantry control panel cables to the dummy connector of the inner gantry display board.
Illustration 3–3 Removing the Rear Cover from the Frame
Gantry
RCV BD Frame
Dummy Connec-
tor
CN1
Gantry Rear Cover
3–5 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
3-1-3 Gantry Side Cover Removal

1. For the left side cover:
Remove the two mounting bolts and move the cover forward or rearward to remove the cover.
2. For the right side cover:
a. Remove the two mounting bolts.
b. Move the cover forward from the Gantry until the safety switch connector is visible.
c. Disconnect the safety switch connector, then remove the cover.
Illustration 3–4 Removing the Side Cover from the Frame
Right Side Cover
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Safety Switch
Connector
3–6 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
3-1-4 Safety Switch Setting

1. Move the Gantry safety switches DOWNWARD so that the Gantry can rotate.
Illustration 3–5 Safety Switch Setting
Front Rear 1 Gantry Front 2 Gantry Rear

Safety Switch Safety Switch
2 3 Gantry Right Side

1
Safety Switch
3 Bracket
Screw
3-2 INSTALLING GANTRY COVERS
3-2-1 Gantry Cover Notice

When installing the Gantry covers, verify that:
D The azimuth locking pin should be disengaged.
D The Gantry tilt lock(s) should be removed.
D All safety switches (three) should be released.
D The safety switch connector should be connected properly to the right side cover.
D The connectors (CN1 and CN9) should be connected properly to the RCV BD on the rear cover.
D The connectors (CN1 and CN8) should be connected properly to the FCV BD on the front cover.
3–7 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
3-2-1 Gantry Cover Notice (Continued)
NOTICE
When installing the Gantry front cover, first cover the front edge of the cradle with a cloth
to prevent the front cover from scratches or damage.
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ Cloth
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
3-2-2 Gantry Service Angle Caution
CAUTION
If the service angles (cover stand) fall over, they can injure persons. Therefore, after using the
service angles, keep them in a safe place and/or secure them from falling over even when the
customer or other persons accidentally hit the service angles.
3–8 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
3-3 HOW TO REMOVE OC COVERS

Remove the front and rear covers to allow access to OC inner wiring. (To remove the rear cover, the optical cable
holder must be removed.)
Illustration 3–6 OC Cover Removal
OPTICAL CABLE HOLDER
REAR COVER
FRONT COVER
3–9 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
3-4 REMOVAL OF PDU COVERS

1. Verify that the main breaker of the Power Distribution Box should be OFF.
2. Remove the front cover, top cover, and left side cover, and right side cover in this order.
Illustration 3–7 Removing the PDU Covers
2
NUTS
4
ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
3 1
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ SCREWS
SCREWS
3–10 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
3-5 BASIC OPERATION
3-5-1 Saving System State Data

The basic system data (System State data) must be saved in advance in case the System Hard Disk Drive in the OC is
broken.
Note
The following will be saved as a system state data.
– Option key information
– Log files (log for success/failure when saving/restoring software sets)
– Scan protocol files
– IOS preferences
– Calibration files
– Autovoice files
– Next patient exam number
– User preferences
– InSite information
– Tube usage information
– Crosstalk A, B channel data (For Twin only)
– TnT Definition File log (For Twin only)
– Q cal channel ratio (For Twin only)
Preparation
D One MOD
Procedures (Method I)
1. Verify that the system is powered ON. If it is not, switch ON the main switch of the OC. The system is started
up, then the main screen appears.
2. Insert the MOD into the MOD drive of the OC.
3. Click on Service menu icon.
4. Select Savestate.
5. Click on Continue several times according to the messages to be displayed.

The MOD auto–format phase will be started, then the system state data are saved on the MOD.
6. “System State Saved Successfully” appears. Click on Continue.
3–11 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
3-5-1 Saving System State Data (Continued)
Procedures (Method II)

1. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select Application Shutdown.
2. Click on Savestate.
3. “Insert mod and press confirm.” appears. Click on Continue.
5. “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” appears. Click on Continue.
Note
At this time, you can cancel system–state–data saving procedure. If “Continue” is selected, this pro-
cedure can NOT be canceled.
6. “Warning: Saving System state will erase the previous contents.” appears. Click on Continue.
7. “System state saved successfully” appears. Click on Continue.
3-5-2 Restoring System State Data
Procedures (For the system with V/R 3.xx or later)

2. Click on Restorestate.
3. “Insert mod and press confirm.” appears. Click on Continue.
4. Insert the MOD, including the system state data saved in section 3-5-1, into the MOD drive.
Note
At this time, you can cancel system–state–data reloading procedure. If “Continue” is selected, this
procedure can NOT be canceled.
6. “Warning: Restoring will erase the previous contents on disk.” appears. Click on Continue.
7. “System state restored successfully” appears. Click on Continue.
8. To remove the MOD from the MOD drive, press the Eject button on the MOD drive.
9. Select Startup to return to the scan panel screen.
3–12 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
3-5-2 Restoring System State Data (Continued)
Procedures (For the system with V/R 2.xx or lower)

1. Insert the MOD, including the system state data saved in section 3-5-1, into the MOD drive.
2. Click on Console icon.
3. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:
# cd /usr/g/scripts <Enter>
# savestate –r <Enter>
4. Click on Continue.
5. “System State Restored Successfully” appears. Click on Continue.
6. To remove the MOD from the MOD drive, press the Eject button on the MOD drive.
3-5-3 Displaying the SMPTE image

1. Select Service → Install SMPTE image (To install the SMPTE image on the system.)
2. Click on ImageWorks → Browser to display the examination list.
3. Select “SMPTE” image in the Examination list.
4. Click on Viewer to display the SMPTE pattern.
5. Enlarge the SMPTE image to full screen display, using Format → Full screen format .
If necessary, drag the Zoom slider to display the pattern to the full screen.
3–13 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
3-5-4 Performing the System Configuration

2. On the desktop menu, click on Reconfig button located on the upper right of the screen.
This System configuration menu appears.
Using this screen, perform configuration.
NOTICE
The characters of alphanumerics, underscore, and period ONLY can be used. If other charac-
ters would be used, the system will not start up. (For the system of V/R 2.5 or later, other
characters are rejected to input even if they are input.)
3. Click on Accept after completing the configuration.

The system shuts down, then starts up automatically.
3–14 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
3-5-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.5x or later
The following tables shows the hierarchical menu (buttons) to install the Option software.
Buttons to be selected
Service Menu Option Installation Main Window Selection Window I Selection Window II
Install Options Install Permanent MOD
Manual
Quit
Flex Trial
Quit
Remove
Quit
1. Click on Service icon to display the Service desktop Menu, then select Application Shutdown.
2. On the desktop menu, click on Install Options button located on the upper right of the screen.
3–15 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
3-5-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.5x or later (Continued)
The “CT Software Options” screen appears.
3. Click on Install.
Note
If you click on an option in the list, the option is highlighted and “Install” button is disabled. In this
case, enter the cursor in the option screen, then click on the right button of the mouse to enable the
“Install” button.
3–16 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
4. Select either Permanent or Flex Trial.
D Permanent: selected when a customer purchased the option formally.
D Flex Trial: selected when a customer uses the option within a fixed time period as a trial. (The message
that notices the expiration date will be displayed over 10 days before the expiration of a Flex Trial.)
3-5-5-1 When ‘Permanent’ is selected:

1. Select either MOD or Manual.
D MOD: selected when the Option key MOD is used at installation.
D Manual: selected when the licence string is used at installation. The licence string is an unique number
with 25 characters that you get from your OLC.
3–17 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2. When MOD is selected:
The following screen appears. Insert the option key MOD into the MOD drive, then click on OK.
3–18 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
a. Select the Option to be installed from the “Available Options” table.
Note
You can select several options from the list, while pressing the shift key.
b. Click on Install.
The option loading is started, then the message window appears after completion. The option(s) is displayed
in the “Installed Options” table.
Note
Just after clicking on Install, the setup window might be displayed, depending on the option to be
installed. In this case, a proper entry/selection must be performed. Refer to Option setup window
described in this section.
c. Click on OK.
d. Click on Quit.
e. Eject the option MOD from the MOD drive.
f. When other option(s) is installed, repeat all steps above.
3. When Manual is selected:

The following screen appears.
a. Enter the licence string in the box, then click on Accept. The licence string is an unique number with 25 char-
acters that you get from your OLC.
Note
Just after clicking on Accept, the setup window might be displayed, depending on the option to be
3–19 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
b. The option loading is started, then the following window appears.
Click on OK.
c. The “CT Software Options” screen appears.

Verify that the option to be installed is displayed in the list as a ‘permanent’ mode.
3–20 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
d. When other option(s) is installed, repeat all steps above.
e. Click on Quit.
4. Click on shutdown icon in desktop menu. The system is rebooted.
6. Perform Section 3-5-1, Saving System State Data for backup.
3-5-5-2 When ‘Flex Trial’ is selected:

1. Enter the licence string in the box. The licence string is an unique number with 25 characters that you get from
your OLC.
2. Click on Accept.
Note
Just after clicking on Accept, the setup window might be displayed, depending on the option to be
3. The option loading is started, then the following window appears.

Click on OK.
3–21 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
4. The “CT Software Options” screen appears.
Verify that the option to be installed is displayed in the list as a ‘Flex Trial’ mode.
Note
‘Days left’ means the remaining days when a customer can use the option as a trial. This number
counts down day by day, then the option will disappear from the option list when ‘Days left’ becomes
0.
When the flex–trial option has expired and the [New Patient] button is clicked, the Option Status Log
window appears so that a customer can know the expired flex–trial option.
5. When other option(s) is installed, repeat all steps above.
6. Click on Quit.
3–22 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
Option Setup Windows

D Asymmetric Option:
Select the Asymmetric mode, then click on Accept.
Asymmetric Mode Meanings

10:1 Provides 10 mm and 1 mm slices.
Then after setting the Asymmetric mode, perform the following in this order.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
The following BOW is performed only to warm up the X–ray tube. So, do NOT adjust the De-
tector position even if the results go out of tolerance.
D BOW
Perform Service –> Calibration –> Automated Alignment –> BOW –> OK –> Confirm.
D Q–cal Channel Ratio:

Perform Service –> Calibration –> Automated Alignment –> Qcal Channel Ratio –>OK –> Confirm.
D Calibration:
Perform Service –> Calibration –> Service Calibration –> Asymmetric Seq.
D CT # Adjustment:
Perform Service –> Calibration –> CT # Adjustment.
3–23 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
D Denta Option:
1. Power ON a camera connected to the CT system.
2. “The procedure will send 1 or 2 films to the camera ...” message appears. Enter y
3. “Please select a printer in the list....” message appears. Select a proper printer.
4. Since a printer ejects a calibration film, measure distance (mm) printed in a film. (See the Note below.)
5. “Enter the distance Dist 1 in (mm).” message appears. Enter distance (mm) recorded in previous step. (See
the Note below.)
6. Click on Quit –> OK.
Note
Entry must be integer and performed in unit of mm.
Round off the first decimal place to the integer. If you have only a ruler with inch unit, convert inch
value to mm value using a formula of “xx inch x 25.4 = yy mm” .
3–24 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
D ConnectPro Option:
The ConnectPro setup window appears. Enter the parameters, then click on Accept.
Items Meanings
HIS Server IP Address Enter IP address of HIS Server.
HIS Server AE Title Enter AE Title of HIS Server.
HIS Server AE Port# Enter port# which is used to communicate with HIS Server. Default value
is 4008. You can use any number if it has consistency with HIS Server
and exclusive with other protocols.
CT Server AE Title The name of CT Scanner. Suggest to set Host name.
Note: According to a person who can take the responsibilities as a system (network) administra-
tor for the internal network system at the site. The person will be responsible for providing the
preinstallation network information.
Attention: AE Title of both of HIS Server and CT Scanner should be unique in the network.
You need to talk with network administrator to define these title.
3–25 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
For V/R 5.5 or later ONLY and for a hospital with PPS sever ONLY:
Next, the PPS Server setup window appears. Enter the parameters, then click on Accept.
Items Meanings
PPS Server IP Address Enter IP address of PPS Server.
PPS Server AE Title Enter AE Title of PPS Server.
PPS Server AE Port# Enter port# which is used to communicate with PPS Server. Default
value is 4500. You can use any number if it has consistency with PPS
Server and exclusive with other protocols.
CT Server AE Title The name of CT Scanner. Suggest to set Host name.
Note: According to a person who can take the responsibilities as a system (network) administra-
tor for the internal network system at the site. The person will be responsible for providing the
preinstallation network information.
Attention: AE Title of both of PPS Server and CT Scanner should be unique in the network.
You need to talk with network administrator to define these title.
3–26 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
D Raw Data 1000 Max Option:
The following message appears. Click on OK .
3–27 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
3-5-6 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.0x or lower
1. Click on Service icon to display the Service desktop Menu, then select System Tools –> Application Shut-
down.
2. On the desktop menu, click on Install Options button located on the upper right of the screen.
3. Insert the option MOD into the MOD drive, then click on OK.
3–28 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
3-5-6 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.0x or lower (Continued)
4. Select the Option to be installed using “Available Options” box.
The option loading is started, then the option installed is displayed at “Installed Option” box.
Note
Just after clicking on Install, the setup window might be displayed, depending on the option to be
installed. In this case, a proper entry/selection must be performed. Refer to Section 3-5-5, Installing
an Option Newly to the Installed–base System for V/R 5.5x or later, Option setup window.
6. Click on Quit.
7. Click on OK.
8. Eject the option MOD from the MOD drive.
9. When other option(s) is installed, repeat steps 2 to 8 above.
For Denta Scan Option on the System V/R 3.xx or lower ONLY:
13. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select System Tools –> unix shell.
14. Move the mouse in the window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:
% su<Enter>
Password: #bigguy <Enter>
> /user/g/ctuser/install/installcamera.denta <Enter>
Sending a film to the camera.
Enter the distance Dist 1 in (mm): <Enter>
The Laser camera will eject a test film.
15. Measure the distance (unit: mm) between two lines printed on the test film and enter it in the shell window.
16. Verify that “DentaScan filming option installed” message appears.
17. Enter Exit to terminate the shell.
For Extended Raw Data Option on the System V/R 3.xx or V/R 4.00 ONLY:
NOTICE
If the Extended Raw Data Option is installed after the LFC procedures, it might appears that
the installation completed successfully, but the actual space of the raw data does NOT in-
crease with the system . Therefore, to install this option, perform the LFC first, then install
it just before starting up system of the last phase of the LFC.
3–29 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
3-5-7 Installing Revision–up (Patch) Software
Prerequisite
D CD–ROM : Application Revision–up (Patch) Software
Loading Software
1. Click on Service icon to display the Service desktop Menu, then select Application Shutdown.
2. Insert the CD–ROM (application Patch Software) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.
3. On the desktop menu, click on Install Software located on the upper right of the screen.
4. “Do you install software from CD–ROM?” window appears. Click on Yes.
5. “Following patch software will be installed” window appears. Click on Yes.

The patch installation procedures are automatically started.
6. Click on OK in response to “Installation Successful.” window.
Note
Some patch softwares might require reboot (shown below). If it does, when clicking on OK, the sys-
tem automatically reboots and pauses at the desktop menu.
Software Package Installation
7. After completion of the patch installation, Click on Shell on the upper right of the screen.
3–30 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
3-5-7 Installing Revision–up (Patch) Software (Continued)

8. Type the following to eject the CD–ROM.
> eject <Enter>
> exit <Enter>
Patch Verification
1. Click on List S/W Package.
2. Click on Patch.
3. Verify that information for the patch installed are displayed. (Example)
******************************* Displayed *******************************
Patch NPP5x00x: HiSpeed, ProSpeed, CT/e Series Patch Software 5.xx
Patch NPP5x00y: HiSpeed, ProSpeed, CT/e Series Patch Software 5.xy
************************************************************************
4. Click on Close.
5. Click on shutdown to reboot the system. Verify that the system starts up with no error.
3–31 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
3-6 GANTRY SWITCH PANEL

The Gantry switch panels are located at upper right and left portion of the gantry front cover, and rear cover as option.
The key denomination is shown in the illustration below. Refer to Operator Manual for details.
Internal Landmark
External Landmark
Tilt Range & Scannable
Range Display
Positioning
Light
Table Up
Practice
Cradle Out
Cradle In
Table Down
IMS Move
Fast
Gantry Tilt
The Gantry service switches on the SDS board as shown in the Illustration below have the same function as the Gantry
switch panel. They are used when the Gantry front cover is removed.
Tilt Range & Scannable

External Landmark
Range Display
Positioning Internal Landmark
Light
Practice
IMS Move
Table Up
Table Down
Cradle In
Cradle Out Gantry Tilt
Fast
(BWD)
Gantry Tilt
(FWD)
3–32 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
3-7 TABLE HOME LOCK
Cradle Lock Assy

When performing the following check and adjustment, release the cradle lock using the release lever.
D CRADLE ABSOLUTE POSITION
Release Position Original Position
ÍÍ
ÍÍ Release Lever
Protect Cover
NOTICE
Do not forget to return the release lever. If it does not, the table will be damaged when moving
the cradle.
3–33 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
3-7 TABLE HOME LOCK (continued)
IMS Lock Assy

When performing the following check and adjustment, release the IMS lock using the release lever.
D IMS POSITION
ÈÈ Top Cover–L
Release Position Original Position
Release Lever
NOTICE
Do not forget to return the release lever. If it does not, the table will be damaged when moving
the IMS table.
3–34 INTRODUCTION
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 28 2202123
SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – CHECKS DURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 CHECKS PRIOR TO APPLYING POWER GROUND CONTINUITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1-3 TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
1-4 POWER LINE VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1-5 LOAD DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
1-6 GANTRY ROTATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11
1-7 EMERGENCY OFF TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
1-8 FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14
1-9 X–RAY TUBE OVERHEAT SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
1-10 SCAN TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
SECTION 2 – SOFTWARE LOADING FOR V/R 5.5 OR LATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2-3 SAVING PATIENT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2-4 SAVING SYSTEM STATE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2-5 SAVING OPTION INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
2-6 SHUTDOWN THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2-7 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE (CORE OS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
2-7-1 Loading Miniroot (Installation tool) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
2-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
2-8 INSTALLING APPLICATION SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2-8-1 Software Installation (For LFC Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2-8-2 Software Installation (For LFW Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18
2-9 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 1 – PRECONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–20
2-9-1 Restoring the System Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–20
2-10 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 2–AUXCONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
2-10-1 Initiating Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
2-10-3 Restoring Option Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22
2-10-4 Ejecting the CD–ROM and MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23
2-11 EDITING THE FILE (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH V/R 5.50 ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–24
2-12 INSTALLING REVISION–UP (PATCH) SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–25
2-12-1 Loading revision–up software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–25
2-12-2 Patch Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26
2-13 RESTORING THE SYSTEM STATE DATA AGAIN! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–27
2-14 CHANGING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (RECONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–28
2-14-1 Configuration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–28
2-14-2 Completing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–47
i SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 28 2202123
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)
SECTION PAGE
2-15 OPTION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–48
2-16 STARTING UP THE SYSTEM NOW! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–49
2-17 COMPLETING THE LFC / LFW PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–50
2-17-1 Restoring Patient Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–50
2-17-2 Setting Gamma Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–50
2-17-3 Test Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–50
2-18 INSITE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51
2-18-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51
2-18-2 Installing InSite Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51
2-18-3 Setting up InSite Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–54
2-18-4 Completing the insite installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–56
2-18-5 Saving InSite Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–56
2-19 APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–57
2-19-1 OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–57
2-19-2 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65
2-19-3 AutoFilm Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–68
SECTION 3 – SOFTWARE LOADING FOR V/R 5.0X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

3-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-2 PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3-14 OPTION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–36
3-16 SETTING DICOM PRINT CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–38
ii SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 28 2202123
SECTION PAGE
3-17-2 Setting CRT Gamma Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–44
3-17-3 Test Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–44
3-18-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–45
3-18-2 Installing InSite software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–45
3-19 TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51
3-20 APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–62
3-20-1 Entering the Machine Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–62
SECTION 4 – SOFTWARE LOADING FOR V/R 4.XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

4-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-2 PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4-5 RECORDING CAMERA DATA (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH CAMERA ONLY) . . . . . . 4–7
4-6 RECORDING INSITE INFORMATION (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH INSITE ONLY) . 4–9
4-15 EDITING THE FILE (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH V/R 4.0X ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–32
4-17 OPTION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–49
iii SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 28 2202123
SECTION PAGE
4-19-2 Setting CRT Gamma Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–51
4-19-3 Test Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–51
4-20-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–52
4-20-2 Installing InSite software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–52
4-20-3 Installing Proactive Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–55
4-20-4 Health Page Installation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–56
4-20-5 Setting Up Modem Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–57
4-21 TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–63
4-22 APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–74
4-22-1 The Reason Why the System State Data Must be Reloaded TWICE . . . . . 4–74
SECTION 5 – SOFTWARE LOADING FOR V/R 3.XX OR LOWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

5-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5-2 PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5-3 SAVING CUSTOMER DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5-6 DISCONNECTING THE SCSI CABLE FOR THE OPTIONAL PIONEER MOD DRIVE
(FOR V/R 3.XX OR LOWER SYSTEM ONLY) . 5–6
5-8-1 Software Installation (For LFC Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
5-8-3 Connecting the SCSI cable for the Optional Pioneer MOD Drive
(For v/r 3.xx or lower system only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5-10 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 2 – AUXCONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–17
5-11 INSTALLING THE APPLICATION REVISION–UP (PATCH) SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . 5–21
5-11-1 Loading Revision–up Software (For the System with V/R 3.xx or Later) . . . 5–21
5-11-2 Loading Revision–up Software (For the System with V/R 2.54 and 2.55) . . 5–23
5-11-3 Loading Revision–up Software (For the System with V/R 2.53 or lower) . . 5–24
iv SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 28 2202123
SECTION PAGE
5-12-1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–25
5-13 STARTING UP THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–32
5-14 COMPLETING THE LFC/LFW PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–33
5-15 SETTING CRT GAMMA VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–34
5-16 SELECTING AUTO VOICE LANGUAGE (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH V/R 2.02 OR LOWER
ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–35
5-17 DISPLAYING JAPANESE MESSAGE (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH V/R 1.20 ONLY) 5–36
5-18 APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–37
5-18-1 How to format a System HDD (For the System with V/R 3.xx or lower ONLY) 5–37
5-18-2 How to format an Image HDD (For the System with V/R 3.xx or lower ONLY) 5–39
5-18-3 The Reason Why the System State Data Must be Reloaded TWICE . . . . . 5–41
SECTION 6 – X–RAY ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1

6-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6-2 DETECTOR POSITION ALIGNMENT (FOR TWIN SYSTEM ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
6-3 APERTURE POSITION ALIGNMENT (FOR TWIN SYSTEM ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–9
6-4 PLANE OF ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–15
6-4-1 POR Except for Twin system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–15
6-4-2 POR for Twin System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–22
6-5 DETECTOR BEAM–ON–WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–26
6-5-1 BOW Except for Twin System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–26
6-5-2 BOW for Twin System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–31
6-6 QCAL CHANNEL RATIO (FOR TWIN SYSTEM ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–33
6-7 GRAVITY SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–34
6-7-1 G–SAG For HiSpeed ZX/i, NX/i, and NX/i Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–34
6-7-2 G–SAG For HiSpeed DX/i, FX/i, and LX/i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–35
6-8 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–38
6-9 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–42
6-10 RADIAL ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–45
SECTION 7 – SYSTEM CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1

7-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7-2 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY CHECK (X–RAYS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7-3 HILIGHT CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7-3-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7-3-2 Q Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
7-3-3 XT Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
7-3-4 AV Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
7-3-5 DG Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7-4 AIR AND PHANTOM CALIBRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7-5 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
SECTION 8 – IMAGE PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1

8-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
8-2 IMAGE PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
8-3 QUALITY ASSURANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4
v SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123
vi SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 32 2202123
SECTION 1 – CHECKS DURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
1-1 GENERAL
WARNING
This ‘Checks during System Installation’ is performed during the following:

System Installation
Periodic Maintenance.
For System Installation, it is required that all wiring and cabling are complete and equipment is installed.
Proceed to Section 1-2 ‘Checks prior to Applying Power’, and then, to Section 1-2 ‘Ground Continuity’, Section 1-3
‘Temperature,’ ... , in the section order.
1–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 32 2202123
1-2 CHECKS PRIOR TO APPLYING POWER GROUND CONTINUITY
CAUTION
Leave all power to the system OFF and tagged until power is called for in specific steps.
1. Verify the following:
a. Four Gantry Tilt Lock Plates are removed.
b. Gantry Azimuth Lock Pin is pulled out.
c. All of the following breakers and switches are OFF.
D Breaker on Power Distribution Box (hospital supply)
D 2 Breaker (CB1 or CB2) on the PDU
D 4 Switches (‘Rotate,’ ‘XG Power,’ ‘Table/Tilt,’and ’Slip Ring 115V’)
D Service switch on the Sub Board on the Gantry
D SYS–OFF–MNL switch on the TGP Board on the Gantry
D 2 Breakers (CB1 and CB2) on the OC
Illustration 1–1 PDU (Power Distribution Unit)
OFF
CB1 CB2
1–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 32 2202123
1-2 CHECKS PRIOR TO APPLYING POWER GROUND CONTINUITY (continued)
Illustration 1–2 Gantry
SERVICE
ON
SYS ABT SPD2 FAST CNT
HOME
SPD1
OFF
MID
SVE
OFF
SUB BOARD
MNL FIX SPD0 MID 90DEG
TGP BOARD
GANTRY LEFT SIDE
Illustration 1–3 Operator Console
CB1 AND CB2
OC REAR SIDE
TM1
1–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 32 2202123
1-3 TEMPERATURE
During the installation and start–up of the system you must take continuous temperature checks to make sure the
environment meets specifications listed in Section 3 of the Preinstallation manual. Excessive temperature, coupled
with reduced air flow from clogged filters, may overstress components and cause failures.
Filters
Check and clean all electronic equipment dust filters. GE recommends initially doing this on a weekly basis, because
new installations always have dust and dirt present at this stage. Over a period of time, you may increase the mainte-
nance interval as site environment improves.
Specifications
During installation, use the temperature/humidity recorder and a thermometer to record the temperature and relative
humidity in the scan room. Make sure the data you collect meets the following temperature and humidity
specifications.
D Scan Room
– Temperature: 20_ C ∼ 28_ C (at least 5_ C/hr gradient)
– Relative Humidity: 30 ∼ 70 % RH (Non Condensing)
D Operator’s Room and/or Equipment Room
– Temperature: 15_ C ∼ 30_ C (at least 5_ C/hr gradient)
– Relative Humidity: 20 ∼ 80 % RH (Non Condensing)
Action
Contact the air conditioning supplier or your local GE service department when your data fails to meet any
specifications.
1–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 32 2202123
1-4 POWER LINE VOLTAGE
Input Selection
Verify that an input selection on the Power Distribution Unit (See Illustrations 1–4 or 1–5) meets the input power volt-
age. If not, correct them.
The ‘input power voltage’ here means the rating voltage specified on the power distribution box (hospital supply), not
the measured voltage on the power distribution box.
Illustration 1–4 Voltage Selection (For 380~480V System)
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
SELECT
PROPER ÉÉ
INPUT
VOLTAGE.
ÂÂ
PROTECTION COVER
TRANSFORMER
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
1–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 32 2202123
1-4 POWER LINE VOLTAGE (Continued)
Illustration 1–5 Voltage Selection (For 208/200V System)
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ SELECT
ÉÉ PROPER
INPUT
VOLTAGE.
TRANSFORMER
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
PROTECTION COVER ÂÂ
1–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 32 2202123
1-4 POWER LINE VOLTAGE (continued)

The following assumes that the power source for the system was checked for mean voltage, as well as any line voltage
disturbance during preinstallation site checks.
Instrument
Use the same instrument (Dranetz, etc.) to monitor line voltage during this check that you used during the preinstalla-
tion check. The recommended line analyzer is the Dranetz Model 606–3 (3 channel) with the 101 frequency option, or
Dranetz Model line monitor plug in modules. You can use a similar analyzer, as long as it can monitor and report mean
voltage, surges, sags, short term impulses, and frequency drift.
Check Using an Instrument

Monitor the input power lines (200 VAC (for JAPAN Only), 380 VAC, 400 VAC, 415 VAC, 440 VAC, 460 VAC, or 480
VAC) to the PDU at the Power Distribution Box (on terminals L1, L2, and L3) (hospital supply). Check in particular:
D Verify that the current line voltage equals the voltage measured during the preinstallation check.
D Verify that mean line voltage does not fall outside of equipment specifications during the day to day opera-
tion of other site equipment during the installation period.
D Look for any line voltage disturbances and check for a correlation between disturbances and system mal-
functions such as “Aborts” or component failures.
From the printouts, ensure that the power supply meets the following criteria:
D Line Voltage : 200 VAC(for JAPAN Only), 380 VAC, 400 VAC, 415 VAC, 440 VAC, 460 VAC or
480 VAC
(50 Hz/60 Hz) (Normal Steady State)
D Daily Voltage Variation : +10% to –5% from nominal steady state (50 Hz)
+6% to –5% from nominal steady state (60 Hz)
D Frequency : 50 Hz ± 2 Hz, 60 Hz ± 2 Hz.
Check Using an Oscilloscope

Monitor the power lines with an oscilloscope and verify that no significant distortion, noise or transients exist. Switch
between the oscilloscope’s long and short time base to monitor for spikes, as well as line drift over time. Generally,
harmonics of the third, seventh, and eleventh derivative will be the most prevalent.
Action
Investigate any condition that falls out of spec. Identify the problem source(s) and resolve the problem.
1–7 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 32 2202123
1-5 LOAD DISTRIBUTION

Before attempting this power application and functional check, make sure that the breakers and switches match the
instructions given in ‘Checks prior to Applying Power Ground Continuity.’
WARNING
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST WITHIN THE UNIT, USE EXTREME CARE TO AVOID INJURY
TO PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT.
Follow this procedure exactly in the order it was written. This procedure was developed with your safety in mind.
Follow this sequence to protect you and the equipment from irreparable damage.
1. Preparation:
a. Remove the front cover from the PDU (to access the breakers).
b. Remove the rear cover from the OC (to access the breakers).
c. Remove the front, rear, and left side covers from the Gantry (to access the Servo amp).
d. Verify again that all breakers and switches (OC rear panel, Gantry rear base, and PDU) are OFF according to
‘Checks prior to Applying Power Ground Continuity.’
e. Verify that wiring and cabling are correctly connected.
2. Switch ON the breaker on the power distribution box (hospital supply).
3. Switch ON the CB2 breaker on the PDU.
4. Verify that the power–ON lamp of the PDU is ON.
1–8 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 32 2202123
1-5 LOAD DISTRIBUTION (Continued)

5. Measure 24.5 ∼ 25.5 VDC between output terminals of the DC power supply. See Illustration 1–6.
6. Measure the followings:
D Slip Ring line:

95 ∼ 135 VAC between terminals 1 and 2 of TM5 in the PDU when CB2/CB5 are ON and
CB1/CB3/CB4/CB6 are OFF.
D AUX line:
95 ∼ 135 VAC between terminals 11 and 12 of TM2 when CB2/CB6 are ON and CB1/CB3/CB4/CB5 are
OFF.
7. Push the OC power switch once. The K2, K3, and K4 will be turned ON. (This does NOT turn ON the OC since the
CB6 is OFF.)
8. Measure the followings:
D OC line:
95 ∼ 135 VAC between terminals 7 and 8 of TM2 when CB2/CB6 are ON and CB1/CB3/CB4/CB5 are OFF.
D TG115V line:
95 ∼ 135 VAC between terminals 3 and 4 of TM2 when CB2/CB4 are ON and CB1/CB3/CB5/CB6 are OFF.
D TG200V line:
165 ∼ 235 VAC between terminals 1 and 2 of TM2 when CB2/CB3 are ON and CB1/CB4/CB5/CB6 are
OFF.
D Jedi line:
340 ∼ 530 VAC between terminals 1, 3, and 5 of K1 when CB1 are ON and CB2/CB3/CB4/CB5/CB6 are
OFF.
9. Turn ON all breakers in the PDU.
1–9 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 32 2202123
1-5 LOAD DISTRIBUTION (Continued)
Illustration 1–6 Measurement on PDU
RMT CNT Assy

Power Supply
CB1
CB5
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
CB6
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
K20
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
CB2
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
K8 K9
K19
CB3
CB4
K3
K2
K5 K6 K7 K1
10. Push the OC power switch once. This does not turn ON the OC.
11. Verify that the voltage between terminals on TM 1 of the OC is 95 ∼ 135 VAC. See Illustration 1–3.
12. Switch ON the ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
Verify that the x–ray generator on the rotating assembly is powered ON; this can be verified by checking that
LEDs on the XG controller boards turn ON. Also verify that the x–ray tube fan and pump start to operate.
13. Switch on the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
14. Measure 180 ∼ 220 VAC on the Servo Amplifier input (between N and L terminals).
15. Turn ON the breakers of the OC.
16. Install the OC, PDU, and Gantry covers.
1–10 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 32 2202123
1-6 GANTRY ROTATION CHECK
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD! BECAUSE OF THE CONTINUOUS ROTATION OF THE GANTRY THERE
ARE HAZARDS INVOLVED IN WORKING ON OR NEAR THE GANTRY. THE MOST OBVIOUS
HAZARD IS THE AXIAL MOTION OF THE GANTRY. THE HIGH VOLTAGE (HV) SUBSYSTEM
IS MOUNTED DIRECTLY ONTO THE GANTRY. THE HV SUBSYSTEM CONSISTS OF
COMPONENTS THAT ARE BULKY AND HEAVY. GIVE ROTATION HAZARDS RESPECT.
1. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove all covers from the Gantry.
3. Set the safety brackets (three) on the Gantry frame.
4. Switch ON the ‘Table/Tilt’ switch.
5. Set the Service switch to ON on the SUB Board on the Gantry.
6. Rotate the Gantry manually to verify that nothing interferes the Gantry during rotation (cables, etc.).
7. Set the Service switch to OFF.
8. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
Verify that you hear the rotation alarm sound.
9. Switch OFF the ‘Power’ switch on the OC.
10. Switch ON the ‘Power’ switch on the OC.
Verify that the Gantry starts to rotate, and it stops at the home position (x–ray tube at 12 o’clock position) before
making two revolutions.
1–11 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 32 2202123
1-7 EMERGENCY OFF TEST

After this test, press the reset button on the OC to resume the system.
1. Power ON the system.
2. Remove the left side maintenance cover from the Gantry.
3. Move the cradle IN from its home position.
4. Press one of the emergency stop switches on the Gantry.
5. Verify that power is removed from the Gantry and Table. Verify the following:
a. LEDs on the TGP board are extinguished.
b. Gantry display panels (right and left) are extinguished.
6. Depress one of the tilt buttons, to verify the emergency stop disables tilt.
7. Depress one of the table elevation buttons, to verify the emergency stop disables table elevation.
8. Depress one of the cradle drive buttons, to verify the emergency stop disables the cradle drive.
9. Move the cradle to the home position by hand, to verify the emergency stop released the cradle clutch.
10. Make sure the cradle latches securely in the home position.
11. Using a pencil, press the emergency stop reset switch on the OC (see Illustration 1–7). Make sure the tilt, eleva-
tion, and cradle drive now work.
1–12 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 32 2202123
1-7 EMERGENCY OFF TEST (Continued)
Illustration 1–7 Location of Emergency Stop Reset Switch
EMERGENCY STOP RESET SWITCH
12. Repeat steps 1. through 11. using the other Gantry emergency stop switch (one).
13. Repeat steps 1. through 11. using the OC emergency stop switch (one).
14. OC Emergency OFF test:
a. Perform the scan using the following parameters:
0.8 sec/120 kV/10 mm thickness/160 mA (NP+Twin/NP+/NP)

0.7 sec/120 kV/10 mm thickness/160 mA (NP++/NP++Twin)
b. During scanning, press the OC Emergency stop switch.
c. Verify that:
D Immediately X–ray exposure stops.
D The Gantry stops to rotate within two revolutions.
15. Repeat steps 1. through 11. using the PDU emergency stop switch (one).
16. Remove all the covers from the Gantry, then repeat steps 1. through 11. using the Gantry emergency stop
switches on its frame (four).
1–13 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 32 2202123
1-8 FILTER
There are two filters on the OC.
D OC: Horizontal, two on the bottom of console
Perform the following cleaning procedure.
1. Slide the filter at the bottom of the OC forward until it is removed from the OC.
(The OC front cover does not need to be removed)
2. Suck up any dust on the filters with a vacuum cleaner.
3. Slide or fit each filter back into its enclosure.
1–14 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 32 2202123
1-9 X–RAY TUBE OVERHEAT SAFETY

Check the overheat detection function by performing the following:
1. Verify that Anode Rotation of the Tube is OFF. If not, perform Rotor OFF scan from Offline Scan screen of OC
to stop the Rotor.
2. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “Slip Ring 115V” and “XG Power” switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the front and the left maintenance covers of the Gantry.
4. Disconnect the rotor connector:
If the connector is not accessible, perform the following:
a. Set the Service switch to ON on the SUB Board.
b. Rotate the Gantry manually to the home position (x–ray tube at the 12 o’clock position).
c. Set the Service switch to OFF.
5. Switch ON the “Slip Ring 115V” and “XG Power” switches at the Gantry rear base.
6. Try to perform Offline scan; select “Stationary”, and Azimuth “C”.
7. Verify that a scan can not be performed and that the “XG ERROR” message is reported on the CRT status
screen.
8. Switch OFF the “Slip Ring 115V” and “XG Power” switches.
9. Reconnect the connector.
1–15 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 32 2202123
1-9 X–RAY TUBE OVERHEAT SAFETY (continued)
Illustration 1–8 Rotor Cable Connector at X–ray Tube
For System with D3142T Tube
Rotor Connector (Brown)
Rotor Connector
1–16 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 32 2202123
1-10 SCAN TEST

This ‘Scan Test’ procedure assumes that all the subsystems (Operator Console, Gantry, Table, DAS/Detector, and
X–ray generator) are functioning normally.
In this procedure refer to the Operator manual for detailed information.
Warm Up Scan
1. Make sure that nothing is in the scan area in the Gantry room.
2. Click on the ‘Daily Prep’ icon to start the x–ray tube warm–up program.
3. Press the blinking [Start Scan] button on the OC keyboard to start the warm–up scan.
It will take approx. 3 minutes to complete scans.
Make sure that all warm up scans complete without error.
4. Click on [OK] button to return to the initial screen.
Scoutview Scan
5. Perform a series of scout scans to check scout scan operations:
a. Tilt the Gantry to any angle (other than 0°).
b. Try to perform a scout scan. (Any scan parameters can be set.)
Make sure that the software prohibits a scout scan with the Gantry tilted.
c. Tilt the Gantry to the 0 deg. position.
d. Lay the 25 cm water phantom horizontally on the cradle.

Perform an AP (0°) scout scan on the phantom.
Verify that the phantom diameter (In–Out direction) on the image is 266 mm ±3 mm.
e. Set the QA phantom on the phantom holder.

Perform an LT (90°) scout scan on the phantom.
f. Use the [External landmark] button on the Gantry control panel to perform the phantom positioning so that
positioning light and center of the phantom are aligned.
g. Select [Suspension] for Autovoice.
h. Press the [External landmark] button and verify that:
D The cradle can NOT be moved.
D The cradle position is the same value as the external landmark.
i. Click on Confirm, then verify that the [Move to Scan] button blinks.
1–17 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 32 2202123
1-10 SCAN TEST (continued)

j. Press the [Move to Scan] button, then press the [Stop Move] button before the cradle reaches the set position.
Verify that the cradle stops to move and the [Move to Scan] button blinks again.
k. Press the [Move to Scan] button and move the cradle to the set position. Verify that the [Start Scan] button
blinks.
l. Perform the scan and verify that the scan can complete with no error.
Axial Scan Sequence

6. Perform a series of axial scans to check axial scan operations:
a. Tilt the Gantry to the 0 deg. position.
b. Set the QA phantom on the phantom holder.
c. Use the [Internal landmark] button on the Gantry control panel to perform the phantom positioning so that
positioning light and center of the phantom are aligned.
d. Select [Inspiration] for Autovoice.
e. Use the following scan parameters: (Other parameters can be set to any value.)
Thickness : 10 mm
kV : 120 kV
mA : 150 mA
Interval : 10 mm
Scan time : 3 sec
Position : Feet First
f. Click on Confirm, then verify that the [Start Scan] button blinks.
g. Press the [Start Scan] button and verify that:
D You can hear and understand auto voice for scan start.
D The scan starts.
D Both X–ray ON indicators on the OC keyboard and Gantry panel is lit and X–ray ON alarm starts to sound.
h. Press the [Pause] button during scanning and verify that:
D The scan stops at next ISD and the [Confirm] button is changed to the [Resume] button.
D You can hear and understand auto voice for scan end.
i. Click on Resume, then verify that the [Start Scan] button blinks again.
j. Press the [Start Scan] again to continue scanning.
1–18 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 32 2202123
1-10 SCAN TEST (continued)

k. Press the [Stop Scan] button and verify that:
D The scan stops IMMEDIATELY and the [Confirm] button is changed to the [Resume] button.
D Both X–ray ON indicators on the OC keyboard and Gantry panel is OFF and X–ray ON alarm stops to
sound.
D You can hear and understand auto voice for scan end.
l. Click on End Exam and verify that the rotation of the Gantry and rotor in the X–ray tube stops to rotate.
Axial Scan
7. Perform a series of axial scans to check axial scan operations:
a. Tilt the Gantry to the 0 deg. position.
b. Set the QA phantom on the phantom holder.
c. Use the following scan parameters: (Other parameters can be set to any value.)
Acquisition No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Scan Time [sec] NP/NP+/ 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0
NP+Twin
NP++/ 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0
NP++Twin
Thickness : 10 mm
kV : 120 kV
mA : 150 mA
Interval : 10 mm
Position : Feet First
No. of Images : 2
d. Verify that each scan completes with no error.
1–19 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123
1–20 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
SECTION 2 – SOFTWARE LOADING

FOR V/R 5.5 OR LATER (INCLUDING V/R 6 AND V/R 7)
Compatible with Version 5.5x or later System Software, including

V/R 6.xx and V/R 7.xx
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Use this instructions when:
D Performing the System Version–up (LFC) or Revision–up (LFW)
D Replacing the HDD with a new one (LFC)
2-1 GENERAL
WARNING
IF THE SYSTEM HAS THE UPS ASSY, MAKE SURE YOU TURN OFF THE UPS POWER
BEFORE YOU ACCESS THE OPERATOR CONSOLE.
This ‘Software Loading’ describes the Load–From–Cold (LFC) procedure for a full system software loading (OS +
application) procedure (Load–From–Cold : LFC) and Load–From–Warm (LFW) procedure only for NP application
loading from CD–ROMs and some MODs to the system hard disk.
Shaded paragraph shown in this section means that this might happens depending on a system.
CAUTION
Make sure that all Images have been reconstructed and archived on the MOD before perform-
ing this procedure (Refer to the Operator Manual). This procedure will re–initialize all system
data disk, erasing all images and scan data.
2–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-1 General (Continued)

An LFC/LFW procedures are outlined in Illustration 2–1.
NOTICE
If system version is returned to old version, the LFC procedure MUST be used. (Do NOT use
the LFW procedure.)
NOTICE
When the V/R 4.x is installed:
Depending on the system, the CD–ROM jumper setting might be changed. Refer to the OC
Jumper setting, CD–ROM of this manual.
Illustration 2–1 Software Loading Standard Procedure
Procedures Prerequisite
LFC LFW
1 Saving Patient Data Two blank MODs

2 Saving System State Data None A blank MOD
3 Saving Option Information –
4 Shutdown the System None –
5 Installing System Software (OS) None Two CD–ROMs: Core
* Loading Installation Tool OS
* Disk Partitioning and OS Installa-
tion
6 Installing Application Software CD–ROM(s): Applica-
tion Software
7 System Configuration – Phase 1 (preconfig)
Restoring the System Configuration Data MOD in which the
system state data has
been saved
8 System Configuration – Phase 2 (auxconfig)
Initiating Configuration –
Restoring the System State Data MOD in which the
been saved
Restoring the Option Key –
Ejecting Application CD–ROM and MOD –
9 Editing the File (For the System with V/R 5.50 ONLY) –
(Continued)
2–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
LFC LFW
10 Installing the Revision–up (Patch) software
Loading Revision–up (Patch) software CD–ROM : (Patch)
Software
Patch Verification –
11 Restoring the System State Data AGAIN! MOD in which the
been saved
12 Changing System Configuration (Reconfig) –
13 Option Check –
14 Starting Up the System NOW! –
15 Completing the LFC / LFW Procedures
Restoring Patient Data MODs in which the
images or raw data
have been saved
Setting Gamma Value –
Test Scan –
16 Installing the InSite Software None CD–ROM : InSite
(Service) Software
2–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-2 PREPARATION
Prepare the followings before starting the LFC/LFW Procedure.
D CD–ROMs : Core OS (OS) (1 of 2) and (2 of 2) (for LFC Only)
D CD–ROM : Application Software
D CD–ROM : Patch Software (if required)
D CD–ROM : Service Software (InSite software, if required)
D Option MOD (if new options are installed)
D 2 MODs (Must be prepared by FE)
– For Saving System State Data (one MOD’s A side)
– For Saving Patient Images (another MOD’s A side)
– For Saving Raw Data (another MOD’s B side)
Note
5 inches 2.3 GB MOD is required.
NOTICE
Always use a 5 inch 2.3GB MOD media. A 1.2GB or 600MB MOD can NOT be used when sav-
ing data.
Note
For the MODs to save system state data or patient images, they do NOT need to be manually for-
matted. (A used–MOD is available.) This means that the format procedures will be automatically
started before saving data.
2–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-3 SAVING PATIENT DATA
CAUTION
Make sure that all Images and raw data have been reconstructed and archived on the MOD
before performing this procedure (Refer to the Operator Manual). Both LFC and LFW proce-
dures will re–initialize all system data disk, erasing all images and scan data.
Prerequisite
D Two blank MOD
Note
Patient Image data and Raw data MUST be saved on the different MODs.
Procedures
1. If required, save the Patient image on a MOD. Refer to the Operator manual. (Image Works –> Selection (e.g.
select all examination) –> Archive –> (Label) –> Save examination)
After saving image data, perform Archive –> Detach, then eject the MOD.
2. If required, save the raw data on a MOD. Refer to the Operator manual. The MOD must be initialized first when
using a new MOD. (Scan –> Scanner Utilities –> Rawdata Function –> Function Selection –> Save to
MOD –> Rawdata Selection (e.g. Whole exam) –> Start Save)
2–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-4 SAVING SYSTEM STATE DATA
Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section (because it will be saved in Section 2-8-2, Software Installation
(For LFW procedure)) and go to Section 2-5, Saving Option Information.
Prerequisite
D One blank MOD
Manpower Requirements
D Approx. 10 minutes
Procedures
Before beginning the software install, save the system state data.
1. Verify that the system is powered ON.
2. Set the write protect tab of the MOD to the write position and insert the MOD into the MOD drive of the OC.
3. Select Service –> Application shutdown –> OK –> Savestate.
4. Click on Confirm.

Note
You can see the message “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” after clicking “Continue”
button several times. This is the last chance to cancel the procedure “Saving system state data”.
If “Continue” is clicked on this message, you can NOT cancel this procedure any more.
Note
– IOS preferences
– Autovoice files
– Crosstalk A, B channel data
– TnT Definition File log
– Q cal channel ratio
7. Press the eject button of the MOD drive to eject the MOD from the MOD drive.
2–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-5 SAVING OPTION INFORMATION
The option information are normally saved in the system state data. However, they must be written down in the follow-
ing table as a back–up. This table can be used when option data reloading fails.
1. On the desktop menu, click on List Option button located on the upper right of the screen.
Option list will appear.
2. Write down the current “Installed option”.
Option Installed? Option Installed? Option Installed?
3D Dicom MOD Raw Data 1000 Max

Smart Prep Power 200mA Max Remote Tilt
Smart Recon Power 250mA Max Enhanced Cooling
SmartView Power 300mA Max Extended FOV
DentaScan Power 350mA Max Performix Tube
Navigator Power 440mA Max Performix 530 Cooling
CTPerfusion Fast Scan 0.7 sec Thickness 1mm
Helical Plus Fast Scan 0.8 sec Thickness 0.5mm
Connect Pro Fast Scan 1.0 sec Asymmetric Scan
ImageDisk Helical 30 Max Cardiac Gating
ImageDisk 20000 Helical 60 Max Scan Limit 2.0 sec
Pioneer MOD Helical 120 Max Smart Addition
Respiratory Gating
Note: Depending on the system version, unavailable option might be included in the option list above.
3. Click on Quit to return to the desktop menu.
2–7 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-5 Saving Option Information (Continued)

4. For Asymmetric Option Only:
When a system contains Asymmetric Scan Option, the asymmetric mode must be recorded. This is used at
Section 2-10-3, Restoring the Option key.
a. Click on Reconfig –> Preferences.
b. Click on Configuration of the Asymmetric scan.
c. Write down the asymmetric mode (10:1, 10:2, or 6:1), then click Quit –> Quit to return to the desktop menu.
2–8 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-5 Saving Option Information (Continued)

5. For ConnectPro Option Only:
When a system contains ConnectPro Option, the setting parameters must be recorded. This is used at Section
2-10-3, Restoring the Option key.
a. Click on shell.
b. Enter the following commands to display the ConnectPro information, then write down them to the table be-
low.
cat /usr/g/config/WLSystem.cfg
AE_Title HIS Server AE Title
IP_Address HIS Server IP Address
Port_Number HIS Server AE Port #
cat /usr/g/config/WLdcm.cfg
bi_apptitle CT Server AE Title
cat /usr/g/ctuser/app–defaults/network/ppsServer.map
AppTitle PPS Server AE Title
IPAddress PPS Server IP Address
IPPortNo PPS Server AE Port #
c. Enter Exit to return to the desktop menu.
2–9 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-6 SHUTDOWN THE SYSTEM
Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section and go to Section 2-8-2, Installing Application Software, Soft-
ware Loading (LFW procedure).
1. Click on Shutdown on the desktop menu.
Some test programs run. The NO button to be displayed is clicked.
2. Verify that the message “Okay to power off the system now. Press any key to restart.” appears.
3. Click on Restart.
4. Few seconds later, the window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button
appears (shown below).
Starting up the system

Stop for maintenance
Stop for maintenance button

can be clicked instead of press-
ing the ESC key.
5. Press ESC key.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
When replacing the HDD with a new one ONLY:
The HDD labeling procedure MUST be performed at this time!!!
Refer to Section 2-19, Troubleshooting Tips, HDD labeling procedures.
2–10 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-7 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE (CORE OS)
Note
Prerequisite
D CD–ROMs : Core OS (OS) (1 of 2) and (2 of 2)
Procedures
2-7-1 Loading Miniroot (Installation tool)

1. Insert the CD–ROM (Core OS system software (1 of 2)) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.
2. Verify that the LED of the CD–ROM drive is ON, then OFF again.
3. Click on Install System Software.
4. Click on Local CD–ROM icon.
Note
The following CD–ROM error might appear, but ignore it.
“dksc1d1vol alert illegal request illegal field in CDB (asc=0x24, asq=0x0) CDB:1aoooc0”
“Copying Installation tools to disk” message appears. (miniroot loading phase) A few minutes later, the screen
will become in black, then “Inst Main Menu” appears.
Note
When some errors occur at this time, refer to Section 2-19-1, OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips.
2–11 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-7-1 Loading Miniroot (Installation tool) (Continued)

Note
Depending on the disk capacity, system version, etc..., the following steps 7 to 8 might be
skipped.
Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.
Press Enter to invoke C Shell csh: <Enter> (Enter key only)
# mkfs –t xfs /dev/rdsk/dks0d1s0 <Enter>
******************************* Displayed *******************************

meta–data=xxxxxxx
data=xxxxxxx
log=xxxxxx
real time=xxxxxxx
************************************************************************
# exit <Enter>
Make new file system on /dev/dsk/dks0d1s0 [yes/ne/sh/help]: yes <Enter>

Are you sure? [y/n] (n): y <Enter>
Do you want an EFS or XFS file system? [efs/xfs]: xfs <Enter>
Block size of file system 512 or 4096 bytes? 4096 <Enter>
2–12 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation

Inst> admin <Enter>
Admin> sh <Enter> (To enter shell)
# mount /CDROM <Enter>
# /CDROM/bin/makepart <Enter>
2. Verify that the following message are displayed.
******************************* Displayed *******************************

Creating disk partitions automatically.
.......
************************************************************************
Click on Restart.
Note
Instead of clicking on Restart, pressing ESC key twice goes to step5.
When “/CDROM/bin/makepart [258] xxxxx (coredump)” message appears:
Even if this appears, the partitioning is correctly executed, but a problem lies in executing the shut-
down process.
Therefore, if this happens, switch OFF the OC, wait for a few seconds, then switch ON the OC.
If a error except above occurs, refer to Section 2-19-1, OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips.
The window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button appears (shown be-
low).


ing the ESC key.
4. Press ESC key.
2–13 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation (Continued)

7. Verify that:
D The CD–ROM (Core OS (1 of 2)) remains into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.
D The LED of the CD–ROM drive is ON, then OFF again.
“Copying Installation Tools to disk” message appears.
Note
skipped.
Enter your selection and Press ENTER (c, f, r, or a) r <Enter>

(Procedure for reloading miniroot tool is started. It takes approx. 1 minutes.)
******************************* Displayed *******************************

meta–data=xxxxxxx
data=xxxxxxx
log=xxxxxx
real time=xxxxxxx
************************************************************************
# exit <Enter>

2–14 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123

Inst> admin <Enter>
# /CDROM/bin/cptool <Enter>
# /makedisk <Enter>
(Procedure for system file configuration is started. It takes approx. 15 minutes.)
Note:
The error messages might be displayed when a command “/CDROM/bin/makedisk” is
entered. If this happens, enter a command “/CDROM/bin/makedisk” again to proceed.
14. Verify that the following message will appear.

************* Displayed **************************************************
Installations and removals were successful.
Enter HiSpeed, ProSpeed, CT/e Series Core OS (2 of 2) CD–ROM...
************************************************************************
15. Press the eject button of the CD–ROM drive to eject the CD–ROM, Core OS (1 of 2), from the CD–ROM drive.
16. Insert the CD–ROM, Core OS (2 of 2), into the CD–ROM drive.
Installation procedure starts. It takes approx. 7 minutes to complete it.
17. After completion of installing Core OS (2 of 2), verify that the following message will appear.
************* Displayed *************************************************
........
Exit from the shell using ‘exit’.
************************************************************************
# exit <Enter>
Admin> exit <Enter>
Inst> exit <Enter>
Automatically reconfiguring the operating system.

Ready to restart the system. Restart? xxxxx y <Enter>
(The screen will become in black.)
NOTICE
Do not remove the OS CD–ROM at this time. It MUST be removed in Section 2-8, Installing
Application Software.
2–15 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123

19. Approx. 30 seconds later, “IRIS’s Internet address....” message appears (shown below).
IRIS’s Internet address is the default.

Using standalone network mode.
Note
In the next message, you might see the error message, “ALERT: SCSI hard error on (1,3). scb
0x807aeac0”. This will continues to be displayed for the system with DASM only until the configura-
tion setting is completed. However, this message can be ignored.
The system will automatically login as root.
2–16 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-8 INSTALLING APPLICATION SOFTWARE
Note
For installing the application revision–up (Patch) software, refer to Section 2-12.
Prerequisite
D For LFW ONLY:

One blank MOD (for saving the system state data)
Procedures
2-8-1 Software Installation (For LFC Procedure)

1. Double–click on instsw icon.
a. Select the system Product Name.
b. Click Yes.
(Pressing No returns to the Select Product window.)
“Enter Application Software CD–ROM in drive” message appears and the OS CD–ROM will be ejected from the
CD–ROM drive.
2. Insert the CD–ROM (application software) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.
Application software loading procedures are automatically started.
It takes approx. 7 minutes.
After completing application software loading, the system will be automatically rebooted, then IRIS main menu
appears again.
NOTICE
Do not remove the CD–ROM at this time!!!
It MUST be removed in Section 2-10-4, Ejecting the
CD–ROM.
2–17 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-8-2 Software Installation (For LFW Procedure)

1. On the desktop menu, click on LFW located on the upper right of the screen.
2. Click on Yes in response to “Do you really want to do LFW?”
3. Set the write protect tab of the blank MOD to the write position and insert the MOD into the MOD drive of the
OC.

Note
7. Remove the MOD from the MOD drive.
8. Select the system Product Name.
9. Click Yes.
“Enter Application Software CD–ROM in drive” message appears.
appears again.
NOTICE
CD–ROM.
2–18 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-8-2 Software Installation (For LFW Procedure) (Continued)

Note
Depending on the system, the following steps 11 might be skipped.
11. Select “Copy the environment from the selected machine” then click on OK if the following window
appears:
<Desktop Environment setup>

You have logged in to the following system(s) in the past, on which your
home directory is mounted.
“IRIS”
Choose how you want your environment to be setup.

– Create a new environment.
– Copy the environment from the selected machine.
– Share (link) the environment with the selected machine.
To skip this window at login, check below:

– Always create, copy, or share as chosen above.
2–19 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-9 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 1 – PRECONFIG)
NOTICE
Do not check or change system configuration at this time
(preconfig phase). It is performed at section 2-14, Chang-
ing System Configuration (Reconfig).
Prerequisite
D MOD (including the system state data saved in section 2-4)
2-9-1 Restoring the System Configuration Data

1. Double–click on Preconfig icon located at the upper right of the screen.
2. “Insert mod and press confirm!” message appears.
Insert the MOD, including the system state data saved in section 2-4, into the MOD drive.
4. Click on Continue icon a few times. The system setting screen appears.
5. Click on Accept. (Nothing changes.)
The system is rebooted. It takes approx. 7 minutes.
2–20 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-10 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 2–AUXCONFIG)
Prerequisite
D Approx. 7 minutes
2-10-1 Initiating Configuration

1. Double–click on auxconfig icon.
2. The Date entry screen appears.
D When modifying date, click on Set, then Quit.
D When not–modifying date to proceed, click on Quit.
The system configuration procedures are started, then automatically login as root.
Procedures
1. “Restore System State data (Click on No if no saved data exists)?” appears. Click on Yes.
2. “Insert MOD and Press Confirm!” appears. Verify that the MOD, including the system state data saved in section
2-4, is inserted into the MOD drive, then click on Confirm.

Go to section 2-10-3, Restoring Option Key.
2–21 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-10-3 Restoring Option Key
Prerequisite
D None
D Approx. 3 minutes
Procedures
Do NOT touch any soft buttons ex-

The option installation procedures automatically starts.
cept for entry described in Note!
After completing automatic installation for option, the system shuts down, then starts up automatically. Then go to
Section 2-10-4, Ejecting the CD–ROM.
Note
When the system contains the following options, the proper entry must be required.
D Denta Option:
4. Since a printer ejects a calibration film, measure distance (mm) printed in a film.
5. “Enter the distance Dist 1 in (mm).” message appears. Enter distance (mm) recorded in previous step.
Note
Entry must be performed in unit of mm. If you have only a ruler with inch unit, convert inch value to mm
value using a formula of “xx inch x 25.4 = yy mm”
1. ConnectPro setup window appears. Enter the parameters written down in 2-5, Saving Option Informa-
tion, then click on Accept.
2. PPS Server Setup window appears. Any values might be entered as a default. Enter the parameters
written down in 2-5, Saving Option Information, then click on Accept. (When the hospital does Not has a
PPS server, perform no modification and click on Accept.)

“All scan data has been removed” message appears. Click on OK .
D Asymmetric Scan Option:

Select the asymmetric mode (recorded in Section 2-5, Saving Option Information), then click on Accept .
2–22 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-10-4 Ejecting the CD–ROM and MOD

1. “Auto–Start Disabled” window appears. Click on OK.
2. In desktop menu, select Shell and type the following to eject the CD–ROM.
> eject <Enter>
> exit <Enter>
NOTICE
Do NOT click on Startup at this time!
2–23 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-11 EDITING THE FILE (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH V/R 5.50 ONLY)
The following patch procedures must be performed for the system with V/R 5.50 ONLY. For the system with 5.51
or later, skip this section, then go to Section 2-12, Installing Revision–up (Patch) Software.
1. Click on Shell located on the upper right of the screen.
2. Move the mouse in the shell window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:
% su
<Enter>
> cd /usr/g/config <Enter>
> nedit rawmgr.init <Enter>
3. Select Search –> Find.
4. The Find window appears. Move the cursor into the Find window, then enter #STARTTIMEOUT , then click
on Find to display “#STARTTIMEOUT=” in the window.
NOTICE
If the cursor is left in the script window, the script
will be rewritten so that the system can not be
started up.
5. Delete “#” and add “60” to be modified to STARTTIMEOUT=60 .
Modified
6. Select File –> Save.
7. Select File –> Exit.
8. Enter exit twice to terminate the shell window.
NOTICE
2–24 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-12 INSTALLING REVISION–UP (PATCH) SOFTWARE
If the system has a revision–up (patch) software, it must be installed at this time.
If it does not, skip this section, then go to section 2-14, Changing System Configuration (reconfig).
2-12-1 Loading revision–up software

This is the common procedures for system revision–up.
Prerequisite
Procedures
3. “Do you install software from CD–ROM?” window appears. Click on Yes.
4. “Following software will be installed” window appears. Click on Yes.

5. Click on OK in response to “Installation Successful.” window.
Note
Some patch softwares might require reboot (shown below). If it does, when clicking on OK, the sys-
tem automatically reboots and pauses at the desktop menu.
6. After completion of the patch installation, Click on Shell on the upper right of the screen.
2–25 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-12-1 Loading revision–up software (Continued)

> eject <Enter>
> exit <Enter>
NOTICE
2-12-2 Patch Verification

2. Click on Patch.
******************************* Displayed *******************************
************************************************************************
4. Click on Close.
NOTICE
2–26 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-13 RESTORING THE SYSTEM STATE DATA AGAIN!
When performing the LFC/LFW, manually restore the system state data AGAIN at this time.
Do NOT start up the system yet!
Prerequisite
D Approx. 2 minutes
Procedures
1. In desktop menu, select Restorestate.
2. “Insert MOD and Press Confirm!” appears. Insert the MOD, including the system state data saved in section
2-4, into the MOD drive, then click on Confirm.
6. Eject the MOD from the MOD drive.
NOTICE
2–27 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-14 CHANGING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Reconfig)
The System configuration data MUST be checked or changed when a different version of the application software
has been loaded, because new setting(s) might be added in a new version of software.
2-14-1 Configuration Setup
1. In desktop menu, click on Reconfig located on the upper right of the screen.
This System configuration screen appears.
2. Enter the appropriate configuration data.
NOTICE
The following items restrict the use of characters for entry. Do NOT use other characters.
Items Characters Usable for Entry

Hospital Name alphanumerics (a–zA–Z0–9), underscore (_), period (.), comma (,), and space
Machine # numerics (0–9)
Station Name alphanumerics (a–zA–Z0–9), underscore (_), and period (.)
2–28 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-14-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)

3. System Setting Screen:
a. Changes Hospital Name to the site’s preferred name.
b. Select the Timezone for this site, and record it below.
Time Zone
c. Verify Model Name.
Note
The Model Name is currently not implemented.
d. Verify Machine # .
The unique machine # is printed on the label attached near the OC rating plate.
e. Verify/change Station Name. (Entry MUST be performed using up to 4 characters.)
f. Select Preferences to proceed to the next screen.
2–29 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123

4. Preferences Setting Screen:
a. Select Time Format to be displayed on screen.
b. Select Units for patient weight for units for patient weight to be displayed on images.
c. For HiSpeed Series ONLY:

Select Bone Kernel. (default: Type 1)
Note
“Type 2” is less artifact, but lower resolution than Type 1.
d. Select Date Format to be displayed on images.
Note
To use Japanese era for date, YY/MM/DD format must be selected.
2–30 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123

e. Select Auto mA. Select Target SD1 for higher mA, Target SD2 for middle mA, or Target SD3 for lower mA
according to the following mA table.
GE recommends “Target SD1” for Japan and “Target SD2” for countries other than Japan, but this
selection depends on a customer’s preferences. If a customer requires a different image quality, select an
other Target SD.
Auto mA modes
IQ High mA (High IQ)

SD1
Normal
IQ
SD2 Low Dose
Normal
IQ
SD3
Low Dose
Normal
Low Dose
Low mA (Low IQ)
Target SD IQ Level
For V/R 3.x system For V/R 4.x or later system
SD IQ SD1 IQ 1.63
SD Normal SD1 Normal 1.47
– SD2 IQ 1.40
SD Low Dose SD1 Low Dose 1.33
– SD2 Normal 1.26
– SD3 IQ 1.22
– SD2 Low Dose 1.14
– SD3 Normal 1.10
Note: V/R 3.x SD and V/R 4.x or later SD1 are equal in IQ level.
2–31 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123

f. For the system with Asymmetric Scan option ONLY:
Click on Configuration, then select Asymmetric mode and click on Accept.
Mode Meanings
g. Select Language to proceed to the next screen.
2–32 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123

5. Language Setting Screen:
a. Select the Language for this site.
b. Select Default Autovoice Language for this site.
c. Select Hardware to proceed to the next screen.
2–33 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123

6. Hardware Setting Screen:
a. Select a proper Gantry Setting, depending on the system.
b. Select a proper Filter Type, depending on the system.
D Solarix (NP) for HiSpeed LX/i, FX/i, DX/i, DX/i M
D Solarix (NP) SmartFilter should be selected for the system with SmartFilter Option
When the SmartFilter Option label has been attached at the OC rear cover, select this filter type.
Note: This option is standard for HiSpeed NX/i, LX/i, FX/i, DX/i, DX/i M from ’99 FW44 production.
D Performix SmartFilter for HiSpeed ZX/i Series, NX/i Pro
c. Select a proper Keyboard, depending on the system.
d. Select Start Angle for Head Scan (Default: 90/270 (Conventional)).
e. Select a proper Serial Expander.
f. Click on 50 KVA, for the system with 50 kVA option. (CT HiSpeed series ONLY)
2–34 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123

g. Click on Diagnosis Settings.
Type the following responses to the indicated messages:
Supported product types

a. NP
b. NPTWIN
Enter product type (press enter for default)? <Enter>
Select “b.NPTWIN” for HiSpeed NX/i series
NRE Global memory sizes

a. 16Mb
b. 32Mb
c. 64Mb
Enter GM option (press enter for default)? <Enter>
Select “c. 64Mb” for HiSpeed NX/i series
Enter # of Slave DSP? 16 <Enter>

Enter a twice numbers of the NPRS boards inside the OC. See table below.
Number of NPRS Entry

1 2
2 4
4 8
8 16
ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
HiSpeed Series
ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
NPRS
NPRM
Nest
Is this info correct (y=yes, n=no)? y <Enter>
Note
If you enter a wrong memory size, select [n] to start over the entry.
h. Select Camera to proceed to the next screen.
2–35 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123

7. Camera Setting Screen:
a. Select either Laser Camera or DICOM Printer.
When Laser Camera is Selected:
2–36 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123

b. Set the following parameters:
D Laser Camera Type : Choose the closest option.
D DASM Interface : This option must match your physical DASM type; for DASM–LCAM, select Digital.
For DASM–VDB, select Analog.
D Do NOT select Slides or Zoom. Use Film Composer –> Options –> Slide formats when selecting this
parameter, because the Film composer option overrides the System configuration option.
D Smooth/Sharp selects sharper or smoother image interpolation.
c. Click on Accept. Then go to Network Setting Screen.
2–37 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
When DICOM Printer is selected:
IMPORTANT NOTE:
For the V/R 5.5 or later system, DICOM Print setting MUST be performed in this system config-
uration screen.
Note
For a summery of troubleshooting information for DICOM Print, refer to Appendix, 2-19-2
DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips.
D Add: used when adding the DICOM printer newly to the system.
D Delete: used when deleting the DICOM printer selected from the Device File list.
D Update: used when modifying the setting for the DICOM printer selected from the Device File list.
a. Click on Add.
2–38 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123

The DICOM Print Camera setting screen appears.
DICOM Print Camera Setting Screen (1st page):
b. Set the following parameters, then click on Advanced. This goes to 2nd setting screen (for setting advanced
parameters) for DICOM Print Camera (step c).
2–39 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123

D Camera Type:
Select a proper manufacturer for DICOM printer.
After you select the appropriate Camera Type, the system automatically pre–set default values into the
DICOM Print Camera settings screen area.
Pre–set Default Value (Reference Value)

Fuji Konica Kodak Agfa
Imation (dry) Wet
Medium Type Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue
Film Orientation Portrait Portrait Portrait Portrait Portrait
Destination Processor Processor Magazine Magazine Processor
Magnification Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic
Type
Film Format – – – – –
Configuration 1 KC_LUT=2 LUT=Ver693c0. CS300\\CN1 PRECEP-
W87,8 TION_LUT=140
Maximum Den- 300 300 300 300 300
sity
Minimum Den- 22 22 22 22 22
sity
Smoothing Off Off Off Off Off
Type
Empty Density Black Black Black Black Black
Border Density Black Black Black Black Black
Film Size 14IN x 17IN Empty Empty Empty Empty
Trim Off Off Off Off Off
D Network Parameters :
Enter the hospital provided Filming Device Name, same as Host Name (Name shown in the header title
of the Film composer).
Enter the hospital provided Filming Device Host Name.
Enter the hospital provided Filming Device IP Address.
Enter the AE title from the DICOM Conformance Statement document provided with the Filming Device.
Enter the TCP Listen Port from the DICOM Conformance Statement document provided with the Filming
Device.
2–40 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
NOTICE
When, at the DICOM Print Camera side, you enter the AE title of a CT system connected to
the printer, CT Host Name _DCP must be used.
Note:
Filmer DICOM AE (Application Entity) Title may be site specific. Make sure that you check with the
Filming Device Service Representative and the hospital network administrator to ensure you are us-
ing the correct AE Title for the destination Filming Device.
D Medium Type:
Select the appropriate Medium Type parameter. Check with the radiology department and the
Filming Device Service Representative to determine whether the department is using BLUE
FILM, CLEAR FILM, or PAPER.
D Film Orientation:
Select PORTRAIT or LANDSCAPE. If you change this parameter, you might also change the Film For-
mat. Consult the manufacturer of a DICOM printer for proper Film Format settings.
D Destination:
Select the appropriate Destination parameter. Check with the radiology department and the Filming De-
vice Service Representative to determine whether to use MAGAZINE or PROCESSOR.
D Magnification Type:
Select the appropriate Magnification Type parameter. This parameter selects the algorithm used to inter-
polate pixels to provide desired film resolution. Check with the Filming Device Service Representative to
ensure the best Image Quality film presentation. For most Filming Device manufacturers, the preferred
selection is CUBIC.
Magnification Type Selection Descriptions:

–NONE: No interpolation. This selection is available for camera types that do not support Magnification
Type algorithms.
– REPLICATE: Adjacent pixels are interpolated which results in images described as “pixelly”. This algo-
rithm is not usually preferred.
–BILINEAR: A first order interpolation of pixels is used which results in images described as blurred. This
algorithm is not usually preferred.
–CUBIC: A third order interpolation is used with a large number of possible formulations. Filming Device
manufacturers define parameters called smoothing type to set coefficients used in the algorithm. The im-
plementation of these coefficients is Filming Device manufacturer dependent.
D Film Format:
Use the default values. However, if you change Film Orientation, you might also change the Film Format.
Consult the manufacturer of a DICOM printer for proper Film Format settings.
2–41 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
DICOM Print Camera Setting Screen: (2nd page – Advanced Parameters)
2–42 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123

c. Use the Advanced Parameters window to set the Image Quality Parameters. To ensure these settings are
correct, verify all selections with the Filming Device Service Representative.
Set the following parameters, then click on Back to return to the 1st page.
D Configuration: (See the graph below.)

This parameter is automatically set just when selecting the DICOM printer manufacturer on the 1st page.
If you change this parameter, consult both customer and printer manufacturer.
This parameter is typically used to specify the image contrast (select a LUT curve).
The Configuration field may be up to 1024 characters long. The filed will scroll automatically as characters
are typed. To review the Configuration field if the entire length does not appear in the parameter window,
click and hold down the middle mouse button while the cursor is in the window.
D Minimum and Maximum Density: (See the graph below.)

These parameters are automatically set just when selecting the DICOM printer manufacturer on the 1st
page. If you change these parameters, consult both customer and printer manufacturer.
These parameters are used to set the brightness for the images on the film. The range of values is 0 –
4095.
Relationship among Configuration, Maximum Density, and Minimum Density
Maximum Density
Minimum Density
Configuration (LUT Curve)
D Smoothing Type:
This parameter is used when the Magnification Type is set to CUBIC. The parameter represents the coeffi-
cient for the image resolution algorithm and is Filming Device manufacturer dependent and must be veri-
fied with the radiology department after filming review.
2–43 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123

D Empty Density: (See Illustration below.)
This parameter sets the density for empty film view ports. Typically, BLACK is used but WHITE is an op-
tion. The Minimum and Maximum Density values are used as the representations.
D Border Density: (See Illustration below.)

This parameter sets the density for the border used around the film viewports. Typically, BLACK is used
but WHITE is an option. The Minimum and Maximum Density values are used as the representations.
Empty Density Border Density
D Film Size and Trim:

Use the default values. Do NOT change parameters.
d. On the 1st setting screen, click on Accept.
e. On the Camera Setting screen, select Quit. Then go to Network Setting Screen.
2–44 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
When Auto Film Setting is selected:

Until now, a customer must change the camera type for filming per series using AutoFilm Setup. For V/R 5.5 or later
system, it can be changed at a time by a FE using this button . Refer to Appendix 2-19-3, AutoFilm Setting Function
for more information.
a. Select Remote Printer to print out an image.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Once you have clicked on Accept, all of the remote printers that a customer has set individu-
ally will be changed to the printer selected at AutoFilm Setting. This can NOT be reset to the
previous printers.
a. Click on Accept.
b. On the Camera Setting screen, select Quit. Then go to Network Setting Screen.
2–45 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123

8. Network Settings screen:
GATEWAY
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS
HOST NAME
CT
2–46 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123

a. Click on Network on.
The check box becomes red.
b. OC Parameters Setting:
i. Enter Host Name.

Host Name identifies the name of this CT. This name must be unique for the site, and will appear in unix
prompts and in a few other places. If you set up a network connection to the site, the OC computer will
appear on the site’s network as <Host Name>.
ii. Enter IP Address.

The IP address is administrated by a network administrator. Ask a network administrator to assign an IP
address.
iii. Enter Net Mask.(if required.)

The Net Mask is to divide the IP address between the network bits and the host bits. The Net Mask is
determined by a network administrator.
c. If this system is not connected to a “Site Subnet” then;
D Verify all other fields are set to the defaults:
OC – Net Mask Gateway – Host Name Gateway – IP Address

255.255.255.0 gw 192.168.0.254
d. If this system is connected to a “Site Subnet” then continue as follows;

Gateway Parameters Setting:
i. Enter the Gateway Parameter (IP Address). If possible consult the site’s network administrator before
configuring the interface to the site’s network. The site administrator should provide the Gateway IP Ad-
dress.
2-14-2 Completing Configuration

The system is rebooted and returns to the desktop menu.
2. “Auto–Start Disabled” message appears. Click on OK.
2–47 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-15 OPTION CHECK
1. In desktop menu, select List Options.

The option(s) currently installed is displayed.
2. Using the option list recorded at section 2-5, Saving Option Information, verify that the proper option(s) has been
correctly reloaded to the system.
3. Click on Quit.
2–48 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-16 STARTING UP THE SYSTEM NOW!
1. In desktop menu, select Shutdown to restart the system.
NOTICE
When performing Application–Shutdown and then restarting the system, always use the
Shutdown button. Do not use the Startup Button, because this might not work correctly.
2. Verify that the system starts up with no error.
3. Confirm that the latest version of software has been installed in the system. The system version is displayed
at the lower right of the screen while the system is starting up.
4. Click on OK in Attention window.
2–49 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-17 COMPLETING THE LFC / LFW PROCEDURE
2-17-1 Restoring Patient Data

1. Restore the Patient image to the system. Refer to the Operator manual. (Image Works –> Archive –> Restore
–> Selection –> All examination –> Restore –> Restore examination –> OK)
After restoring image data, perform Archive –> Detach, then eject the MOD.
2. Restore the raw data to the system. Refer to the Operator manual. (Scan –> Scanner Utilities –> Rawdata
Function –> Function Selection –> Restore/Delete from MOD –> (Select all rawdata using shift key.) –>
Rawdata Selection (e.g. Whole exam) –> Start Restore)
2-17-2 Setting Gamma Value

The gamma value for CRT/LCD display must be set after system software installation.
1. Click on Service icon located on the upper left screen.
2. Click on Shell.
% su<Enter>
> gamma 1 <Enter> (To modify gamma value to 1.0.)
(Note: One space input is required between inputs of “gamma”
and “1”.)
> gamma <Enter> (To verify that gamma value should be 1.000000.)
> exit <Enter> (To terminate the shell window.)
> exit <Enter> (To close Unix shell.)
2-17-3 Test Scan

1. Perform scans to verify that they are completed with no errors.
The LFC has now been completed!
2–50 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-18 INSITE INSTALLATION
For the system with the InSite ONLY, install the InSite AGAIN after LFC.
When performing LFW, InSite installation is NOT required since it is NOT deleted.
2-18-1 General
Prerequisite
D The modem must be powered up.
D Prepare the followings before starting the InSite Installation Procedure.

CD–ROM : V/R6.00 InSite Software (Must be prepared by FE, distributed through TAB 287.)
Note
Boot–up sequence may fail and the system will lock–up just after the scan key lights in case of,
D Class M software was installed but Install InSite was not executed.
D Install InSite was quitted without clicking APPLY button in Device Connection tab if Modem is
selected as device connection type.
To avoid this lock–up,

Execute Install InSite after the installation of Class M software and complete all settings in each tab
by clicking APPLY button.
If the lock–up occurs, cycle power, stop application start up, and execute:
‘/usr/g/insite/bin/installmodem –os off’, by becoming root.
2-18-2 Installing InSite Software

1. To display the desktop menu:
Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select Application Shutdown –> OK.
2. Insert the InSite CD–ROM into the CD–ROM drive.
3. On the desktop menu, click on Install Software button located on the upper right of the screen.
4. “Do you install software from CD–ROM?” message appears.

Click on Yes.
5. “Following software will be installed” window appears.

Click on Yes.
The InSite software loading procedures is started. It takes a few minutes to complete.
2–51 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-18-2 Installing InSite Software (Continued)

6. “Installation complete.” message appears.
Click on OK.
7. On the desktop menu, click on Shell button located on the upper right of the screen.
> eject <Enter>
> exit <Enter>
9. On the desktop menu, click on Install InSite button located on the upper right of the screen.
One minute later, the InSite Interactive Platform Configuration screen appears.
10. Click on ACCEPT three times.

Illustration 2–2 InSite Interactive Platform Configuration Screen
2–52 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
NOTICE
After entering InSite Setup Screen, call the local support center to set up the InSite together.
GEMS – Americas GEMS – Europe GEMS – Asia

CT National Support Center European Support Center Asia Support Center
Phone: 1–800–321–7937 (33) 1 3083 1300 81–426–56–0033
FAX: (262)896–2710 (33) 1 3070 9970 81–426–56–0053
11. After a moment, the InSite Setup Screen appears.

Click on InSite Checkout tag.
Illustration 2–3 InSite Setup Screen
2–53 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-18-3 Setting up InSite Checkout
NOTICE
VERY IMPORTANT: You MUST run the checkout in order to establish the InSite connection.
Checkout MUST be rerun in the event of a system re–load.
1. The InSite Checkout Screen appears.

Click on CHECKOUT NOW.
Illustration 2–4 InSite Checkout Screen
DISABLE INSITE
2–54 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-18-3 Setting up InSite Checkout (Continued)

2. The “Configure InSite Now” window appears.
3. Click on OK.
Illustration 2–5 Configure InSite Now Window
4. To perform an InSite checkout, call your local technical support center.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
The OLC Checkout procedure depends on whether or not a customer’s system has iLinq li-
cense. For a iLinq–licensed system, verify that iLinq icon is seen next to the Service Icon
after the checkout has been successfully completed.
5. When the checkout process has been completed successfully, you might get some messages such as “InSite
Dial out Check completed Successfully” from a local support center.
2–55 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-18-4 Completing the insite installation

1. Click on Exit to complete the InSite installation.
Illustration 2–6 Closing the InSite Setup
DISABLE INSITE
InSite has now been installed!

2-18-5 Saving InSite Information
The configuration files for Class–M software and InSite features are saved to MOD as part of the Save System State
process.
2. On the desktop menu, click on Savestate.

Note
7. In desktop menu, select Shutdown to restart the system.
NOTICE
When performing Application–Shutdown and then restarting the system, always use the
Shutdown button. Do not use the Startup Button, because this might not work correctly.
2–56 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-19 APPENDIX
2-19-1 OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips

According to the following flow chart, perform OS installation troubleshooting. When an error can not be recovered,
contact your local technical support center.
Message displayed during Miniroot Loading
A trouble occurs dur- Enter ‘c’ to continue booting the old miniroot with no state fixup.
ing OS installation. Enter ‘f’ to fix miniroot install state, and try again.
Enter ‘r’ to reload the miniroot.
Enter ‘a’ to abort (cancel) the installation.
Enter your selection and press ENTER (c, f, r, or a)
Does the mes-

sage above ap- Yes
pears during
miniroot load- Enter “ r ”.
Was the trouble
recovered?
Yes
ing?
No
No
Power OFF the OC main

switch, then ON Again.
Perform the HDD labeling Refer to the procedure
procedures. described in the follow-
ing page.
Was the trouble Yes

recovered?
No
Refer to the procedure

Format the HDD. It described in the follow-
takes approx. 3 hours!! ing page.
NOTICE: Since the HDD might be

physically damaged even if a trouble
was recovered, you should replace
the HDD as soon as possible.
Was the trouble Yes
recovered?
No
Replace the HDD. Return to the LFC procedures.
2–57 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
HDD Labeling Procedures
NOTICE
When an error occur during OS loading procedures and the system can not recover from it.,
perform the following steps a to d (This procedure performs both label and repartition of the
HDD to load the install program on the HDD.)
a. Insert the CD–ROM (Core OS system software (1 of 2)) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.
b. Click on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.
c. Type the following responses.
> boot –f dksc(1,1,8)sashARCS dksc(1,1,7)stand/fx.ARCS <Enter>

.........................
Do you require extended mode with all options available? (no) y
<ENTER>
SGI Version x.x ARCS xxxx, xxxx

fx: ”device–name” = (dksc) <ENTER>
fx: ctlr# = (0) <ENTER>
fx: drive# = (1) <ENTER>
fx: lun# = (0) <ENTER> (Some HDD might skip this entry.)
After these input, fx may inform and ask to you before next menu.
For them, just <ENTER> or y<ENTER>. (Some HDD might skip this entry.)
––––– please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)–––––

[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> l/c/a <ENTER> (l: Label, c: Create, a: All)
....................
....................

fx> exi <ENTER>
label info has changed for disk dksc (0,1,0). write out changes?(yes)
<ENTER>
d. Click on Done button located on the lower right side of the console window. ( The “exit” command can not be
used at this time.)
2–58 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
How to format a System HDD

Note
It takes approximately 3 hours!!
NOTICE
Format procedures deletes all data from the HDD!
1. Shut down the system, then switch OFF the main switch of the OC.
2. Switch ON the main switch of the OC.

Few seconds later, the window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button

3. Press ESC key.
Note
Stop for maintenance button can be clicked instead of pressing ESC key.
5. Click on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.
6. Type the following responses.

.........................
<ENTER>
SGI Version xxxx, xxxxxx


fx> d <ENTER>
2–59 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
How to format a System HDD (Continued)

[c]mpbuf [fi]llbuf [see]k [showp]ages
[d]umpbuf [n]umber [w]ritebuf [set]page
[e]ditbuf [r]eadbuf [showc]apacity [fo]rmat
fx/debug> fo <ENTER>
fx/debug/format: Drive Parameters to use in formatting=(current)

<ENTER>
.........
..................
about to destroy data on disk dksc(0, 1, 0)!ok? y <ENTER>
Formatting procedure is started. It will take approximately 3 hours to format a 9GB HDD.
7. Verify that “format completed successfully” message appears.
8. Type the following to start the repartition procedures:

fx/debug> .. <ENTER>

fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................

[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> ro <ENTER>
fx/repartition/rootdrive: type of data partition = (xfs) <ENTER>

Warning:.........
..................
backed up if it contains any user data. Continue? y <ENTER>
.................

fx/repartition> .. <ENTER>
2–60 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123

fx> exi <ENTER>
9. Click on Install System Software to install Miniroot. (Proceed to Section 2-7-1, Loading Miniroot (Installation
tool).)
2–61 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
How to format an Image HDD

Note
NOTICE


3. Press ESC key.
Note

.........................
<ENTER>

fx: drive# = (1) 2 <ENTER>

fx> d <ENTER>
2–62 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
How to format an Image HDD (Continued)


<ENTER>
.........
..................


fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................

fx/repartition> o <ENTER>
fx/repartition/optiondrive: type of data partition = (xfs) <ENTER>

Warning:.........
..................
.................

2–63 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123

fx> exi <ENTER>
9. Click on Install System Software to install Miniroot to perform LFC. (Proceed to Section 2-7-1, Loading Mini-
root (Installation tool).)
2–64 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-19-2 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips

The following is a summary of troubleshooting information for DICOM Print that was gathered during software testing
and validation of the DICOM Print feature.
ERROR BRINGING UP THE CAMERA INSTALLATION/FILMING APPLICATION

D Symptom: After creating/modifying the DICOM Print Camera the install camera interface does not come
up and the filming application indicates it cannot bring up the film composer.
Cause: The configuration field contains invalid information such as a backslash (\) as the final character
in the field or brackets ({}).
D Solution: The camera.dev file in “~ctuser/app–defaults/devices” must be manually edited to remove the
offending characters in the set configuration line. Invalid characters include \{}
CONFIGURATION INFORMATION FIELD

D Symptom: Cannot view the entire configuration field (> 25 characters)
D Solution: Hold down the middle mouse button and move the field contents
NEED TO SET DICOM PRINT ATTRIBUTES NOT SUPPORTED BY SOFTWARE

D Symptom: User wants the white border around each image box ON/OFF permanently for this system
and it cannot be set as the default for the camera.
D Solution: Using your favorite editor, add the following line to the camera.dev file located in “~ctuser/app–
defaults/devices” after the DICOM Print device has been otherwise configured.
For Trim Off – set TRIM NO
For Trim On – set TRIM YES
D Symptom: DICOM Print Camera supports multiple film sizes and the User only wants to print if the Film
Size is correct for [14x17]. [Otherwise the camera will queue the films or return an error causing the queue
to pause (based upon the DICOM Print Camera specifications).]
To force a 14x17 film size – set filmSize 14INX17IN
a. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select Application Shutdown –>
OK.
b. Click on Shell.
2–65 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-19-2 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips (Continued)

c. Type as follows:
> cd /usr/g/ctuser/app–defaults/devices <Enter>

> ls *.dev <Enter>
camera.dev (This is the file for a laser imager.)
di3.dev (Example; This is the file for DICOM printer.)
xxx.dev (Example; another DICOM printer)
> nedit di3.dev <Enter> (Example; the current DICOM printer is “di3.dev”.)
d. Add the following line to the dev file for the current DICOM printer.
#first the obligatory fields
set dName ”di3”

set dPort 104
set dComment ””
set dType digital
set dColour greyscale
set dQueueType DICM
set dQueueName dicom
set dAppTitle ”di3”
set dIPAddress X.XX.XXX.XXX
set dHostName di3
set filmSize 14INX17IN (Add this line here!)
#then the optional fields
e. Select File –> Save.
f. Type exit <Enter> to terminate the shell window.
NEED TO PREVENT DICOM PRINT ATTRIBUTES FROM BEING SENT TO DICOM PRINT CAMERA
D Symptom: Some DICOM Print attributes are optional, and may result in fatal errors. For example, the
Fuji camera does not support the Empty Image Density parameter for the film box.
D Solution: Using your favorite editor, add the following line(s) to the camera.dev file located in “~ctuser/
app–defaults/devices” after the DICOM Print device has been otherwise configured.
– To prevent sending the Smoothing Parameter set FB_Smooth FALSE
– To prevent sending the Border Density set FB_Border FALSE
– To prevent sending the Empty Image Density set FB_EID FALSE
– To prevent sending the Minimum Density set FB_MinD FALSE
– To prevent sending the Trim Parameter set FB_Trim FALSE
2–66 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
ERROR TRYING TO CONNECT TO THE DICOM PRINT CAMERA

D Symptom: DICOM Print server can be reached (ping), but Application error indicates “Unable to start film-
ing interface” and the help message talks about running the install.dasm (Association Error)
D Solution: The system is unable to complete the association. Check the AE Title and the Port number of
the DICOM Print Server and correct them using reconfiguration, CT Camera setting screen.
FILM COMPOSER ERROR NOT USABLE

D Symptom: Film Composer error says ”unrecognized status – code 0”
D Solution: Review the log file, the attention and status windows. These areas have the correct filming sta-
tus (e.g. film jam, supply empty)
DEBUGGING CONNECTION ISSUES DIFFICULT

D Symptom: The timeouts for the DICOM Print are very long, which means one needs to wait a long time
before you know the application is not working.
D Solution: The timeouts for the DICOM Print were setup to ensure that the system would work regardless
of whether the DICOM Print Camera was on a LAN or a WAN halfway around the world. The DICOM Print
timeouts for the association and DIMSE classes (e.g. N–GET, N–DELETE) can be modified within the
DICOM Print camera installation. They can be reduced down to 90 seconds.
DICOM PRINT ERROR ON N–GET TIMEOUT CONFUSING

D Symptom: When the N–GET timeout goes off, the error message in the prslog file will be “Could not get
printer status, invalid command sequence for N–GET”.
D Solution: When the User sees the above error they may want to consider that the issue may be an inactiv-
ity timer on the N–GET DIMSE Service.
DICOM PRINT CAMERA SLIDE SUPPORT

D Symptom: Current implementation of DICOM Print does not allow selection of slide format.
D Solution: Feature not currently supported. Possibly in future releases.
CONFUSION ON FILM FORMAT NOTATION

D Symptom: GEMS Laser Camera and DICOM Print film format notations are opposite.
D Solution: GEMS Laser Camera film format notation has always been
– row x col (e.g. 12 on 1 = 4x3)
– DICOM Print Standard film format notation is
– col x row (e.g. 12 on 1 = 3x4)
2–67 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
2-19-3 AutoFilm Setting Function

This function is made available in V/R 5.5 or later, and used for changing at a time the camera type of all protocols
which already have been set.
This can change the parameters of Destination and Format in Autofilm Setup screen. The other settings in Autofilm
Setup screen and all settings of Film Tab Card in View/Edit Screen are NOT changed.
Autofilm Setup
Destination
Laser Camera
Format Size Auto Start Auto Print

Normal Slide Yes Yes
Copies Exam Page Series Page

1
Yes Yes
Scout XRef–Scout
Film Direction
Top to Bottom
Auto Film Composer Show Grayscale
e/s/i Yes
Changed
OK Cancel
NOT Changed
Film Tab Card
Scan Timing Recon Film
Auto Frame Width Level Mag User GSE

Interval Flip Rotate
Film Format 1 1 Factor Anno.
Recon 1 Recon 1 Recon 2 Recon 2 Recon 3 Recon 3

Film Set Film Set Film Set Film Set Film Set Film Set
NOT Changed 1 2 1 2 1 2
2–68 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

FOR V/R 5.0X
Compatible with Version 5.0x System Software

IMPORTANT NOTE:
3-1 GENERAL
WARNING
CAUTION
3–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

NOTICE
the LFW procedure.)
NOTICE
LFC LFW

tion
tion Software
been saved
been saved
(Continued)
3–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
LFC LFW
Software
been saved
12 Option Check –
14 Starting DICOM Print Camera –
images or raw data
have been saved
Setting CRT Gamma Value –
Test Scan –
16 Installing the InSite Software None CD–ROM : Service
Software
3–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
3-2 PREPARATION
D CD–ROM : 2269719 V/R5.00 Service Software (if required)
Note
5 inches 2.3 GB MOD is required.
NOTICE
ing data.
Note
3–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
CAUTION
Prerequisite
D Two blank MOD
Note
Procedures
3–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section (because it will be saved in Section 3-8-2, Software Installation
(For LFW procedure)) and go to Section 3-5, Saving option information.
Prerequisite
D One blank MOD
Procedures
3. Select Service –> System Tools –> Application shutdown –> OK –> Savestate.

Note
Note
– IOS preferences
– Autovoice files
– Crosstalk A, B channel data
– TnT Definition File log
– Q cal channel ratio
3–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
3D Dicom MOD Helical 30 Max

Smart Prep Power 200mA Max Helical 60 Max
Smart Recon Power 250mA Max Helical 120 Max
SmartView Power 300mA Max Raw Data 1000 Max
DentaScan Power 350mA Max Remote Tilt
Navigator Power 440mA Max Enhanced Cooling
Helical Plus Fast Scan 0.7 sec Extended FOV
Connect Pro Fast Scan 0.8 sec Performix Tube
Image Disk Fast Scan 1.0 sec Thickness 1mm
Pioneer MOD Thickness 0.5mm
Note: Depending on the system, unavailable option might be included in the option list above.

a. Click on shell.
b. Enter the following comannds to display the ConnectPro information, then write down them to the table belw.
3–7 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
Note


ing the ESC key.
5. Press ESC key.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
3–8 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
Note
Prerequisite
Procedures

Note
Note
3–9 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Note
skipped.
******************************* Displayed *******************************

meta–data=xxxxxxx
data=xxxxxxx
log=xxxxxx
real time=xxxxxxx
************************************************************************
# exit <Enter>

3–10 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Inst> admin <Enter>
******************************* Displayed *******************************

.......
************************************************************************
Click on Restart.
Note
down process.
low).


ing the ESC key.
4. Press ESC key.
3–11 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

7. Verify that:
Note
skipped.

******************************* Displayed *******************************

meta–data=xxxxxxx
data=xxxxxxx
log=xxxxxx
real time=xxxxxxx
************************************************************************
# exit <Enter>

3–12 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Inst> admin <Enter>
# /CDROM/bin/cptool <Enter>
# /makedisk <Enter>
Note:

************* Displayed **************************************************
Enter HiSpeed, ProSpeed, CT/e Series Core OS (2 of 2) CD–ROM...
************************************************************************
15. Press the eject button of the CD–ROM drive to eject the CD–ROM, Core OS (1 of 2), from the CD–ROM drive.
16. Insert the CD–ROM, Core OS (2 of 2), into the CD–ROM drive.
17. After completion of installing Core OS (2 of 2), verify that the following message will appear.
************* Displayed *************************************************
........
************************************************************************
# exit <Enter>
Admin> exit <Enter>
Inst> exit <Enter>

NOTICE
3–13 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123


Note
3–14 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
Note
Prerequisite
D For LFW ONLY:

Procedures

b. Click Yes.
CD–ROM drive.
appears again.
NOTICE
CD–ROM.
3–15 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

OC.

Note
9. Click Yes.
appears again.
NOTICE
CD–ROM.
3–16 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Note
appears:

“IRIS”


3–17 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
NOTICE
Prerequisite

3–18 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
Prerequisite
D Approx. 7 minutes

Procedures

3–19 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
Prerequisite
D None
D Approx. 3 minutes
Procedures

Note
D Denta Option:
Note
ConnectPro setup window appears. Enter the parameters written down in 3-5, Saving Option Information,
then click on Accept.

3–20 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

> eject <Enter>
> exit <Enter>
NOTICE
Do NOT start up the system at this time!
3–21 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Prerequisite
Procedures
3. “Do you install software from CD–ROM?” message appears. Click on Yes.
4. “Do you install selected Patch?” message appears. Click on Yes.

5. Click on OK in response to “Installation Successful. xxxxxxx”.
6. After completion of the patch installation, Click on Shell located on the upper right of the screen.
> eject <Enter>
> exit <Enter>
NOTICE
3–22 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

2. Click on Patch.
******************************* Displayed *******************************
************************************************************************
4. Click on Close.
NOTICE
3–23 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
Prerequisite
D Approx. 2 minutes
Procedures
NOTICE
3–24 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
NOTICE

3–25 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Time Zone
The unique machine number must be entered according to the table in section 3-20-1, Entering the Machine
Number.
Note
3–26 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

3–27 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

c. Select Auto mA. Select Target SD1 for higher mA, Target SD2 for middle mA, or Target SD3 for lower mA
other Target SD.
Auto mA modes

SD1
Normal
IQ
SD2 Low Dose
Normal
IQ
SD3
Low Dose
Normal
Low Dose
Low mA (Low IQ)
Target SD IQ Level
SD IQ SD1 IQ 1.63
– SD2 IQ 1.40
– SD2 Normal 1.26
– SD3 IQ 1.22
– SD3 Normal 1.10
Note
e. For HiSpeed Series ONLY:

Note
f. Select Language to proceed to the next screen.
3–28 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

3–29 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

a. Select a proper Filter Type, depending on the system.
Note: This option is standard for HiSpeed NX/i, LX/i, FX/i, DX/i, DX/i M from ’99 FW44 production.
D Performix SmartFilter for HiSpeed ZX/i Series, NX/i Pro
b. Select Start Angle for Head Scan (Default: 90/270 (Conventional)).
3–30 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

d. Click on Diagnosis Settings.

a. NP
b. NPTWIN
Select “b.NPTWIN” for HiSpeed NX/i series

a. 16Mb
b. 32Mb
c. 64Mb
Select “c. 64Mb” for HiSpeed NX/i series
Enter # of Slave DSP? 16 <Enter>


1 2
2 4
4 8
8 16
ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
HiSpeed Series
ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
NPRS
NPRM
Nest
Note
e. Select Camera to proceed to the next screen.
3–31 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

a. When Laser Camera is selected:
Laser Camera Setting Screen:
Set the following parameters:
Click on Accept. Then go to Network Setting Screen.
3–32 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

b. When DICOM Print Camera is selected:
Click on Quit.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
For the V/R 5 system, DICOM Print setting MUST be performed in the film composer screen
due to software bug. (Refer to Section 3-16, Setting DICOM Print Camera.)
Select Network to proceed to the next screen.
3–33 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

GATEWAY
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS
HOST NAME
CT
3–34 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

i. Enter Host Name.


address.


255.255.255.0 gw 192.168.0.254

dress.

3–35 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
3-14 OPTION CHECK

3. Click on Quit.
3–36 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
1. In desktop menu, select Startup.

After the power–on test, the system will automatically start up.
3–37 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
3-16 SETTING DICOM PRINT CAMERA
For the system with the DICOM print camera, configure the camera after start–up of the LFC last phase.
If it does not, go to Section 3-17, Completing the LFC procedure.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
For the V/R 5 system, DICOM Print setting MUST be performed in the film composer screen
due to software bug.
Note
1. Select Image works –> Film –> Configure –> Add –> Dicom.
2. Select a proper manufacturer for DICOM print camera, then click on Select.
Note
Select the appropriate DICOM Print Camera Types selection (Agfa, Imation Print Server,Kodak).
After you select the appropriate Camera Type, the system automatically pre–sets default values into
the DICOM Print Camera settings screen area of the next window. Verify with the Filming Device
Service Representative that these values match the model of the Filming Device.
The DICOM Print Camera setting screen appears.
3–38 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
3-16. Setting DICOM Print Camera (Continued)
DICOM Print Camera Setting Screen:
3. Set the following parameters, then click on Advanced. This goes to 2nd setting screen (for setting advanced
parameters) for DICOM Print Camera (step 4).
Enter the hospital provided Filming Device Name, same as Host Name.
Enter the Application Title (AE title) from the DICOM Conformance Statement document provided with
the Filming Device.
3–39 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
NOTICE
Note:
Filmer DICOM Application Entity Titles may be site specific. Make sure that you check with the Film-
ing Device Service Representative and the hospital network administrator to ensure you are using
the correct AE Title for the destination Filming Device.
Device.
D Medium Type:
FILM or CLEAR FILM.
D Destination:
D Film Orientation:
Select PORTRAIT for the Orientation. Currently, this CT system only supports Portrait.
selection is CUBIC.

Type algorithms.
D Standard Film Format:

3–40 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
DICOM Print Camera Setting Screen: (2nd Screen for Advanced Parameters)
4. Use the Advanced Parameters window to set the Image Quality Parameters. To ensure these settings are cor-
rect, verify all selections with the Filming Device Service Representative.
Set the following parameters, then click on Done to return to the 1st setting screen.
3–41 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

D Configuration:
This parameter is Filming Device manufacturer dependent and is typically used to specify the image con-
trast.
Recommended Configuration Setting Values:

Agfa DryStar (MG3000): PERCEPTION_LUT=KANAMORI (100)
Imation Dryview (8700): LUT=0,7
Kodak Laser Printer 190: CS434\CN0\PD1.20
D Minimum and Maximum Density:

4095, although the valid range for a specific Filming Device is manufacturer dependent.
Recommended Minimum and Maximum Starting Values:

Agfa DryStar (MG3000): Min: 20 or 23 Max: 300
Imation Dryview (8700): Min: (Blank) Max: 300
Kodak Laser Printer 190: Min: 20 Max: 300
D Smoothing Type:
Recommended Smoothing Type Starting Values & Ranges:

Agfa DryStar (MG3000): Start Value: 140 Range: 137 – 150
Imation Dryview (8700): Start Value: 3 Range: 3 – 13
Kodak Laser Printer 190: Start Value: Enhanced Range: Normal
D Empty Density:
D Border Density:
D Film Size, Trim, and Priority:

5. On the 1st setting screen, click on OK.
3–42 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

6. Click on Done to complete the DICOM Print Camera setting.
7. Click on Shutdown icon to reboot the system.
3–43 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

3-17-2 Setting CRT Gamma Value

The gamma value for CRT display must be set after system software installation.
2. Click on System Tools –> Unix Shell.
% su<Enter>
and “1”.)
3-17-3 Test Scan

3–44 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
3-18-1 General
Prerequisite

CD–ROM : 2269719 V/R5.00 Service Software (Must be prepared by FE, distributed through TAB 287.)
3-18-2 Installing InSite software

Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select System Tools –> Application Shut-
down –> OK.

Click on Yes.
5. “Do you install Class M Service Software 5.00?” message appears.

Click on Yes.
3–45 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Click on OK.
> eject <Enter>
> exit <Enter>
A few seconds later, the InSite Interactive Platform Configuration screen appears.

3–46 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
NOTICE

Phone: 1–800–321–7937 (33) 1 3083 1300 81–426–56–0033
FAX: (262)896–2710 (33) 1 3070 9970 81–426–56–0053

Click on InSite Checkout tag.
3–47 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
NOTICE

3–48 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

3. Click on OK.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
3–49 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123


process.

Note
7. Click on Startup.
3–50 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
3-19 TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS

Does the mes-

sage above ap- Yes
pears during
Was the trouble
recovered?
Yes
ing?
No
No

ing page.
Was the trouble Yes

recovered?
No


Was the trouble Yes
recovered?
No
3–51 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
NOTICE

.........................
<ENTER>


....................
....................

fx> exi <ENTER>
<ENTER>
used at this time.)
3–52 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Note
NOTICE


3. Press ESC key.
Note

.........................
<ENTER>


fx> d <ENTER>
3–53 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123


<ENTER>
.........
..................


fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................


Warning:.........
..................
.................

3–54 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

fx> exi <ENTER>
tool).)
3–55 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Note
NOTICE


3. Press ESC key.
Note

.........................
<ENTER>


fx> d <ENTER>
3–56 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123


<ENTER>
.........
..................


fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................


Warning:.........
..................
.................

3–57 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

fx> exi <ENTER>
3–58 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123




a. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select System Tools –> Applica-
tion Shutdown –> OK.
b. Click on Shell.
3–59 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

c. Type as follows:

> ls *.dev <Enter>
set dName ”di3”

set dPort 104
set dComment ””
set dType digital
set dQueueType DICM
set dHostName di3
3–60 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123






– row x col (e.g. 12 on 1 = 4x3)
– col x row (e.g. 12 on 1 = 3x4)
3–61 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
3-20 APPENDIX
3-20-1 Entering the Machine Number

Enter Machine #, complying with the instructions below.
1. Write down the System serial No. printed on the label on the rear left of the PDU.
If a customer’s PDU does NOT have such a label, the label might exist into the accessory box which has been
shipped with the system.
System Serial Number
2. Determine Machine # in accordance with the table below and enter it into Machine # in the system setting screen.
For the example above, “47084” must be entered as a Machine #.
Products System Serial Number Machine #

(Y: First digit of the year, e.g., 2000→0, 2001→1
xxx: Serial No.)
CT HiSpeed NPZAYxxxCT 48xxx

LX/i, FX/i DX/i, DX/i–M, ZXi
NPZBYxxxCT 47xxx
NPZCYxxxCT 46xxx
NPZDYxxxCT 45xxx
NPLAYxxxCT 44xxx
NPLBYxxxCT 43xxx
NPLCYxxxCT 42xxx
NPLDYxxxCT 41xxx
(Continued)
3–62 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
3-20-1 Entering Machine Number (Continued)

xxx: Serial No.)
CT HiSpeed NPLEYxxxCT 40xxx

NPLFYxxxCT 39xxx
NPLGYxxxCT 38xxx
NPFAYxxxCT 37xxx
NPFBYxxxCT 36xxx
NPFCYxxxCT 35xxx
NPFDYxxxCT 34xxx
NPFEYxxxCT 33xxx
NPFGYxxxCT 32xxx
NPFFYxxxCT 31xxx
NPDAYxxxCT 30xxx
NPDBYxxxCT 29xxx
NPDCYxxxCT 28xxx
NPDDYxxxCT 27xxx
NPDEYxxxCT 26xxx
NPDGYxxxCT 25xxx
NPDFYxxxCT 24xxx
NPMCYxxxCT 23xxx
NPMDYxxxCT 22xxx
NPMEYxxxCT 21xxx
XJNPYxxxCT 20xxx
ACTAYxxxCT 19xxx
XJNTYxxxCT 18xxx
NPPJYxxxCT 17xxx
NPPLYxxxCT 16xxx
NPPNYxxxCT 15xxx
NPPUYxxxCT 14xxx
(Continued)
3–63 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

xxx: Serial No.)
CT HiSpeed NPPPYxxxCT 13xxx

NPPSYxxxCT 12xxx
NPPVYxxxCT 11xxx
NPPTYxxxCT 10xxx
NPNSYxxxCT 9xxx
NPNTYxxxCT 8xxx
NPNUYxxxCT 7xxx
NPNXYxxxCT 6xxx
NPMAYxxxCT 5xxx
NPMBYxxxCT 4xxx
NPPAYxxxCT 3xxx
NPPEYxxxCT 2xxx
NPNMYxxxCT 1xxx
CT HiSpeed NX/i, NX/iPro NPTAYxxxCT 4xxx
NPTBYxxxCT 3xxx
NPTCYxxxCT 2xxx
NPTDYxxxCT 1xxx
3–64 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

FOR V/R 4.XX
Compatible with Version 4.xx System Software

IMPORTANT NOTE:
IMPORTANT NOTE:
D When using the Aurora as serial port expander, V/R 4.14 or later is required.
D When changing from ST–1800 to Aurora, “Reconfig” must be performed to select Aurora
in Hardware setting screen.
4-1 GENERAL
WARNING
CAUTION
4–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

NOTICE
the LFW procedure.)
NOTICE
LFC LFW

3 Recording Camera Data –
4 Recording InSite Information None –
tion
tion Software
been saved
been saved
(Continued)
4–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
LFC LFW
Software
been saved
13 Editing the File –
15 Option Check –
images or raw data
have been saved
Setting CRT Gamma Value –
Test Scan –
18 Installing the InSite Software None CD–ROM : Service
Software
4–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
4-2 PREPARATION
D CD–ROM : 2250104 V/R4.00 Service Software (if required)
Note
5 inches 2.3 GB MOD for HiSpeed Series and 3.5 inches 540MB MOD for CT/e, ProSpeed AI/FI
Series are required.
NOTICE
ing data.
Note
4–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
CAUTION
Prerequisite
D Two blank MOD
Note
Procedures
4–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section (because it will be saved in Section 4-10-2, Software Installa-
tion (For LFW procedure)) and go to Section 4-5, Recording Camera Data.
Prerequisite
D One blank MOD
Procedures
3. Select Service –> System Tools –> Application shutdown –> OK –> Savestate.

Note
Note
– IOS preferences
– Autovoice files
4–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
4-5 RECORDING CAMERA DATA (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH CAMERA ONLY)
Depending on the system software version below, the camera setting data MUST be written down since the LFC/LFW
procedures delete these data.
Software V/R Must the camera data be

saved?
Current V/R Reloaded V/R
4.1 (or later) 4.1 (or later) No (not deleted)
4.0 (or lower) 4.1 (or later) Yes
4.0 (or lower) 4.0 (or lower) Yes
2. Select Camera.
3. Write down the Camera setting data using the following table:
Items Specifications
Do you have a ? Laser Camera DICOM Print Camera
When Laser Camera is selected:
Laser Camera Type
DASM Interface Analog Digital
Options Slides Zoom
Film Smooth Sharp
Film Formats Default When upgrading from V/R 3.x to V/R 4.x: You do not need to save this
parameter, since this is automatically saved/restored. The film configura-
tion menu of V/R 4.x does NOT contain this option.
When DICOM Print Camera is selected:
DICOM Print Camera Types
Network Parameters Host Name:
IP Address:
AE Title:
TCP Listen Port:
Comments:
Destination
Orientation
Medium Type
Magnification Type
(Continued)
4–7 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
4-5 Saving Camera Data (Continued)
Items Specifications
Image Quality Parameters: Smoothing Type:
Configuration:
Minimum Density:
Maximum Density:
Empty Density:
Border Density:
Network TimeOut Parameters Association:
Session:
Nset:
Naction:
Ncreate:
Ndelete:
Nget:
4. Select Quit to terminate the camera setting window.
5. Select Quit –> OK to return to the desktop menu.
4–8 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
4-6 RECORDING INSITE INFORMATION (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH INSITE ONLY)
Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section and go to Section 4-7, Saving Option Information.
Note
For system with V/R 4 already installed, skip this section and go to Section 4-7, Saving Option Infor-
mation.
NOTICE
When the system will be upgraded from V/R 3.x to V/R 4.x, th InSite Information shown in the
table 3–1 can NOT be automatically saved.
Therefore, the following Information MUST be written down before upgrading the system
software.
Table 3–1 InSite Information Check Sheet
Item Specifications
Dial Prefix
Dial Type
Modem currently installed
2. Click on InSite.
After a moment, the InSite Proprietary Screen appears.
Move the cursor in the window area, then type P? <Return>.
4–9 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
4-6 Recording InSite Information (Continued)

3. After a few seconds, the InSite Install Utility Screen will appear.
Click on INSTALL.
4. The Proactive Diagnostics Install Screen will appear.

Click on DEFAULT.
4–10 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

5. The Health Page Install Screen will appear.
Click on DEFAULT.
6. The Health Page E–mail Configuration Screen will appear.

Then click on ACCEPT.
xxxx.xxxxxxx@gemsa.med.ge.com
4–11 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

7. The Dial Prefix Screen will appear.
Write down the Dial Prefix currently selected, on the table 3–1, Check Sheet.
8. Write down the Dial Type currently selected, on the table 3–1, Check Sheet.
4–12 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

9. Write down the Modem type currently installed, on the table 3–1, Check Sheet.
USRobotics Courier V.34
10. The Checkout Screen appears. Click on NO to terminate the InSite Installation program.
This returns to the desktop menu.
4–13 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
3D Dicom MOD Helical 30 Max

Smart Prep Power 200mA Max Helical 60 Max
Smart Recon Power 250mA Max Helical 120 Max
SmartView Power 300mA Max Raw Data 1000 Max
DentaScan Power 350mA Max Remote Tilt
Navigator Power 440mA Max Enhanced Cooling
Helical Plus Fast Scan 0.7 sec Extended FOV
Connect Pro Fast Scan 0.8 sec Performix Tube
Image Disk Fast Scan 1.0 sec Thickness 1mm
Pioneer MOD
Note: Depending on the system, unavailable option might be included in the option list above.

a. Click on shell.
b. Enter the following comannds to display the ConnectPro information, then write down them to the table belw.
4–14 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
Note


ing the ESC key.
5. Press ESC key.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
4–15 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
Note
Prerequisite
Procedures

Note
Note
4–16 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Note
skipped.
******************************* Displayed *******************************

meta–data=xxxxxxx
data=xxxxxxx
log=xxxxxx
real time=xxxxxxx
************************************************************************
# exit <Enter>

4–17 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Inst> admin <Enter>
******************************* Displayed *******************************

.......
************************************************************************
Click on Restart.
Note
down process.
low).


ing the ESC key.
4. Press ESC key.
4–18 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

7. Verify that:
Note
skipped.

******************************* Displayed *******************************

meta–data=xxxxxxx
data=xxxxxxx
log=xxxxxx
real time=xxxxxxx
************************************************************************
# exit <Enter>

4–19 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Inst> admin <Enter>
# /CDROM/bin/makedisk <Enter>
Note:
************* Displayed **************************************************

Enter HiSpeed / ProSpeed Series Core OS (2 of 2) CD–ROM...
************************************************************************
a. Enter umount /CDROM . (Note: NOT “ un mount”;

If you would have a mistake to enter “unmout”, enter a proper command
“umount” again!)
b. Press the eject button of the CD–ROM drive to eject the CD–ROM, Core OS (1 of 2), from the CD–ROM drive.
c. Insert the CD–ROM, Core OS (2 of 2), into the CD–ROM drive.
d. Enter mount /CDROM .
e. Enter /CDROM/bin/makedisk2 to install the Core OS (2 of 2).

f. After completion of installing Core OS (2 of 2), verify that the following message will appear.
************* Displayed *************************************************

........
************************************************************************
4–20 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

# exit <Enter>
Admin> exit <Enter>
Inst> exit <Enter>

NOTICE

Note
4–21 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
Note
Prerequisite
D For LFW ONLY:

Procedures

b. Click Yes.
CD–ROM drive.
appears again.
NOTICE
CD–ROM.
4–22 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

OC.

Note
9. Click Yes.
appears again.
NOTICE
CD–ROM.
4–23 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Note
appears:

“IRIS”


4–24 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
NOTICE
Prerequisite

4–25 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
Prerequisite
D Approx. 7 minutes

Procedures

4–26 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
Prerequisite
D None
D Approx. 3 minutes
Procedures

Note
D Denta Option:
Note
ConnectPro setup window appears. Enter the parameters written down in 4-7, Saving Option Information,
then click on Accept.

4–27 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

> eject <Enter>
> exit <Enter>
NOTICE
4–28 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Prerequisite
Procedures
3. “Do you install software from CD–ROM?” message appears. Click on Yes.
4. “Do you install selected Patch?” message appears. Click on Yes.

5. Click on OK in response to “Installation Successful. xxxxxxx”.
> eject <Enter>
> exit <Enter>
NOTICE
4–29 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

2. Click on Patch.
******************************* Displayed *******************************
Patch NPP41001: HiSpeed, ProSpeed, CT/e Series Patch Software 4.11
************************************************************************
4. Click on Close.
NOTICE
4–30 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
Note
Refer to Section 4-22, Appendix for the reason why the system state data must be restored again.
Prerequisite
D Approx. 2 minutes
Procedures
NOTICE
4–31 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
4-15 EDITING THE FILE (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH V/R 4.0X ONLY)
The following patch procedures must be performed for the system with V/R 4.0x ONLY. For the system with 4.1 or
later, skip this section, then go to Section 4-16, Changing System Configuration (Reconfig).
% su <Enter>
> nedit /usr/g/scripts/poweron <Enter>
3. Select Search –> Find.
4. The Find window appears. Move the cursor into the Find window, then enter ST1800 , then click on Find.
NOTICE
If the cursor is left in the script window, the script
will be rewritten so that the system can not be
started up.
5. Select Search –> Find Again four times to display “# do ST1800 test” in the window.
6. Enter # (comment–out) at the head of the following lines:

These lines start from 13 lines under “# do ST1800 test”.
******************************* Displayed *******************************

# set retval [catch {exec scsicontrol –D –d sc${controller} d${scsiid}l0 } results]
# if { [string first $errorCode NONE ] == –1 } {
# .linstres configure –test “ST–1800 : Error”
# set statStr “\nST–1800 : Error\n”
# place forget .linst
# place .linst –x 400 –y 400 –width 400 –height 100
# set error 1
# set st1800_result Error
# update
# } else {
.linstres configure –text “ST–1800 : Ok” (Do not add “#” in this line.)
set statStr “\nST–1800 : Ok\n” (Do not add “#” in this line.)
set st1800_result Ok (Do not add “#” in this line.)
# }
************************************************************************
7. Select File –> Save.
4–32 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
4-15 Editing the File (For the System with V/R 4.0x ONLY) (Continued)
9. Move the mouse in the shell window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:
% poweron <Enter>
10. Verify that the power–on test is performed and system returns to the desktop menu with no error.
NOTICE
4–33 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
NOTICE

4–34 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Time Zone
Number.
Note
4–35 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

4–36 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

c. Select Auto mA. Select Target SD1 for higher mA, Target SD2 for middle mA, or Target SD3 for lower mA
other Target SD.
Auto mA modes

SD1
Normal
IQ
SD2 Low Dose
Normal
IQ
SD3
Low Dose
Normal
Low Dose
Low mA (Low IQ)
Target SD IQ Level
SD IQ SD1 IQ 1.63
– SD2 IQ 1.40
– SD2 Normal 1.26
– SD3 IQ 1.22
– SD3 Normal 1.10
Note
e. For HiSpeed Series ONLY:

Note
f. Select Language to proceed to the next screen.
4–37 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

4–38 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

a. Select a proper Filter Type, depending on the system.
Note: This option is standard for HiSpeed LX/i, FX/i, DX/i, DX/i M from ’99 FW44 production.
D Performix SmartFilter for HiSpeed ZX/i Series
D Venus SmartFilter for ProSpeed AI / FI Series and CT/e
b. Select Start Angle for Head Scan (Default: 90/270 (Conventional)).
d. Select a proper Serial Expander, depending on the system.
4–39 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

e. Click on Diagnosis Settings.

a. NP
b. NPTWIN
Select “a.NP” for HiSpeed LX/i, FX/i, DX/i, ZX/i, ProSpeed AI/FI, CT/e

a. 16Mb
b. 32Mb
c. 64Mb
Select “b.32Mb” for HiSpeed LX/i, FX/i, DX/i, ZX/i, ProSpeed AI/FI, CT/e
Enter # of Slave DSP? xx <Enter>


1 2
2 4
4 8
8 16
ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
HiSpeed Series
ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
NPRS
NPRM
Nest
Note
f. Select Camera to proceed to the next screen.
4–40 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

a. When Laser Camera is selected:
Laser Camera Setting Screen:
Set the following parameters:
Click on Accept. Then go to Network Setting Screen.
4–41 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

b. When DICOM Print Camera is selected:
Note
DICOM Print Camera Setting Screen: (First Screen)
NOTICE
When entering the DICOM print setting screen again after accepting the settings and quitting
the reconfiguration screen, the settings return to the default ones. This is a software bug,
but the settings are being held in memory.
To check the parameters to be set, use the film composer screen:
Select [Image works] –> [Film] –> [Configure] –> [di3] –> [Update]. This operation display
information of the 1st page of the DICOM Print setting screen. Then, click [Advanced] to dis-
play information of the 2nd page.
On this film composer screen, you MUST NOT modify any parameters!! You can only change
them on the Camera setting screen (reconfiguration).
To exit from the 2nd screen, click [Cancel] –> [Cancel] –> [Done].
4–42 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Set the following parameters, then click on Accept. This goes to 2nd setting screen (for setting advanced
parameters) for DICOM Print Camera.
D DICOM Print Camera Type :

Select the appropriate DICOM Print Camera Types selection (Agfa, Imation Print Server,Kodak).
After you select the appropriate Camera Type, the system automatically pre–sets default values into the
Laser Camera Settings area of the window. Verify with the Filming Device Service Representative that
these values match the model of the Filming Device.
Enter the AE Title from the DICOM Conformance Statement document provided with the Filming Device.
NOTICE
Note:
Filmer DICOM Application Entity Titles may be site specific. Make sure that you check with the Film-
ing Device Service Representative and the hospital network administrator to ensure you are using
the correct AE Title for the destination Filming Device.
Device.
D Destination:
D Orientation:
Select PORTRAIT for the Orientation. Currently, this CT system only supports Portrait.
D Medium Type:
FILM or CLEAR FILM.
4–43 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

selection is CUBIC.

Type algorithms.
DICOM Print Camera Setting Screen: (2nd Screen for Advanced Parameters)
4–44 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

c. Use the Advanced Parameters window to set specific Filming Device Image Quality parameters and select
network time–outs. To ensure these settings are correct, verify all selections with the Filming Device Service
Representative.
Set the following parameters, then click on Accept.
Note
When you want to return to the default setting, click on Reset IQ Parameters or Reset Timeout Pa-
rameters.
D Image Quality Parameters
Smoothing Type:
Recommended Smoothing Type Starting Values & Ranges:

Agfa DryStar (MG3000): Start Value: 140 Range: 137 – 150
Imation Dryview (8700): Start Value: 3 Range: 3 – 13
Kodak Laser Printer 190: Start Value: Enhanced Range: Normal
Configuration:
This parameter is Filming Device manufacturer dependent and is typically used to specify the image con-
trast.
Recommended Configuration Setting Values:

Agfa DryStar (MG3000): PERCEPTION_LUT=KANAMORI (100)
Imation Dryview (8700): LUT=0,7
Kodak Laser Printer 190: CS434\CN0\PD1.20
Minimum and Maximum Density:

4095, although the valid range for a specific Filming Device is manufacturer dependent.
Recommended Minimum and Maximum Starting Values:

Agfa DryStar (MG3000): Min: 20 or 23 Max: 300
Imation Dryview (8700): Min: (Blank) Max: 300
Kodak Laser Printer 190: Min: 20 Max: 300
Empty Density:
Border Density:
4–45 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

D Network TimeOut Parameters :
The purpose of these parameters is to terminate the communications if the Filming Device
does not respond within a reasonable amount of time. These values may need to be different
for devices on Wide Area Networks (WANs) versus those on Local Area Networks (LANs). For
DICOM Print Devices, timeouts exist at the Association and Session levels and each of the
DISME Services (N–Create, N–Set, N–Get, N–Delete, N–Action). The timeouts are stated in
seconds with a minimum timeout of 90 seconds.
d. Select Network to proceed to the next screen.
4–46 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

GATEWAY
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS
HOST NAME
CT
4–47 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

i. Enter Host Name.


address.


255.255.255.0 gw 192.168.0.254

dress.

4–48 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
4-17 OPTION CHECK

3. Click on Quit.
4–49 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

4–50 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

4-19-2 Setting CRT Gamma Value

% su<Enter>
and “1”.)
4-19-3 Test Scan

4–51 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
4-20-1 General
Prerequisite

CD–ROM : 2250104 V/R4.00 Service Software (Must be prepared by FE, distributed through TAB 287.)
D For the system upgraded from V/R 3.x

Prepare the table 3–1, InSite Information Check Sheet, in which you recorded information before LFC.
4-20-2 Installing InSite software

Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select System Tools –> Application Shut-
down –> OK.

Click on Yes.
5. “Do you install Class M Service Software 4.00?” message appears.

Click on Yes.
4–52 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Click on OK.
> eject <Enter>
> exit <Enter>
A few seconds later, the InSite Interactive Platform Configuration screen appears.

4–53 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
NOTICE

Phone: 1–800–321–7937 (33) 1 3083 1300 81–426–56–0033
FAX: (262)896–2710 (33) 1 3070 9970 81–426–56–0053
D For the System upgraded from V/R 3.x:

Click on ProDiag tag.
D For the System that performed LFC from V/R 4.xx to V/R4.xx:
Click on InSite Checkout tag, then go to Section 4-20-6, Setting up InSite Checkout
4–54 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
4-20-3 Installing Proactive Diagnostics

1. The Proactive Diagnostics Install Screen appears.
Click on DEFAULT.
Illustration 4–4 Proactive Diagnostics Install Screen
4–55 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
4-20-4 Health Page Installation Menu

1. Health Page screen appears.
Verify that a proper E–mail address is entered.
Illustration 4–5 Health Page Setting Screen
xxxxx.xxxxxx@gemsa.med.ge.com
2. Click on DEFAULT.
4–56 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
4-20-5 Setting Up Modem Configuration

1. Device Connection Screen appears.
Illustration 4–6 Modem Configuration Screen
4–57 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
4-20-5 Setting up Modem Configuration (Continued)

D Dial–out Prefix
Enter the Dial–out Prefix, referring to Table 3–1, InSite Information Check Sheet.
D Modem Type
Enter the modem currently installed, referring to Table 3–1, InSite Information Check Sheet.
D CPU Serial Port Name
Do not change this setting.
D Dialing Mode
Enter the Dial type, referring to Table 3–1, InSite Information Check Sheet.
D Country
Verify that the proper country is selected where the CT system has been installed.
D CPU Serial Port Speed
Verify that 115200 is selected as a standard speed.
4–58 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
4-20-5 Setting up Modem Configuration (Continued)

2. Click on APPLY.
The Modem Hardware Setting Screen appears.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Depending on a modem type (Multitech, 3COM, Hayes, ...), the following message might ap-
pears. If it does, click on OK to proceed.
‘Exception:java.io.FileNotFoundException:/usr/g/insite.readme.ModemMultiTech’
Illustration 4–7 Modem Hardware Setting Screen
Note:
The modem hardware setting screen to be displayed depends on the mo-
dem to be connected.
3. Click on OK, the following message should be displayed on the status line of the bottom side of the Modem con-
figuration screen.
******************************* Displayed *******************************
Device Connection : Completed Successfully.
************************************************************************
4. If “Status : Failed” appears, set the CPU Serial Port Speed again to the lower values than currently set.
If this error occurs repeatedly, consult your local technical support center.
4–59 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
NOTICE

4–60 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

3. Click on OK.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
4–61 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123


process.

Note
7. Click on Startup.
4–62 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
4-21 TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS

Does the mes-

sage above ap- Yes
pears during
Was the trouble
recovered?
Yes
ing?
No
No

ing page.
Was the trouble Yes

recovered?
No


Was the trouble Yes
recovered?
No
4–63 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
NOTICE

.........................
<ENTER>


....................
....................

fx> exi <ENTER>
<ENTER>
used at this time.)
4–64 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Note
NOTICE


3. Press ESC key.
Note

.........................
<ENTER>


fx> d <ENTER>
4–65 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123


<ENTER>
.........
..................


fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................


Warning:.........
..................
.................

4–66 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

fx> exi <ENTER>
tool).)
4–67 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Note
NOTICE


3. Press ESC key.
Note

.........................
<ENTER>


fx> d <ENTER>
4–68 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123


<ENTER>
.........
..................


fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................


Warning:.........
..................
.................

4–69 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

fx> exi <ENTER>
4–70 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123




a. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select System Tools –> Applica-
tion Shutdown –> OK.
b. Click on Shell.
4–71 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

c. Type as follows:

> ls *.dev <Enter>
set dName ”di3”

set dPort 104
set dComment ””
set dType digital
set dQueueType DICM
set dHostName di3
4–72 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123






– row x col (e.g. 12 on 1 = 4x3)
– col x row (e.g. 12 on 1 = 3x4)
4–73 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
4-22 APPENDIX
4-22-1 The Reason Why the System State Data Must be Reloaded TWICE
For the system state data, the following principle exists:
The version of the system state data to be restored must be same as or higher than its version to be saved.
The figure below is an example of performing the LFC/LFW for the V/R 4.11 system. The V/R 4.11 system state data
is saved before LFC/LFW. The system state data is automatically reloaded after installing application software, but
this violates the principle described above because of the system V/R 4.10, not 4.11. So, after installing a patch soft-
ware to upgrade the system version to V/R 4.11, the system state data should be manually reloaded again.
For this reason, when performing LFC/LFW and patch software installation, the system state data must be reloaded
twice.
Up to now, a problem does NOT occur even if this principle is NOT strictly followed. However, when upgrading the
system to V/R 4.11, 4.01, 3.02, or 2.55 (Y2K FMI), this principle is required. If it is not followed, a part of the system
state data to be reloaded are destroyed.
NG: Lower OK: Same

Version Version
(4.10) (4.11)
System
4.11 4.10 4.11
Version
Installing
Procedures LFC/LFW a Patch
Software
Automatically
Manually
System
Save Restore Restore
State
Data (V/R 4.11 (V/R 4.11 (V/R 4.11
system system system
state data) state data) state data)
4–74 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123


xxx: Serial No.)

NPZBYxxxCT 47xxx
NPZCYxxxCT 46xxx
NPZDYxxxCT 45xxx
NPLAYxxxCT 44xxx
NPLBYxxxCT 43xxx
NPLCYxxxCT 42xxx
NPLDYxxxCT 41xxx
(Continued)
4–75 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

xxx: Serial No.)

NPLFYxxxCT 39xxx
NPLGYxxxCT 38xxx
NPFAYxxxCT 37xxx
NPFBYxxxCT 36xxx
NPFCYxxxCT 35xxx
NPFDYxxxCT 34xxx
NPFEYxxxCT 33xxx
NPFGYxxxCT 32xxx
NPFFYxxxCT 31xxx
NPDAYxxxCT 30xxx
NPDBYxxxCT 29xxx
NPDCYxxxCT 28xxx
NPDDYxxxCT 27xxx
NPDEYxxxCT 26xxx
NPDGYxxxCT 25xxx
NPDFYxxxCT 24xxx
NPMCYxxxCT 23xxx
NPMDYxxxCT 22xxx
NPMEYxxxCT 21xxx
XJNPYxxxCT 20xxx
ACTAYxxxCT 19xxx
XJNTYxxxCT 18xxx
NPPJYxxxCT 17xxx
NPPLYxxxCT 16xxx
NPPNYxxxCT 15xxx
NPPUYxxxCT 14xxx
(Continued)
4–76 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

xxx: Serial No.)

NPPSYxxxCT 12xxx
NPPVYxxxCT 11xxx
NPPTYxxxCT 10xxx
NPNSYxxxCT 09xxx
NPNTYxxxCT 08xxx
NPNUYxxxCT 07xxx
NPNXYxxxCT 06xxx
NPMAYxxxCT 05xxx
NPMBYxxxCT 04xxx
NPPAYxxxCT 03xxx
NPPEYxxxCT 02xxx
NPNMYxxxCT 01xxx
NPTBYxxxCT 03xxx
NPTCYxxxCT 02xxx
NPTDYxxxCT 01xxx
4–77 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123
4–78 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
SECTION 5 – SOFTWARE LOADING FOR V/R 3.XX OR

LOWER
Compatible with Version 3.xx or lower
5-1 GENERAL
WARNING
application) and Load–From–Warm (LFW) procedure only for NP application loading from CD–ROMs and some
MODs to the system hard disk. When the LFC procedure is performed:
CAUTION
An LFC/LFW procedure is outlined in Illustration 5–1.
NOTICE
the LFW procedure.)
5–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
LFC
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Procedures
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ LFW
Prerequisite
1 ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Saving Customer Data Two blank MODs
3 Saving Camera Data –
5 Disconnecting the SCSI Cable for None –
the optional Pioneer MOD drive.
6 Installing System Software (OS) None CD–ROM(s): Core OS
* Loading Installation Tool
tion
7 Installing Application Software CD–ROM(s): Application Soft-
ware
A blank MOD (for LFW only)
8 Connecting the SCSI Cable for the None –
optional Pioneer MOD drive.
Restoring the System Configuration Data MOD in which the system
state data has been saved
Restoring the System State Data MOD in which the system
Restoring the Option Key MOD in which the system
11 Installing the Application Revision–up (Patch) software
Loading Revision–up (Patch) software CD–ROM : Application Revi-
sion–up (Patch) Software
When performing LFC/LFW for 3.02 ONLY: MOD in which the system
Restoring the System Stage Data AGAIN! state data has been saved
For V/R 4.0x system ONLY: –
Editing the file
(continued)
5–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
Illustration 5–1 Software Loading Standard Procedure (Continued)
LFC
Procedures
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ LFW
Prerequisite
12
13
Changing System Configuration (Reconfig)
Starting Up the System
–
–
14 Completing the LFC/LFW Procedures
Restoring Customer Data MODs in which the images or
raw data have been saved
15 Setting CRT Gamma Value –
16 For V/R 2.02 or lower system ONLY: –
Selecting Auto Voice Language
17 For V/R 1.20 Japanese system ONLY: –
Displaying Japanese Message
5–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
5-2 PREPARATION
D CD–ROM : Core OS (OS) (for V/R 3.xx or lower system)
D 2 MODs (5 inches 2.3 GB)
NOTICE
For the system with 5 inch MOD drive, 1.2GB or 600MB MOD can NOT be used when saving
data.
Note
For the MODs to save system state data, patient images, and raw data, they do NOT need to be
manually formatted. (A used–MOD is available.) This means that the format procedures will be auto-
matically started before saving data.
5-3 SAVING CUSTOMER DATA
CAUTION
before performing this procedure (Refer to the Operator Manual). This procedure will re–ini-
tialize all system data disk, erasing all images and scan data.
Prerequisite
D Two MOD (5 inches 2.3 GB)
Note
Procedures
2. If required, save the raw data on a MOD. Refer to the Operator manual. The MOD must be initialized first. (Scan
–> Scanner Utilities –> Rawdata Function –> Function Selection –> Save to MOD –> Rawdata Selection
(e.g. Whole exam) –> Start Save)
5–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section 5-4, Saving System State Data.
Prerequisite
D One MOD (5 inches 2.3 GB)
D Approx. 5 minutes
Procedures
Before beginning the software install, you will want to, save the system state data.
1. Verify that the system is powered ON. If it is not, switch ON the main switch of the OC. The system is started
up, then the main screen appears.
3. Select Service –> Utilities –> savestate. or

Select Service –> System Tools –> Application shutdown –> OK –> Savestate.

Note
Note
– IOS preferences
– Autovoice files
5–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section 5-5, Shutdown the System.
1. Perform either of the following:
D When selecting Service –> Utilities –> savestate in saving–state–data phases:
a. Click on Shutdown icon located on the upper left of the screen.
b. Click on OK in response to “Attention: Shutdown the system?”.
D When selecting Service –> System Tools –> Application shutdown –> OK –> Savestate in saving–state–data
phases:
a. Click on Shutdown icon (Tool menu) located on the upper right of the screen.
Some test program runs. NO button to be displayed is clicked.
3. Switch OFF the main switch of the OC.
5-6 DISCONNECTING THE SCSI CABLE FOR THE OPTIONAL PIONEER MOD DRIVE
(FOR V/R 3.XX OR LOWER SYSTEM ONLY)
Note
This must be required in LFC procedure if the system contains the optional Pioneer MOD drive.
For LFW procedures, skip this section 5-6, Disconnecting the SCSI cable for the Optional Pioneer
MOD Drive.
1. Withdraw the SCSI bay from the OC, where the optional MOD drive has been installed.
2. Disconnect the SCSI cable from the MOD drive.
3. Insert the SCSI bay into the OC. At this time, do NOT fix the SCSI bay using screws yet.
5–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Note
For LFW procedure, skip this section 5-7, Installing System Software.
Prerequisite
D CD–ROM : Core OS (OS) (for V/R 3.xx or lower system)
Procedures


2. Press ESC key.
Note
3. Insert the CD–ROM (Core OS system software) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.
Note:
Repartitioning Procedures:
When the following situation happens, perform the following steps b to d. If it is not, go to step 5. (This
procedure performs repartition of the HDD to load the install program on the HDD.)
D System HDD is replaced with a new one.
D The errors occur during OS loading procedures and the system can not recover from it.
a. Click on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.
b. Type the following responses.

.........................
<ENTER>
5–7 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123


[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/ [f]ormat
fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................


Warning:.........
..................
.................


fx> exi <ENTER>
c. Click on Done button located on the lower right side of the console window. ( The “exit” command can not be
used at this time.)
5–8 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Inst> admin <Enter>
2. For the System with V/R 3.xx or later ONLY:

Verify that the following message are displayed.
******************************* Displayed *******************************

Creating System Disk partition automatically.
.......
************************************************************************
a. Verify that the message “Okay to power off the system now. Press any key to restart.” appears.
b. Click on Restart.
The window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button appears (shown
below).

c. Press ESC key.
Note
Note
5–9 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

3. For the System with V/R 2.xx or lower ONLY:
Verify that the following message are displayed.
******************************* Displayed *******************************

Creating System Disk partition
Diskdrive: unit1 on SCSI controller 0
Creating Rawdata Disk partition
Diskdrive: unit1 on SCSI controller 3
#
************************************************************************
a. Verify that “#” will be displayed, then switch OFF the main switch of the OC.
b. Switch ON the main switch of the OC again.

Few seconds later, the window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” but-
ton appears (shown below).

c. Press ESC key.
Note
6. Verify that:
D The CD–ROM (Core OS) remains into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.
Note
Depending on the disk capacity, system version, etc..., the following steps 9 to 11 might be skipped.
Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
5–10 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Press Enter to invoke CShell csh: <Enter> (Enter key only)
# mkfs –t xfs /dev/dsk/dks0d1s0 <Enter>
******************************* Displayed *******************************

meta–data=xxxxxxx
data=xxxxxxx
log=xxxxxx
real time=xxxxxxx
************************************************************************
# exit <Enter>
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Inst> admin <Enter>
# /CDROM/bin/makedisk <Enter>
5–11 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

************* Displayed (For the System with V/R 3.xx ONLY)*************

************************************************************************
************* Displayed (For the System with V/R 2.xx or lower ONLY)*************
done....
************************************************************************
# exit <Enter>
Admin> exit <Enter>
Inst> exit <Enter>

appears. Next, “IRIS’s Internet address....” message appears (shown below).

Note
5–12 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

Note
For LFW procedure, power ON the OC main switch before starting this procedure.
Note
For installing the application revision–up (Patch) software, refer to Section 5-11. It must be installed
after completion of LFC/LFW procedure.
Prerequisite
D For LFW ONLY:

One blank MOD (5 inches 2.3 GB or 3.5 inches 540MB, depending on the System)
Procedures

CD–ROM drive.
After completing application software loading, the system will be automatically rebooted,
then IRIS main menu appears again.
NOTICE
Do not remove the CD–ROM at this time. It MUST be removed in Section 5-10-4, Ejecting the
CD–ROM and MOD.
5–13 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

1. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select System Tools –> Application Shut-
down –> OK.
2. Click on LFW located on the upper right of the screen.
OC.

Note
appears again.
NOTICE
Do not remove the CD–ROM at this time. It MUST be removed in Section 5-10-4, Ejecting the
CD–ROM and MOD.
5–14 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
5-8-3 Connecting the SCSI cable for the Optional Pioneer MOD Drive
(FOR V/R 3.XX OR LOWER SYSTEM ONLY)
Note
This must be required in LFC procedure if the system contains the optional Pioneer MOD drive.
For LFW procedures, ignore this section 5-8-3, Connecting the SCSI cable for the Optional Pioneer
MOD Drive.
1. Click on Console icon located on the upper left of the screen.
2. Move the mouse in the console window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:
The system automatically shuts down.
# shutdown –y –g0 <Enter>
4. Switch OFF the main switch of the OC.
5. Withdraw the SCSI bay from the OC.
6. Connect the SCSI cable to the Pioneer MOD drive.
7. Insert the SCSI bay into the OC and fix the SCSI bay using the screws.
9. Verify that the system is started up with no error.
5–15 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
Prerequisite
D MOD (including the system state data saved in section 5-4 or 5-8-2)

1. Double–click on Preconfig icon located at the lower right of the screen.

5. Click on Accept.
Note
The system configuration is performed at section 5-12, Changing System Configuration (Reconfig).
5–16 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
5-10 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 2 – AUXCONFIG)
Prerequisite

D When proceeding to next phase, click on Quit.
Procedures
Note
6. System Health Page window appears.

Select DEFAULT –> ACCEPT –> NO –> DONE on each screen.
5–17 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

This procedure MUST be performed whether or not you install the new option in the system. In “Software Options”
screen, you can see any options in the installed options box, but they are NOT installed perfectly in this phase yet.
So, This Install procedure must be performed.
Prerequisite
Procedures
For the System with V/R 2.5 or later ONLY:

The option installation procedures automatically starts. You have nothing to do! (Also see Note below.)
After completing automatic installation for option, the system shuts down, then starts up automatically. Go to Section
5-10-4, Ejecting the CD–ROM and MOD.
Note
D Denta Option:
“install.denta” window appears. Enter y .
Before installing the Denta Option, the Laser camera must be connected to the system. (This software
will send an image to the camera when installed.)
ConnectPro setup window appears. Enter the proper information. (Ask a network specialist of your head
quarter.) Then select Accept.
D Extended Raw Data Disk Option:

5–18 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
5-10-3 Installing (or Restoring) Option Key (Continued)
For the System with V/R 2.02 or lower ONLY:

1. To remove the MOD (System state data) from the MOD drive, press the Eject button on the MOD drive.
2. Select the Option to be installed using “Available Options” box.
The option loading is started, then the options installed are displayed at “Installed Option” box.
4. Click on Quit.
5. Click on OK.
The system is automatically rebooted.
5–19 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

> eject <Enter>
> exit <Enter>
NOTICE
5–20 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
5-11 INSTALLING THE APPLICATION REVISION–UP (PATCH) SOFTWARE

If the system has a revision–up (patch) software, it must be installed after completion of LFC/LFW procedure.
If it does not, skip this section 5-11, then go to section 5-12, Changing System Configuration (reconfig).
Prerequisite
5-11-1 Loading Revision–up Software (For the System with V/R 3.xx or Later)
NOTICE
For V/R 3.xx System with Gantry 2200997–2, 2200999–2, 2201000–2, and 2249696–2 ONLY,
the “++DAS data for V/R 3” CD–ROM (2257080) MUST be installed first, then “SmartFilter for
V/R 3.xx” CD–ROM (2256433) MUST be installed. Loading order is important.
After installation of these software, perform the verification procedures described below to
check if they have been properly installed.
Procedure
down –> OK.
3. Click on Install Software (or Install Patch) located on the upper right of the screen.
4. Click on Yes to the question displayed.
5. Click on Yes again to the question displayed.

6. Click on OK in response to “Installation Complete”.
8. Type eject to eject the CD–ROM from the CD–ROM drive.
9. Type exit to terminate the shell window.
NOTICE
5–21 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
5-11-1 Loading Revision–up Software (For the System with V/R 3.xx or Later) (Continued)
Verification Procedures (For the system with ++DAS Data and SmartFilter Patches):
1. Insert the “++DAS data for V/R 3” CD–ROM (2257080) into the CD–ROM drive of the OC. (In this CD–ROM,
“check_patch” program are contained.)
down –> OK.
4. Move the mouse in the window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts.
> /CDROM/bin/check_patch <Enter>
5. Verify that the following messages appears.

******************************* Displayed *******************************
Patch NPP30001 : HiSpeed Series Patch Software 3.01
Patch NPP30011 : ++DAS Data for V/R 3.xx
Patch NPP30013 : SmartFilter for V/R 3.xx
************************************************************************
6. Type eject to eject the CD–ROM from the CD–ROM drive.
7. Enter Exit , then press <Enter> key.
NOTICE
Restoring the System State Data Again!

Note
Refer to Appendix for the reason why the system state data must be restored again.
When installing the patch software only (not LFC/LFW procedures), skip this section and go to section 5-12, Changing
System Configuration (reconfig).
5-4 or 5-8-2, into the MOD drive, then click on Confirm.
Note
5–22 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
5-11-1 Loading Revision–up Software (For the System with V/R 3.xx or Later) (Continued)
NOTICE
5-11-2 Loading Revision–up Software (For the System with V/R 2.54 and 2.55)
down –> OK.
% su<Enter>
> /CDROM/bin/install_patch <Enter>
5. The patch software list to be installed and message “Do you install selected patches?” appear. Click on Yes.
6. The message “Installation complete. Reboot to start using new kernel.” appears. Click on OK.
7. Enter the following to reboot the system and start using new kernel.
> reboot <Enter>
8 Type eject and press <Enter> key to eject the CD–ROM from the CD–ROM drive.
NOTICE
5–23 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
5-11-3 Loading Revision–up Software (For the System with V/R 2.53 or lower)
down –> OK.
% su<Enter>
> swmgr <Enter> (To run software manager.)
5. Using cursor buttons, select /CDROM/dist.
6. Click on Customize Installation button.
7. Make the check marks on the item(s) for the required patch software(s) depending on a system revision.
8. Click on Start.
10. For Version 2.00 System AND the OC with the optional Pioneer MOD drive Only:
Using an editor software (e.x. vi editor), add the following in the /etc/passwd file.
D installPMOD::0:0:Super–User:/:/usr/g/scripts/installPMOD
11 Type eject and press <Enter> key to eject the CD–ROM from the CD–ROM drive.
NOTICE
5–24 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

5-12-1 Configuration
When the desktop menu does not appear, click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select
System Tools –> Application Shutdown –> OK.
2. Check if the appropriate information have been set.

(If you did not have a System State MOD, you will need to enter the appropriate information.)
NOTICE

5–25 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
5-12 Configuration (Continued)

Time Zone
Number.
Note
5–26 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

4. Preferences Screen:
a. Select Units for patient weight for units for patient weight to be displayed on images.
b. Select the Language for this site.
c. Select Date Format to be displayed on images.
Note
d. Select Time Format to be displayed on screen.
e. Select Default Autovoice Language for this site.
f. For the system with V/R 2.02 or lower ONLY:
D Click on DICOM when using a DICOM device as a default archive device.
D Configure Doctors Title to the title used by the user interface.
g. Select Hardware to proceed to the next screen.
5–27 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

5. Hardware Settings Screen:
a. Configure your Camera Setup.
D Laser Camera Type : choose the closest option
D DASM Interface : this option must match your physical DASM type; for DASM–LCAM, select Digital.
D Film Formats Default : choose the default film format.
b. For the system with V/R 2.02 or lower ONLY:

Select the PDU Type for this system.
5–28 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

c. Click on Hardware Diagnosis Information.

a. NP
b. NPTWIN

a. 16Mb
b. 32Mb
c. 64Mb
Enter # of Slave DSP? xx <Enter>


1 2
2 4
4 8
8 16
ÍÍÍÍÍ HiSpeed Series
ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
NPRS
NPRM
Nest
Note
d. Select Network to proceed to the next screen.
5–29 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

GATEWAY
HOST NAME
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS
HOST NAME
CT
5–30 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

i. Enter Host Name.


address.


255.255.255.0 gw 192.168.0.254
D You should now skip to step 7.

i. Enter the Gateway Parameters (Host Name and IP Address). If possible consult the site’s network ad-
ministrator before configuring the interface to the site’s network. The site administrator should provide
the Gateway IP Address.
7. InSite Setting Screen:
a. Click on InSite.
After a moment, the InSite Proprietary Screen appears.

5–31 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
5-13 STARTING UP THE SYSTEM

2. For the system with V/R 2.02 or lower ONLY:

Click on Continue in time setting window.
5–32 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
5-14 COMPLETING THE LFC/LFW PROCEDURE

5–33 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
5-15 SETTING CRT GAMMA VALUE

% su<Enter>
and “1”.)
5–34 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
5-16 SELECTING AUTO VOICE LANGUAGE (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH V/R 2.02 OR LOWER ONLY)
This is the procedures for the system with Version 2.02 or lower.
For the system of Version 2.5 or later, See Operator’s manual (Protocol Management –> Auto Voice).
Auto voice language can be selected from eight languages by a field engineer. English–male for 1st language (Auto
Voice #1–#3) and Japanese for 2nd language (Auto Voice #4–#6) are automatically selected as a default after LFC.
a. Click on Shutdown icon located on the upper left of the screen.
b. Click on OK in response to “Attention: Shut down the system.”.
“Okay to power off......” message appears.
c. Switch OFF the main switch of the OC.
d. Switch ON the main switch of the OC.
Few seconds later, in the black screen, “Please wait...System is being started.” message appears.
e. Press [Shift] + [7] to display the desktop menu.
The shell window appears.
% selectAVLang <Enter>
Change default language for Auto Voice
Select language set (1/2)? 2 <Enter>

This is for example. To select 1st language, enter “1”.
Select preferred languages (enf/enm/fr/ge/it/sp/ms/jp) ? fr

<Enter>
This is for example to select French.
enf : English–female
enm : English–male
fr : French
ge : German
it : Italian
sp : Spanish
ms : Mexican Spanish
jp : Japanese
Language Set : 2, Selected Language : French
Accept to change (Y/N) ? y <Enter>

When no modification is required, select “y” (Yes).
***selectAVLang has finished. Application should be restarted to take

effect.
4. On the desktop menu, click on Startup button located on the upper right of the screen to run the application.
5–35 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
5-17 DISPLAYING JAPANESE MESSAGE (FOR THE SYSTEM WITH V/R 1.20 ONLY)
For the Japanese system with System Version 1.20 only, the following procedure must be performed to display the
messages (in the lower right side of the scan screen) in Japanese.
This procedure can be skipped for the system with System Version 2.00 or later.
2. Click on Shell in the System tools.
> /usr/g/srtools/setJapMes <Enter>
Note
“J” and “M” must be entered as a capital letter.
5–36 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
5-18 APPENDIX
NOTICE
5-18-1 How to format a System HDD (For the System with V/R 3.xx or lower ONLY)

3. Press ESC key.

Note
4. Cick on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.

.........................
<ENTER>
SGI Version 6.3 ARCS Nov 26, 1996


fx> f <ENTER>
fx/format: Drive Parameters to use in formatting=(current) <ENTER>

.........
..................
Formatting procedure is started. It will take approximately 30 minutes to format a 2GB HDD.
5–37 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
5-18-1 How to format a System HDD (For the System with V/R 3.xx or lower ONLY) (Continued)

fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................


Warning:.........
..................
.................

8. Click on Done button located on the lower right side of the console window. ( The “exit” command can not be
used at this time.)
tool).)
5–38 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
5-18-2 How to format an Image HDD (For the System with V/R 3.xx or lower ONLY)


3. Press ESC key.
Note
4. Cick on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.

.........................
<ENTER>
SGI Version 6.3 ARCS Nov 26, 1996


fx> f <ENTER>
fx/format: Drive Parameters to use in formatting=(current) <ENTER>

.........
..................
Fomenting procedure is started. It will take approximately 30 minutes to format a 2GB HDD.
5–39 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
5-18-2 How to format an Image HDD (For the System with V/R 3.xx or lower ONLY) (Continued)

fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................


Warning:.........
..................
.................

8. Click on Done button located on the lower right side of the console window. ( The “exit” command can not be
used at this time.)
5–40 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
5-18-3 The Reason Why the System State Data Must be Reloaded TWICE
For the system state data, the following principle exists:
The version of the system state data to be restored must be same as or higher than its version to be saved.
The figure below is an example of performing the LFC/LFW for the V/R 3.02 system. The V/R 3.02 system state data
is saved before LFC/LFW. The system state data is automatically reloaded after installing application software, but
this violates the principle described above because of the system V/R 3.00, not 3.02. So, after installing a patch soft-
ware to upgrade the system version to V/R 3.02, the system state data should be manually reloaded again.
For this reason, when performing LFC/LFW and patch software installation, the system state data must be reloaded
twice.
Up to now, a problem does NOT occur even if this principle is NOT strictly followed. However, when upgrading the
system to V/R 4.11, 4.01, 3.02, or 2.55 (Y2K FMI), this principle is required. If it is not followed, a part of the system
state data to be reloaded are destroyed.
NG: Lower OK: Same

Version Version
(3.00) (3.02)
System
3.02 3.00 3.02
Version
Installing
Procedures LFC/LFW Patch
Softwares
Automatically
Manually
System
Save Restore Restore
State
Data (V/R 3.02 (V/R 3.02 (V/R 3.02
system system system
state data) state data) state data)
5–41 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123


xxx: Serial No.)

NPZBYxxxCT 47xxx
NPZCYxxxCT 46xxx
NPZDYxxxCT 45xxx
NPLAYxxxCT 44xxx
NPLBYxxxCT 43xxx
NPLCYxxxCT 42xxx
NPLDYxxxCT 41xxx
(Continued)
5–42 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

xxx: Serial No.)

NPLFYxxxCT 39xxx
NPLGYxxxCT 38xxx
NPFAYxxxCT 37xxx
NPFBYxxxCT 36xxx
NPFCYxxxCT 35xxx
NPFDYxxxCT 34xxx
NPFEYxxxCT 33xxx
NPFGYxxxCT 32xxx
NPFFYxxxCT 31xxx
NPDAYxxxCT 30xxx
NPDBYxxxCT 29xxx
NPDCYxxxCT 28xxx
NPDDYxxxCT 27xxx
NPDEYxxxCT 26xxx
NPDGYxxxCT 25xxx
NPDFYxxxCT 24xxx
NPMCYxxxCT 23xxx
NPMDYxxxCT 22xxx
NPMEYxxxCT 21xxx
XJNPYxxxCT 20xxx
ACTAYxxxCT 19xxx
XJNTYxxxCT 18xxx
NPPJYxxxCT 17xxx
NPPLYxxxCT 16xxx
NPPNYxxxCT 15xxx
NPPUYxxxCT 14xxx
(Continued)
5–43 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

xxx: Serial No.)

NPPSYxxxCT 12xxx
NPPVYxxxCT 11xxx
NPPTYxxxCT 10xxx
NPNSYxxxCT 09xxx
NPNTYxxxCT 08xxx
NPNUYxxxCT 07xxx
NPNXYxxxCT 06xxx
NPMAYxxxCT 05xxx
NPMBYxxxCT 04xxx
NPPAYxxxCT 03xxx
NPPEYxxxCT 02xxx
NPNMYxxxCT 01xxx
NPTBYxxxCT 03xxx
NPTCYxxxCT 02xxx
NPTDYxxxCT 01xxx
5–44 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
SECTION 6 – X–RAY ALIGNMENT
6-1 GENERAL
This ‘X–ray Alignment’ consists of the following check/adjustment procedures and must be performed in this order.
Order X–Ray Alignment Description

↓ Item
Twin Detector System Single Detector System
1 Detector Position For Twin System Only: –
Alignment Adjusts parallelism and detector Z–
axis position to Gantry bearing sur-
face.
2 Aperture Position For Twin System Only: –
Alignment Adjusts the aperture parallelism and
distance between the aperture and
Gantry bearing surface.
3 Plane Of Rotation Filmless POR: The tube warm–up Film POR: The tube position in Z–axis
(POR) scans are automatically performed direction is adjusted using a film. The
until the case temperature becomes Tube warm–up scans are NOT per-
30% (For Twin System Only), then formed.
the tube position in Z–axis direction is
adjusted. The tube travel is calcu-
lated from the count ratio A/(A+B) of
150 channels (R50ch, C50ch, and
L50ch).
4 Detector Beam– Filmless BOW: The tube warm–up Film BOW: The Detector position in
On–Window scans are automatically performed Z–axis direction is adjusted using a
(BOW) until the case temperature becomes film. The Tube warm–up scans are
30% (For Twin System Only), then NOT performed
the Detector position in Z–axis direc-
tion is adjusted. The tube travel is
calculated from the count ratio
A/(A+B) of 150 channels (R50ch,
C50ch, and L50ch).
5 Qcal Channel Ratio For Twin System Only: –
Compensates sensitivity between A
and B slices for Z–axis beam tracking.
– Gravity SAG (G– Check procedure for the Gantry rotating mechanism (bend, vibrations, etc.)
SAG)
6 ISO Center Align- Aligns the X–ray tube focus to the FOV center and the Detector center chan-
ment nel.
7 Filter Center Align- Aligns the filter to the X–ray tube and the Detector.
ment
6–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-1 GENERAL (continued)
Note1: G–SAG is performed if considered necessary.

Note2: If you are sure that some procedures do not have to be performed, in this case, the possible allowed
procedure combination/order should be:
At site installation or X–ray tube replacement, perform 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7.

At detector replacement, perform 4 → 5 → 6 → 7.
Note3: Z–axis mis–alignment has serious effect on an image quality for the Twin Detector system, as
compared to the single detector system. Therefore, the Detector position alignment, aperture position
alignment, and tube warm–up sequence at POR and BOW must be properly performed.
6–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
Difference of POR Between Twin Detector and Single Detector

For POR of the Twin Detector system, the X–ray beam location after adjustment is determined by the initial position
of the Aperture and Detector (the center between A and B slices).
Therefore, the X–ray beam location adjusted by Film–less POR might be different from one by Film POR, but it is
no problem due to the fact that:
D A slight tilt of X–ray beam against Z–axis has little effect on an image quality.
D The Aperture and Detector are installed using the special tools shipped with the system to ensure reliable
position and parallelism. (The single Detector does NOT require the aperture alignment tool.)
D During Filmless POR, the X–ray tube temperature is controlled by software so that the X–ray beam can
be exposed at a certain location of the detector. (The single Detector does NOT control the X–ray tube
temperature.)
X–Ray Tube
Focus
ÈÈ Using special tools, adjust
ÈÈ Collimator the Aperture and Detector so
ÈÈ
that they are parallel to the
Gantry bearing.
ÈÈ
ÈÈ Aperture
Top View
ÈÈ ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Gantry
Bearing
ÈÈ
Gantry
ÈÈ
Bearing
ÈÈ
Aperture or Detector
ÈÈ
ÈÈ
X–ray Beam adjusted by Film POR Z–Axis
ÈÈ X–ray Beam adjusted by Film–less POR
ÈÈ
ÈÈ
ÈÈ
B A
ÈÈ
Detector
ÈÈ Z–Axis
6–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD !
IN THIS ‘X–RAY ALIGNMENT’, GANTRY COMPONENTS ARE ADJUSTED AND SCANS ARE
PERFORMED. ALWAYS SWITCH OFF THE ‘ROTATE’ SWITCH BEFORE SERVICING OR
ADJUSTING THE GANTRY. ALSO VERIFY THAT NO PEOPLE ARE IN THE SCAN ROOM
WHENEVER A SCAN IS PERFORMED.
Requirements
The critical components for X–ray Alignment are all mounted directly to the rotating Gantry; they are:
D X–ray tube
D Collimator (includes a bow–tie filter and an adjustable beam slit)
D Detector
Tools and materials required for x–ray alignment:
D Except for Twin System
– Polaroid film packs
– Polaroid film holder (developer for Polaroid film)
– Film holder (2204748 X 2) for Detector Beam–on–window alignment
D For Twin System
– Detector alignment tool (shipped with the system)
– Aperture alignment tool (shipped with the system)
D G–SAG pin (attached on the bottom of the collimator)
6–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
Gantry Geometry
Gantry geometrical direction definitions:
THETA THETA
(–) (+) (–) (+)

D Theta – Tangent to Gantry rotation.
clockwise (+)
counterclockwise (–).
Adjustment possible for:

X–ray Tube
Collimator
Detector Zero degrees 6 o’clock
(HOME)
D Z–Axis – Parallel to the axis of Gantry rotation.

(+)
toward the Table (–)
away from the Table (+).
(–)
Adjustment possible for:

X–ray Tube
Detector
Polaroid Film Use (POR and BOW except for Twin system only)
Use a Polaroid film pack, a Polaroid film holder or squeeze roller for development as follows:
1. Develop a Polaroid film pack with the film holder.
2. Break the chemical pod over a table edge, or use a squeeze roller as follows:
a. Apply heavy pressure to break the pod.
b. Ease up slightly to spread the developer evenly over the film.
6–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-2 DETECTOR POSITION ALIGNMENT (FOR TWIN SYSTEM ONLY)

This procedure keeps constant the distance between the Z–axis adjusting nut (left, center, and right) for the Detector
and Detector support plate so that the Detector can be installed parallel and at a predefine distance (8.9mm) with the
Gantry bearing surface.
Special Equipment
D Detector Alignment Tool (Shipped with the system)
1. Preparation:
a. Set the Gantry to the 0_ tilt position.
b. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “XG Power” and “Slip Ring115V” switches at the rear Gantry base.
c. Remove the front, rear, and left maintenance covers from the Gantry.
2. Switch ON the service switch on the SUB board.
3. Rotate the Gantry until the DAS Assy reaches the 6 o’clock position by hand.
4. Switch OFF the service switch on the SUB board.
6–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-2 Detector Position Alignment (For Twin System Only) (Continued)

5. Loosen the three Detector locking screws. (Do NOT remove them.)
Illustration 6–1 Detector Locking Screws
Locking Screw
Z–Axis
Adjustment Nut
Detector
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËËËËËË
Detector
Support Plate
ËËËËËËËËËËËË Locking Screw
ËËËËËËËËËËËË (Allen Head)
Z–Axis
Adjustment Nut
Detector
Support Plate
Detector
6–7 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-2 Detector Position Alignment (For Twin System Only) (Continued)

6. Using the Detector Adjustment Tool, set the distance between the Z–axis adjustment nut and detector support
plate to the so that it is the same one as the thickness of the tool.
Illustration 6–2 Detector Alignment Tool
Z–Axis
Adjustment
Nut
Alignment
Tool
Alignment
Tool
Z–Axis
Adjustment
Nut
7. Tighten the three detector locking screws securely.
8. Proceed to Section 6-3, ‘Aperture Position Alignment’.
6–8 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-3 APERTURE POSITION ALIGNMENT (FOR TWIN SYSTEM ONLY)

This procedure keeps constant the distance and parallelism between the aperture and Gantry bearing surface.
Special Equipment
D Aperture Alignment Tool (Shipped with the system)
1. Preparation:
a. Set the Gantry to the 0_ tilt position.
b. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “XG Power” and “Slip Ring115V” switches at the rear Gantry base.
c. Remove the front, rear, and left maintenance covers from the Gantry.
2. Switch ON the service switch on the SUB board.
3. Rotate the Gantry until the Aperture Assy reaches the 6 o’clock position by hand.
4. Switch OFF the service switch on the SUB board.
6–9 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-3 Aperture Position Alignment (For Twin System Only)

5. Set the collimator to the initial position.
a. Switch ON all switches at the rear Gantry base.
b. Select Service –> Offline Scan –> T/G Control.
c. Set Collimator Control:

Auto Collimator: OFF, Position Change: ON, Move mode: Rel., Reset: ON
d. Click on OK. Verify that the aperture stepping motor rotates.
6–10 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123

6. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “XG Power” and “Slip Ring115V” switches at the rear Gantry base.
7. Remove the two nuts and rear lead (Pb) plate from the aperture Assy.
Nuts
Rear Lead Plate
6–11 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123

8. Loosen the following nuts and screws of the aperture Assy. (Do NOT remove them.)
Nuts
Screws (3 pieces)
6–12 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123

9. Set the Aperture alignment tool in between the Gantry bearing and aperture Assy.
10. While pressing the Aperture Assy against the aperture alignment tool, tighten the aperture nuts and screws grad-
ually in the order shown in the photograph below.
11. Remove the Aperture alignment tool.
Aperture Alignment Tool
2 7
PUSH 6
5 4
6–13 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123

12. Reinstall the rear lead (Pb) plate onto the Aperture Assy with the lead side facing to the front. Tighten the two
plate mounting nuts . (Torque: 37 kgf.cm)
Rear Lead Plate
Lead Side
13. Proceed to Section 6-4-2, ‘POR for Twin System’.
6–14 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-4 PLANE OF ROTATION

This procedure checks and adjusts the plane of rotation of the x–ray fan beam until it is perpendicular to the axis of
Gantry rotation within 0.5 mm, for Small Focus, and 0.75 mm, for Large Focus.
6-4-1 POR Except for Twin system

Note
For POR for Twin system, refer to 6-4-2 POR for Twin System.
1. Preparation:
a. Rotate the Gantry to the home position.
b. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.
c. Remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers. (The rear cover should remain installed to attach a
Polaroid film onto it later)
d. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual)
2. Place a Polaroid film at the Gantry 180 deg. position:
Place a Polaroid film within the scan circle as follows:
a. Mark a ‘T’ on the film to identify the Table side. See Illustration 6–4.
b. Attach the film on the bottom ring of the Gantry rear cover using adhesive tape. And put a lead plate on the
film. See Illustration 6–3. (If a lead plate is not available, use a piece of solder)
Illustration 6–3 Placing a Polaroid Film
X–Ray
Tube
Gantry Rear Cover
Table
Lead Plate
Attach Polaroid Film

Detector using Adhesive Tape
6–15 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-4-1 POR Except for Twin System (Continued)

3. Scan a Polaroid film with Small Focus:
Perform two off–line stationary scans; one with 0 deg, the other with 180 deg.
a. Select Service –> Off–Line Scan from the Data Analysis menu.
b. Perform the following stationary scans:
Scan 1 Scan 2
AZIMUTH : 0 deg AZIMUTH : 180 deg
SCAN TIME : 2.0 sec SCAN TIME : 2.0 sec
THICKNESS : 1 mm THICKNESS : 1 mm
FOCUS : SMALL FOCUS : SMALL
KV : 120 kV KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA MA : 60 mA
(Others) : (defaults) (Others) : (defaults)
c. Remove the film pack.
d. Develop the film. Wait the required film development time described on the film pack.
6–16 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123

4. Check if the narrow exposure lies within the wider exposure, and the center lines of the two beams coincide within
0.5 mm (see illustration 6–4):
XF–XR
2 ≤ 0.5 mm –––> proceed to step 6.
XF–XR
2 > 0.5 mm –––> proceed to the next step 5.
Where XF: the front width not covered by the narrow beam
XR: the rear width not covered by the narrow beam
Illustration 6–4 Narrow and Wide Exposure
XR
TABLE GANTRY
XF
Measure XF–XR
2
Narrow Beam
(Tube at 180 deg. THETA) Wide Beam
(Tube at 0 deg. THETA)
6–17 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123

5. Adjust the tube Z–Axis position:
a. Rotate the Gantry (Tube) to the 12 o’clock (home) position.
b. Switch OFF the “Rotate” and “XG Power” switches.
c. Install the Dial Indicator onto the cable duct, using the Dial Indicator Attachment Tool. See illustration 6–5.
Illustration 6–5 Dial Indicator Attachment
Dial Indicator
Dial Indicator Attachment Tool
Dial Indicator
6–18 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123

d. For System with D3142T Tube:
i. Loosen the 4 mounting bolts. See Illustration 6–6.
ii. Locate the Adjustment Nuts for Z–Axis; note that there are two Z–Axis nuts for adjustment.
iii. Loosen the nut that faces the direction in which you want to shift the tube.
iv. Adjust the x–ray tube position by turning the adjustment nut by the amount instructed on the CRT screen.
See illustration 6–4; in this example, the tube should be shifted axially toward the Table to center the wide
beam over the narrow beam.
v. Tighten the nut previously loosened in step iii.
vi. Tighten the 4 mounting bolts. (Torque: 280 kg–cm)
vii. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.
viii. Return to step 2.
Illustration 6–6 X–ray Tube Positioning (For System with D3142T Tube)
Mounting Bolts
Adjustment
Nut for THETA
Adjustment
Nut for Z–Axis
Mounting Bolts
6–19 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123

For System with D3152T Tube:
i. Loosen the 4 Mounting Bolts and 2 Support Bolts.
ii. Adjust the x–ray tube position by turning the adjustment nut by the amount instructed on the CRT screen.
clockwise ;toward the Table(–)

counterclockwise ;away from the Table(+)
See illustration 6–4; in this example, the tube should be shifted axially toward the Table to center the wide
beam over the narrow beam.
iii. Tighten the 4 Mounting Bolts and 2 Support Bolts. (Torque: 280 kg–cm)
iv. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.
v. Return to step 2.
Mounting Bolts
Support Bolt
Mounting Bolts
Adjustment
Adjustment Nut for Z–Axis
Bolt for THETA
6–20 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
Plane of Rotation with Large Focus

6. Perform steps 2 and 3, but this time, with Large Focus.
7. Check if the narrow exposure lies within the wider exposure, and the center lines of the two beams coincide within
0.75 mm:
See Illustration 6–4.
XF–XR
2 ≤ 0.75 mm –––> proceed to step 8.
XF–XR
2 > 0.75 mm –––> adjust the tube position per step 5, and then go to step 6.
8. Proceed to Section 6-5, ‘Detector Beam–on–Window.’
6–21 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-4-2 POR for Twin System

The Filmless POR is performed for the Twin system.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Do not remove the bow–tie filter during POR for the Twin System.
1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.
b. Remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers.
2. Select Service –> Automated Alignment –> POR Alignment.
3. Click on OK to enter the POR program.
4. Click on Confirm to enter warm up scan sequence.
5. Click on Confirm in the Service Scan Window.

The warm up scans start, then air scans automatically start.
6. The tube travel appears on the screen. If the following message appears, you can complete the POR proce-
dures.
******************************* Displayed *******************************

Tube is Aligned within tolerance.
For Accuracy
Move Tube x.xxx mm (x.xxxx inch) FWD.
************************************************************************
6–22 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-4-2 POR for Twin System (Continued)

7. Adjust the tube Z–Axis position:
b. Switch OFF the “Rotate” and “XG Power” switches.
c. Install the Dial Indicator onto the cable duct, using the Dial Indicator Attachment Tool. See illustration 6–8.
Dial Indicator
Dial Indicator
6–23 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123

i. Loosen the 4 mounting bolts. See Illustration 6–9.
ii. Locate the Adjustment Nuts for Z–Axis; note that there are two Z–Axis nuts for adjustment.
Formula: x.xxxx mm / 0.75 = 1/xx turn of adjustment nut

Counterclockwise ;FWD, toward the Table
Clockwise ;BWD, away from the Table
Specification : less than 0.156 mm
viii. Return to step 2.
Mounting Bolts
Adjustment
Nut for THETA
Adjustment
Nut for Z–Axis
Mounting Bolts
6–24 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123

i. Loosen the 4 Mounting Bolts and 2 Support Bolts.

Clockwise ;FWD, toward the Table
Counterclockwise ;BWD, away from the Table
Specification : less than 0.156 mm
iii. Tighten the 4 Mounting Bolts and 2 Support Bolts. (Torque: 280 kg–cm)
iv. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.
v. Return to step 2.
Mounting Bolts
Support Bolt
Mounting Bolts
Adjustment
Adjustment Nut for Z–Axis
Bolt for THETA
6–25 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-5 DETECTOR BEAM–ON–WINDOW
6-5-1 BOW Except for Twin System

Note
For BOW for Twin System, refer to 6-5-2 BOW for Twin System.
To ensure that the entire width of the x–ray beam falls within the Detector window, follow this procedure for a Z–Axis
position check/adjustment of the Detector.
1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Plane of Rotation’ procedure.
b. Remove the Gantry front, rear, right side, and left maintenance covers.
c. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual)
d. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.
2. For System with D3142T Tube:

Check that the x–ray tube case is at 20 % or higher heat level:
If not, perform the following multi scan:
SCAN TIME : 3.0 sec

THICKNESS : 5 mm
KV : 80 kV
MA : 200 mA
INTERVAL : 0 mm
VOICE : OFF
SLICE: : 30
After the above scans are completed, the Gantry will not halt at the home position; push the reset switch on the
TGP Board to position the Gantry to the home position (x–ray tube at the 12 0’clock position).
6–26 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-5-1 BOW Except for Twin System (Continued)

3. Scan Polaroid films inserted into the film holders:
b. Insert a Polaroid film to the three film holders with the side marked “THIS SIDE TOWARD LENS” facing down
and the “INSERT THIS END” toward the Gantry when placed on the Detector. Make sure that the films are
fully inserted into the holders, otherwise you may lose part of the image. See Illustration 6–11.
Film Holders
Since the Z–Axis position of the Detector is adjusted on three locations (right, left, and center of the Detector),
three film holders are provided: two for the right and left ends of the Detector, and one for center.
c. Mount the three film holders with film onto the right and left ends and the center, of the Detector. When instal-
ling the center film holder, push it toward the Gantry until its center tab touches the center mounting support of
the Detector. See Illustrations 6–11.
d. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
Illustration 6–11 Film Holder Placement
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Film
ÁÁÁÁÁ Film
Film
6–27 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123

4. Ensure that the x–ray tube case is the following heat level, and then, perform a stationary scan on the films:
For System with D3142T Tube: 20% or higher heat level
For System with D3152T Tube: 10% or lower heat level
a. Select Service –> Off–Line Scan from the Data Analysis menu.
b. In this menu, perform the following stationary scan:
AZIMUTH : 0 deg
SCAN TIME : 2.0 sec
THICKNESS : 7 mm
FOCUS : Large
KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA
c. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.
d. Remove the film holders.
e. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.
f. Develop the film. Wait the required film development time described on the film pack.
g. Mark ‘Left’, ‘Right’, or ‘Center’ and ‘Table’ or ‘Gantry’ on the film as appropriate.
5. Examine the films for axial centering of the x–ray beam to the center line of the Detector window:
See Illustration 6–12. You should see both the top and bottom edges of x–ray. The edges should be well defined.
Illustration 6–12 Beam–on–Window Exposure

HC
H8
H1
Xw
Xw
Xc
LEFT CENTER RIGHT
Measure if the x–ray beam centering falls within the following values:
XW – H1 XW – H8 H1 – H8 XC – HC
2 < 1 mm 2 < 1 mm < 1 mm 2 < 1 mm
If these are not met, perform step 6.
If these are met, proceed to step 7.
6–28 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123

6. Adjust the Detector Z–Axis position:
a. Check that the Gantry is at the home position.
c. Remove the flexible cable cover. See Illustration 6–13.
d. Loosen the three locking screws (Allen cap head).
Illustration 6–13 Beam–on–Window Adjustment
Locking Screw
Z–Axis (Allen Head)
Flexible Cable Cover Detector
Adjustment Nut
Locking Screw
(Allen Head)
Z–Axis
Adjustment Nut
Detector
Support Plate Detector
Pin
Detector Detector
Support Plate
6–29 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123

e. Turn Z–Axis adjustment nut to shift the Detector along the Z–Axis according to below:
CW: away from the Table
CCW: toward the Table
One Turn: approximately 0.75mm shift.
Distance to be shifted: Distance measured in step 5, i.e.;
XW – H1
2 for right side
XW – H8
2 for left side
XC – HC
2 for center
f. Tighten the three locking screws.
g. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.
h. Return to step 2.
7. Proceed to ‘Gravity SAG’, or Section 6-8, ‘Iso Center Alignment.’
6–30 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-5-2 BOW for Twin System

To ensure that the entire width of the x–ray beam falls within the Detector window, follow this procedure for a Z–Axis
position check/adjustment of the Detector.
For Detector Z–axis alignment of TWIN system, high accuracy is required for geometric position between X–ray beam
and detector. Detector is aligned so that each detector channel (A–ch and B–ch) counts becoming same.
This Filmless Detector Z axis alignment require a scan to the user, and calculates ratio of counts between A side and B
side on 3 area, (left, center, right). The ratio is converted to tolerance of detector (mm) and displayed. The user move
detector and retry BOW.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Do not remove the bow–tie filter during BOW for the Twin System.
1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Plane of Rotation’ procedure.
c. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.
2. Select Service –> Automated Alignment –> BOW alignment.
3. Click on OK to enter the BOW program.
4. Click on Confirm to enter warm up scan sequence.

The warm up scans start, then air scans automatically start.
6. The detector travel appears on the screen. If the following message appears, you can complete the BOW proce-
dures.
******************************* Displayed *******************************

Detector is Aligned within tolerance.
************************************************************************
7. Adjust the Detector Z–Axis position:
a. Check that the Gantry is at the home position.
c. Remove the flexible cable cover. See Illustration 6–14.
d. Loosen the three locking screws (Allen cap head).
6–31 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-5-2 BOW for Twin System (Continued)
Illustration 6–14 Beam–on–Window Adjustment
Locking Screw
Z–Axis (Allen Head)
Flexible Cable Cover Detector Adjustment Nut
ËËËËËËËËËËËËË Z–Axis
Locking Screw
(Allen Head)
Adjustment Nut Detector
Support Plate Detector
Pin
Detector Detector
Support Plate
e. Adjust the Detector position by turning the adjustment nut(s) by the amount instructed on the CRT screen.

Counterclockwise ;FWD, toward the Table
Clockwise ;BWD, away from the Table
Specification : Detector Left, less than 0.072 mm

Detector Center, less than 0.076 mm
Detector Right, less than 0.072 mm
f. Tighten the three locking screws.
g. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.
h. Return to step 2.
8. Proceed to ‘Qcal Channel Ratio’ .
6–32 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-6 QCAL CHANNEL RATIO (FOR TWIN SYSTEM ONLY)

This calibration must be performed just after completion of Filmless BOW.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Do not remove the bow–tie filter during Q–cal Channel Ratio.
1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the BOW procedure.
2. Select Service –> Automated Alignment –> Qcal Channel Ratio.
3. Click on OK to enter the Qcal channel ratio program.

The scans start, then calibration automatically starts.
6–33 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-7 GRAVITY SAG

For the system with V/R 4.00 or later, Gravity Sag menu is added to the Service menu. This is a semi–automated
tool to shorten the calculation time.
6-7-1 G–SAG For HiSpeed ZX/i, NX/i, and NX/i Pro

Note
For NX/i, the system software must be at V/R 5.52 or later. For the NX/i system with V/R 5.51 or
lower, perform the following G–SAG procedure for DX/i, FX/i, and LX/i. For NX/i Pro and ZX/i, this
procedure can be performed independently of software version.
1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Detector Beam–on–Window’ procedure.
b. Remove the Gantry front and both side covers.
2. Select Gravity Sag, refer to below:
Service → Gravity sag
3. Within the ‘Gravity sag’ menu, click on Confirm and press the <Start scan> button to perform air scans automati-
cally.
4. After completing air scans, install the G–SAG pin:
b. Set the Service switch to ON on the SUB Board.
c. Rotate the Gantry manually in the CW direction until the x–ray tube is positioned at the bottom.
d. Set the Service switch to OFF.
e. Move the G–SAG pin into the position shown in Illustration 6–15.
f. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.
Illustration 6–15 Installing G–SAG Pin
(Original Position) (Moved)
SAG Pin
BOTTOM VIEW OF THE COLLIMATOR
6–34 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-7-1 G–SAG For HiSpeed ZX/i, NX/i, and NX/i Pro (Continued)
5. Click on Confirm and press the <Start scan> button to perform G–SAG PIN scans automatically.
G–SAG calculation is automatically performed and its result is displayed.
Verify that the following is displayed.
Gravity sag is in tolerance
6. If the gravity SAG data is out of specifications, verify that the detector mounting bolts and x–ray tube mounting
bolts are correctly torqued, and then perform this ‘Gravity SAG’ procedure again.
7. Replace the G–SAG pin:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.
b. Replace the G–SAG pin to the original position. See illustration 6–15.
c. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
8. Proceed to Section 6-8, ‘Iso Center Alignment’ if you performed the ‘Detector Beam–on–Window’ procedure
prior to this ‘Gravity SAG’ procedure; or you do not perform ‘Iso Center Alignment’ or ‘Filter Center Alignment’
(Section 6-9), perform the following:
b. Installed the bow–tie filter.
6-7-2 G–SAG For HiSpeed DX/i, FX/i, and LX/i

1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Detector Beam–on–Window’ procedure.
2. Select Tube ISO Alignment, refer to below:
Service → Automated Alignment → Tube ISO Alignment
3. Within the ‘Tube ISO Alignment’ menu, perform the air scan, following the instructions displayed on the CRT
screen.
6–35 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-7-2 G–SAG For HiSpeed DX/i, FX/i, and LX/i (Continued)

4. Install the G–SAG pin:
b. Set the Service switch to ON on the SUB Board.
c. Rotate the Gantry manually in the CW direction until the x–ray tube is positioned at the bottom.
d. Set the Service switch to OFF.
e. Move the G–SAG pin into the position shown in Illustration 6–16.
f. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.
Illustration 6–16 Installing G–SAG Pin
(Original Position) (Moved)
SAG Pin
BOTTOM VIEW OF THE COLLIMATOR
5. Perform the G–SAG pin scan, instead of the usual pin scan performed during ‘Tube ISO Alignment’, following
the instructions displayed on the CRT screen.
6. Observe the calculated MEAN file (gravity SAG data) using View Vector:
a. Select View Vector; refer to below:
Service → Generic System Analyzer (GSA) → Analysis →

View Vector
b. Select the vector file.
c. Click on [Plot].
d. Select ‘Auto Scale’, or, if appropriate, select ‘Manual Scale.’
e. Check the followings:
SAG.L : 0.45 or less
SAG.H : 0.4 or less (for Gantry 2200997–2, 2200999–2, 2201000–2, 2249696–2)

0.2 or less (Others)
6–36 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-7-2 G–SAG For HiSpeed DX/i, FX/i, and LX/i (Continued)
Illustration 6–17 Gravity SAG Curve
SAG. H
SAG. L
7. Replace the G–SAG pin:
b. Replace the G–SAG pin to the original position. See illustration 6–16.
8. If the gravity SAG data is out of specifications, verify that the detector mounting bolts and x–ray tube mounting
bolts are correctly torqued, and then perform this ‘Gravity SAG’ procedure again.
9. Proceed to Section 6-8, ‘Iso Center Alignment’ if you performed the ‘Detector Beam–on–Window’ procedure
prior to this ‘Gravity SAG’ procedure; or you do not perform ‘Iso Center Alignment’ or ‘Filter Center Alignment’
(Section 6-9), perform the following:
b. Installed the bow–tie filter.
6–37 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-8 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT

This ‘ISO Center Alignment’ aligns the x–ray tube focus to the FOV center and the Detector center channel.
Illustration 6–18 ISO Center Adjustment
Adjust
X–ray
Tube
Focus
Center of FOV
CH1
Detector
Center Channel:
396.75 ± 0.02 CH
Note
Within the ‘Automated Alignment’ menu (Service → Automated Alignment), you don not have to per-
form the following menus:
‘Tube Rough ISO Alignment’
‘Radial Alignment’
These are performed at the GEYMS factory only.
1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Detector Beam–on–Window’ or ‘Gravity
SAG’ procedure.
6–38 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-8 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT (continued)

2. Select Tube ISO Alignment, refer to below:
Service → Automated Alignment → Tube ISO Alignment
Perform air and pin scans, following the instructions displayed on the CRT screen.
Note
Attach a steel pin, approximately 6 mm in diameter, (ex. drill bit or phillips screw driver) to the
phantom holder at a position approximately 5 cm away from the scan axis center, as shown in
Illustration 6–19.
Illustration 6–19 Pin Scan
Center of
Scan Plane
Approx. 5cm
Off Center
Phantom Holder
6–39 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123

3. Check that the calculated Iso Center Channel data is within a specification.
If the MEAN value is out of specification (396.75 ± 0.02), perform the following step, then follow the instructions
displayed on the CRT screen.
Adjust the x–ray tube Theta (tangential) position:
b. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.
c. Install the Dial Indicator onto the cable duct, using the Dial Indicator Attachment Tool (see illustration 6–20).
i. Loosen the 4 mounting bolts (see illustration 6–6).
ii. Locate the Adjustment Nuts for THETA; note that there are two THETA nuts for adjustment.
System with D3142T System with D3152T (–) (+)

Tube Tube
clockwise move to the RIGHT move to the LEFT
counterclockwise move to the LEFT move to the RIGHT
i. Loosen the 4 Mounting Bolts and 2 Support Bolts (see illustration 6–7).
iii. Tighten the the 4 Mounting Bolts and 2 Support Bolts (Torque: 280 kg–cm).
e. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.
4. Proceed to Section 6-9, ‘Filter Center Alignment.’
6–40 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
Dial Indicator
Dial Indicator
6–41 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-9 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT

This ‘Filter Center Alignment’ aligns the filter to the x–ray tube and the Detector.
Illustration 6–21 Filter Center Alignment
X–ray (Fixed)
Tube
Focus
Center of Filter
Adjust
Filter
Ch1
Detector (Fixed)
Filter Center Ch.: 396.75 ± 0.3
VIEW FROM TABLE
1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Iso Center Alignment’ procedure.
6–42 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-9 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT (continued)

2. Select Bowtie Filter Alignment, refer to below:
Service → Automated Alignment → Bowtie Filter Alignment
Perform air and filter scans, following the instructions displayed on the CRT screen.
3. Check that the calculated Filter Center Channel data is within a specification:
If the AVERAGE value is out of specification (396.75 ± 0.3), perform the following step, then follow the instruc-
tions displayed on the CRT screen.
a. Adjust the filter Theta (tangential) position:
i. Rotate the Gantry (Tube) to the 12 o’clock (home) position.
ii. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.
iii. Install the Dial Indicator onto the aperture plate, using the Dial Indicator Attachment Tool (see illustration
6–23).
iv. Loosen the two bolts indicated in illustration 6–22.
v. Rotate the adjustment screw to shift the filter for the amount instructed on the CRT screen.
One turn ≈ 1 mm filter shift.
vi. Tighten the two bolts loosened in step iv.
4. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.
Illustration 6–22 Filter Center Adjustment
Loosen these Bolts

Adjustment
Screw
Collimator with Front Cover Removed
6–43 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-9 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT (continued)
Dial Indicator

Aperture Plate
Dial Indicator

Aperture Plate
6–44 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-10 RADIAL ALIGNMENT

Note
The radial alignment is rarely performed. Only when loosening the detector locking screw (see Il-
lustration 6–25), this must be performed.
Prerequisite
D Radial Alignment Tool : 2234059
1. Preparation:
c. Rotate the Gantry (Tube) to the 12 o’clock (home) position.
d. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual)
e. Remove the connector cover from the DAS assy.
f. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
2. Select Radial Alignment, refer to below:
Service → Automated Alignment → Radial Alignment
Perform air and tool scans, following the instructions displayed on the CRT screen.
(Attachment of the Radial Alignment Tool is as shown in illustration 6–24 (A).)
Repeat the above scans for the other tool attachment to obtain calculated Radial Alignment data.
(Attachment of the Radial Alignment Tool is as shown in illustration 6–24 (A’).)
Illustration 6–24 Radial Alignment Tool
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
A
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ Radial Align-
ment Tool
A’
6–45 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-10 RADIAL ALIGNMENT (continued)

3. Check that an average of the 2 calculated Radial Alignment data is within a specification.
If not, perform the following steps:
b. Remove the Radial Alignment tool.
c. Install a Dial Indicator on the side of the Detector using an attachment tool.
d. Loosen the three (x2) mounting screws and a locking screw.
e. Refer to the average value, rotate the Detector in the specified distance and direction.
f. Tighten the mounting screws and the locking screw.
g. Remove the Dial Indicator with attachment tool.
h. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
i. Repeat the Radial Alignment procedure, to verify the adjustment.
Illustration 6–25 Locking Screw and Mounting Screws
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
Mounting
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
Screws
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ Mounting
Screws
Locking Screw
Dial Indicator
Detector
Attachment Tool
6–46 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
6-10 RADIAL ALIGNMENT (continued)

4. Perform the following alignment:
D ISO Center Alignment
D Filter Center Alignment
6–47 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123
6–48 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
SECTION 7 – SYSTEM CALIBRATION
7-1 GENERAL
This ‘System Calibration’ describes the following check/calibrations/adjustment:
D CAM Amplifier Linearity Check (by performing x–ray exposures)
D Hilight Calibration; consisting of the following:

Q Calibration (Q–cal)
XT Calibration (XT–cal)
AV Calibration (AV–cal)
DG Calibration (DG–cal)
D Air and Phantom Calibrations
D CT Number Adjustment
The above calibrations and adjustment should be performed if any of the following replacements and/or system ad-
justments are performed since the last calibrations/adjustment.
‘CAM Amplifier Linearity Check’ may be performed before calibrations/adjustment.
D X–ray tube replacement
D Detector replacement
D DAS or CAM Board replacement
D Collimator or Filter replacement
D Plane of rotation alignment
D Detector beam–on–window alignment
D Iso center alignment.
D Filter center alignment
7–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123

The following table shows that which Hilight calibration (Q–cal, XT–cal, AV–cal, or DG–cal) should be performed for
the above occasions and also the calibration/adjustment order to be followed.
Calibra- Detector X–ray tube or Plane of DAS CAM Board For Twin
tion/Ad- replaced or Collimator or rotation or replaced replaced Only:
justment Detector Filter Iso center or #1 CAM
Order beam–on– replaced Filter center Board (at the
↓ window alignment per- right end)
alignment formed replaced
performed
1 Q–cal Chan- Q–cal Channel Q–cal Chan- – – Q–cal Chan-
nel Ratio Ratio nel Ratio nel Ratio
2 Q–cal Q–cal Q–cal DG–cal Air Cal Air Cal
3 XT–cal Air Cal Air Cal Air Cal Phantom Cal Phantom Cal
4 AV–cal Phantom Cal Phantom Cal Phantom Cal CT Number CT Number
Adjust Adjust
5 Air Cal CT Number Ad- CT Number CT Number – –
just Adjust Adjust
6 Phantom Cal – – – – –
7 CT Number – – – – –
Adjust.
Note: Q–cal channel Ratio is for the Twin system ONLY.
7–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
Required Phantoms
Use the following phantoms (furnished with each system) during system calibrations/adjustment.
Make sure they are clean and contrast–free.
Phantom For System with Single De- For System with Twin De-
tector tector
Water Phantom (25 cm) P9110LA/P9100LA 2221972
Polypropylene (PP) Phantom (42 cm) P9110LD/P9100LD 2221975
Quality Assurance Phantom (QA Phantom) P9100SG P9100SG
(See Illustration 7–1.)
Crosstalk Phantom (XT Phantom) 46–278221G1 2221977
(See Illustration 7–1.)
Illustration 7–1 QA Phantom and XT Phantom
QA Phantom XT Phantom
Diameter : 12.6 cm
(Polypropylene)
7–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
7-2 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY CHECK (X–RAYS)

Perform the following procedure to check that the non–linearity of the CAM Board amplifiers is within 0.1%.
1. Preparation:
b. Remove the gantry front cover.
c. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual.)
2. Perform two air stationary scans; one with 100 mA, the other with 200 mA:
a. Select Offline Scan; refer to below:
Service Menu → Offline Scan
b. Select Stationary from ‘Technic – [Scan Type]’.
c. Perform the following scans:
Scan 1 Scan 2
Azimuth : 0 deg. Azimuth : 0 deg.
Scan Time : 1 or 2 sec Scan Time : 1 or 2 sec
(Select the shortest one available. The selection in Scan 1 must be used also in Scan 2.)
Thickness : 10 mm Thickness : 10 mm
Focus : Large Focus : Large
KV : 120 kV KV : 120 kV
MA : 100 mA (40 mA )*1 MA : 200 mA (80 mA)*1
*1 : For Gantry 2200997–2, 2200999–2, 2201000–2, 2249696–2
3. Store the following vector files (mean files) 1 and 2 out of the acquired raw data, by repeating the steps below.
Raw Data File Raw Data File No. to be Se- Mean Vector No. File Comment
lected
(100 or 40 mA Scan) Exam#1, Series#1, Acq No: 1 1 100 (or 40)mA Ach
(200 or 80 mA Scan) Exam#2, Series#1, Acq No: 1 2 200 (or 80)mA Ach
Note: “Ach” described in File Comment means A channel for the Twin system ONLY. “Bch” should be
commented when testing B channel.
7–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
7-2 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY CHECK (X–RAYS) (continued)

a. Select Format Raw Data; refer to below:
Service Menu → Generic System Analyzer (GSA) → Format Raw Data
b. For Twin ONLY:

Select A side. (A channel)
c. Select the raw data file (Exam#1, Series#1, Acq No: 1) from the Raw data browser lists.
d. Perform Fan Data with the following settings, then click on OK:
Offset File Correction Yes

Reference Correction Yes
Natural Log Conversion No
e. Select Active Mean as “Select Type of Data:”.
f. Click on Store to File.
g. Enter 1 as “Mean Vector Number” and 100 (or 40)mA Ach as “File Comment”, then click on OK.
h. Click on Select RawID... to return to the Fan Data Format screen, and repeat steps c to g to make Vector files
2.
4. Apply a division to the vector files No.1 and No.2:
a. Select Vect/Vect. Op; refer to below:
Service Menu → Generic System Analyzer (GSA) → Analysis →

Calculations → Vect/Vect. Op
b. Select A/B from ‘Select Operation.’
c. Select MeanFile 1 as as Vect Data File A.
Select MeanFile 2 as as Vect Data File B.
d. Enter 3 as “Output Vector Number” and 100/200 (or 40/80) mA Ach as “Comment”, then click on OK.
5. Check the calculated vector file No.3 using View Vector:

View Vector
b. Select MeanFile 3– 100/200mA (or 40/80mA) Ach as “Select SupMean File:”.
c. Click on [Plot].
7–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
7-2 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY CHECK (X–RAYS) (continued)

d. Select ‘Manual Scale.’
Enter 0.99 for Data Min.
Enter 1.01 for Data Max. (Change this, if necessary)
Click on OK.
A graph is drawn, as is shown in Illustration 7–2.
Check that the non–linearity (shown as “E” in the illustration) is less than 0.001 (0.1 %). In the illustration, “A”
and “B” indicate the average values of approximately 10 channels each. The difference between “B” and “A”
(= “E”) shows the magnitude of the non–linearity of the amplifiers.
6. For Twin ONLY:

Repeat steps 3 to 5 for B Side (B channel).
Illustration 7–2 Non–linearity at Amplification Change
1.005 B 10 channels
E
10 channels
0.995
7–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
7-3 HILIGHT CALIBRATION
7-3-1 General
This Hilight calibration should be performed prior to the air and phantom calibrations; and the air and phantom calibra-
tions should be performed if once the Hilight calibration is performed.
The x–ray tube must be sufficiently cool (the tube case temperature must be below 10 % heat level).
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARDS! SOME HILIGHT CALIBRATIONS ROTATE THE GANTRY (SEE THE
TABLE BELOW). WHEN HILIGHT CALIBRATION IS PERFORMED WITHOUT THE GANTRY
COVERS INSTALLED, ALWAYS MAKE SURE THAT NO PERSON IS IN THE SCAN ROOM.
Hilight Calibration Does gantry rotate?

Q–CAL Yes (The Gantry rotates during warm–up sequence,
but stops during data acquisition sequence.)
XT–CAL Yes
AV–CAL No
DG–CAL Yes (The Gantry rotates during warm–up sequence,
but stops during data acquisition sequence.)
7–7 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
7-3-2 Q Calibration
The focus position of the x–ray tube shifts with temperature change. It will consequently shift the x–ray beam position
along the Z–axis. In this calibration, the following scans are automatically performed:
D four scans (Thickness: 1, 3, 5, and 10 mm) (when the x–ray tube is cold)
D warm–up scans
D four scans (Thickness: 1, 3, 5, and 10 mm) (when the x–ray tube is hot)
This calibration takes approximately 10 minutes.
1. Preparation:
Note
The bow–tie filter must be removed during Q calibration for both single and Twin detector system.
2. For System with D3152T Tube:

Ensure that the x–ray tube case is at 10% or lower heat level.
3. Select Q–CAL; refer to below:
Service Menu → Service Calibration → Q–CAL
4. Follow the procedure that appears on the CRT screen.
7-3-3 XT Calibration
The Lumex crystals of the detector cells generate light when they are hit by x–rays. Since the crystals are placed close
to the crystals of the adjacent channels, the light from one channel can interfere with adjacent channels, causing
crosstalk noise. This procedure creates a calibration file to compensate this interference.
1. Preparation:
7–8 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
7-3-3 XT Calibration (continued)

2. Select XT–CAL; refer to below:
Service Menu → Service Calibration → XT–CAL
3. Perform air scans, following the instructions displayed on the CRT screen.
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARDS! WHEN YOU PRESS THE ‘POSN LIGHT’ BUTTONS (LARGE BUTTON
AND SMALL BUTTON), THE GANTRY QUICKLY ROTATES TO THE 0_ POSITION. IF IT IS
NECESSARY TO PLACE ANY PART OF YOUR BODY INSIDE OR NEAR THE GANTRY, SWITCH
OFF THE ‘SCAN’ SWITCH FIRST.
4. Position the XT phantom at the (scan center + 180 mm) height:
a. Install the XT phantom to the phantom holder.
b. Shift the phantom to the up–limit, using the up–down adjuster.
c. Position the phantom at the scan center; align the positioning lights and a cross marked on the phantom sur-
face.
d. Hold down the [Height] button to display the current height (ex. ‘–198’), and press the [Up] button to raise the
Table by 180 mm (ex. Until the Display reads ‘–018’).
If the Table can not be raised to the specified height due to the interlock function, switch ON (up) the T3 Table
dip switch on the TGP Board to disable the interlock function, and continue to raise the Table. In this case, be
careful not to have the Table collide against anything.
e. Select [Confirm] on the screen.
Illustration 7–3 XT Phantom Centering
Do not position this area to the lights
Positioning
Lights
Up/Down Adjuster
7–9 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
7-3-3 XT Calibration (continued)

5. Follow the instructions that appear on the CRT screen.
6. Switch OFF the T3 Table dip switch (if it is set to ON) on the TGP Board.
NOTICE
Do not forget to switch OFF the T3 Table dip switch (if it is set to ON), otherwise there will
be collision hazard, since the interlock function does not work, if T3 is set to ON.
7-3-4 AV Calibration
The light emission of the Lumex Crystal persists after the x–ray radiation stops. This phenomenon is called ‘After
Glow.’ This procedure creates a file called After Glow Vector, used to compensate the After Glow.
1. Preparation:
2. Select AV–CAL; refer to below:
Service Menu → Service Calibration → AV–CAL
7–10 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
7-3-5 DG Calibration
If some scans are performed with the same conditions but with different scan times, the CT numbers may not be the
same for these scans. This is due to CAM Board gain changes caused by different scan times. The DG calibration
reduces the CT number changes.
1. Preparation:
2. Select DG–CAL; refer to below:
Service Menu → Service Calibration → DG–CAL
7–11 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
7-4 AIR AND PHANTOM CALIBRATIONS
Precondition
D The bow–tie filter should be installed.
1. Select Service Adjustment from the Service menu.
2. Select Service Calibration from the Service Adjustment.
3. Select Auto Sequence 1 (Air Cal → Phantom Cal) from the Service Calibration menu.
4. Select [Confirm] on the screen to select all the calibration stations.
5. Follow the instructions displayed on the CRT screen.
6. Proceed to the ‘CT Number Adjustment’ procedure.
7–12 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 25 2202123
7-5 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT

Perform this <CT Number Adjustment> after completing the air and phantom calibrations.
In addition, if you have any doubt whether the CT numbers of the phantom are good or not, perform the CT Number
Adjustment. This adjustment modifies the CT numbers of the 25 cm and 50 cm CAL files until water has a CT number
equal to zero and air has a CT number equal to –1000.
It takes approximately 30 minutes to complete this adjustment.
Note
The CT# of water will change according to its temperature by a factor of –0.4/_C.
1. Select Service –> CT Number Adjustment

(Select all kV.)
Note
If you do not click on Confirm in the scan confirm screen within 15 minutes, Time–out occurs.
3. Verify that the water CT # and air CT # equal 0 ±3 and –1000 ±5 respectively.
Note
For the Twin System only, the followings are displayed in the result screen.
A: A channel, B: B channel, F: Fused scan (for the system with asymmetric scan option installed only)
Note
For the system with the asymmetric option only, the CT # value displayed is the original one. Note
that the updated data is NOT displayed.
7–13 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123
7–14 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 28 2202123
SECTION 8 – IMAGE PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION
8-1 GENERAL
This ‘Image Performance Verification’ contains tables of scan techniques and specifications for evaluating image
performance.
Sample Image
The system contains the MOD that includes the images saved before shipment from the manufacturer as sample
data. (The calibration data are also included in the same MOD.)
You can use these images as a reference when you perform image troubleshooting.
To restore the image to the system:

Restore the Patient image to the system. Refer to the Operator manual. (Image Works –> Archive –> Restore –>
Selection –> All examination –> Restore –> Restore examination –> OK)
General Requirements
Perform the following before continuing:
1. Verify that system calibration (Hilight calibration, air and phantom calibrations, and CT Number Adjustment) has
been completed.
All image performance scans must use calibration data that are less than eight hours old.
2. Warm up the system at least two hours (minimum) prior to data collection.
Required Phantoms
Use the following phantoms (furnished with each system) during image performance verification.
Make sure they are clean and contrast–free.
D Water Phantom (25 cm)
D Polypropylene (PP) Phantom (42 cm)
D Quality Assurance (QA) Phantom
8–1 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 28 2202123
8-2 IMAGE PERFORMANCE

1. Acquire the scans listed in Table 8–1, 8–2, 8–3 or 8–4.
Select ‘Abdomen,’ or any anatomy of interest for ‘Infant.’
The phantoms to be scanned should be centered.
2. For each slice, verify the following:
D Visually check each image for rings, bands, streaks, shadings or artifacts near the image center.
D Position a circular ROI at the locations listed below (see also Illustration 8–1) and write down the data on
Table 8–1, 8–2, 8–3 or 8–4.
Mc – Mean CT number of a center ROI.
SD – Standard deviation of a center ROI.
Mo – Mean CT number of a ROI 10 cm off center (Y = 0).
D The following ROI sizes (area) are used to measure ROI data.
FOV ROI AREA

25 cm 674.11 mm2
50 cm 2696.45 mm2
To display a ROI data;

a. Position a cursor (here, a circle cursor).
b. Press the [ROI] key.
Verify that the data falls within the specifications shown in Table 8–1, 8–2, 8–3 or 8–4.
Note
The CT# of water will change according to its temperature by a factor of –0.4/_C.
High Contrast Spatial Resolution and Artifact Check Using QA (Quality Assurance) Phantom
3. The 1.0 mm pattern (see Illustration 8–2) must be clearly visible by the following techniques:
Kind of Scan FOV (cm) KV Time (sec) mA THK (mm) Interval (mm)
Axial Head 25 120 2.0 150 10 –
Helical Head 25 120 2.0 150 10 10
Axial Body 50 120 1.5 130 10 –
Helical Body 50 120 1.5 130 10 10
Check if any artifact is observed on the image or not.
8–2 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 28 2202123
8-2 IMAGE PERFORMANCE (continued)
Illustration 8–1 ROI Locations
+Y ROI Circle
(Area of 674.11 mm2 or 2696.45 mm2)
Image
–X +X
Mc (0.0 cm)
Mo (10.0 cm)
SD (0.0 cm)
–Y
Illustration 8–2 QA Phantom
1.0 mm Pattern
8–3 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 28 2202123
8-3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

The 46–241852G1 Quality Assurance (QA) Phantom is used by both the customers and service people to assess
image quality in accordance with BRH requirements (21CFR, Section 1030 33). Use of this phantom is described in
the Operator’s Manual.
The operator’s manual instructs customers to perform QA checks on a daily basis. Service persons, however, shall
perform QA checks after any of the following events has occurred:
D System installation
D X–ray tube replacement
D Detector replacement
D Periodic maintenance.
Note
The service person shall complete all of the procedures in the Operator’s Manual.
8–4 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 28 2202123
Table 8–1 Image Performance Check ( For Systems with Gantry 2200997, 2200997–2, 2200999, 2200999–2, 2201000, 2201000–2
2249696 or 2249696–2 ) (BS1 or 2, LXi, FXi, DXi)
PTM FOV*1 KV TIME*2 MA*3 THK SPECIFICATION DATA Description

(cm) (sec) (mm) A *5 B*6
MC SD MO MC SD MO MC SD MO
42 cm PP Large 120 1 250 10 M10 ≤ 15.2 – M10 ≤ 15.2 – – –120 ≤ M10 ≤ –100
42 cm PP Large 120 0.8 300 10 M10 ± 2 ≤ 15.6 – M10 ± 2 ≤ 15.6 – –
25 cm WTR Large 120 1 250 10 0±3 ≤ 5.4 XC ± 3 0±3 ≤ 4.5 XC ± 3
25 cm WTR Small 120 0.8 300 10 0±2 ≤ 5.4 XC ± 2 0±2 ≤ 4.5 XC ± 2
25 cm WTR Small 120 1 300 7 0±2 ≤ 6.0 – 0±2 ≤ 5.0 – –
25 cm WTR Small 120 1 300 5 0±2 ≤ 7.2 _ 0±2 ≤ 6.0 _ –
25 cm WTR Small 120 1.5 300 3 0±2 ≤ 7.7 _ 0±2 ≤ 6.4 _ –
25 cm WTR Small 120 2 200 2 0±3 ≤ 9.9 _ 0±3 ≤ 8.2 _ –
25 cm WTR Small 120 3 200 1 0±3 ≤ 10.8 _ 0±3 ≤ 9.0 _ –
25 cm WTR Small 120 2 300 10 – – _ 0±2 – _ –
25 cm WTR Small 120 2 250 10 – – _ 0±2 – _ –
25 cm WTR Small 120 2 200 10 0±2 ≤ 4.2 _ 0±2 ≤ 3.5 _ –
25 cm WTR Small 120 2 160 10 – – _ 0±2 – _ –
8–5 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 28 2202123
Table 8–1 Image Performance Check ( For Systems with Gantry 2200997, 2200997–2, 2200999, 2200999–2, 2201000, 2201000–2
2249696, or 2249696–2 ) (BS1 or 2, LXi, FXi, DXi) (continued)
PTM FOV KV TIME MA THK SPECIFICATION DATA Description

(cm) (sec) (mm) A *5 B *6
MC SD MO MC SD MO MC SD MO
25 cm WTR Small 120 2 130 10 – – _ 0±2 – _ – –
25 cm WTR Small 120 2 100 10 0±2 – _ 0±2 – _ – –
25 cm WTR Small 120 2 80 10 – – _ 0±2 – _ – –
25 cm WTR Small 120 2 60 10 0±2 ≤ 8.4 _ 0±2 ≤ 7.0 _ –
25 cm WTR Small 140 2 250 10 0±2 ≤ 3.5 _ 0±2 ≤ 2.5 _ –

(200)*5
25 cm WTR Small 80 2 300 10 0±2 – _ 0±2 – _ – –
25 cm WTR Small 120 1 80 10 M101∼ _ _ M101∼ _ _ – – Perform 30 slices/30 sec scan.

M130 M130 M101 = 0 ± 2, M102 ~ M130 = M101 ± 2
25 cm WTR Small 120 1 40 10 _ _ _ _ _ _ – – – Perform 120 slices/120 sec scan.

(See Note 4)
Smudge or band artifact might be ob-
served around the image center; regard
these as normal.
*1: Large: 50 cm or 45.5 cm Small: 25 cm

*2: 0.8 sec: for systems where 0.8 sec scan is available only.
*3: 300 mA: for systems where the maximum MA available is 300 mA only.
*4: For systems which have a 120 continuous scan capability only.
*5 For Gantry 2200997–2, 2200999–2, 2201000–2, 2249696–2 only.
*6 For Gantry 2200997, 2200999, 2201000, 2249696 only.
8–6 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 28 2202123
Table 8–2 Image Performance Check ( For Systems with Gantry 2247002 or 2247002–3 ) (ZXi)
(cm) (sec) (mm) MC SD Md MC SD Md
42cm PP Large 120 0.7 90 10 –110<Mc<–90 – – – –
42cm PP Large 120 1 90 7 Mc ± 3 – – – –
42cm PP Large 120 1 120 5 Mc ± 3 – – – –
42cm PP Large 120 1 200 3 Mc ± 3 – – – –
42cm PP Large 120 1 200 2 Mc ± 5 – – – –
42cm PP Large 120 1 200 1 –1 ≤ Mc ≤ +9 – – – –
25cm WTR Large 120 1 250 10 0±3 < 4.5 Mc ± 3 Note 1
25cm WTR Small 120 1 250 10 0±3 <3 Mc ± 2 Note 2
25cm WTR Large 120 1 10 10 – < 30 – – –
25cm WTR Small 120 1 10 10 – < 20 – – –
25cm WTR Small 120 0.7 380 10 0±2 < 4.5 – –
25cm WTR Small 120 1 380 7 0±2 < 4.5 – –
25cm WTR Small 120 1.5 350 5 0±2 < 4.5 – –
25cm WTR Small 120 2 440 3 0±2 < 4.5 – –
25cm WTR Small 120 2 150 2 0±3 <9 – –
25cm WTR Small 120 3 200 1 0±3 <9 – –
25cm WTR Large 140 1 160 10 0±2 <8 – –
25cm WTR Small 140 1 40 10 0±2 <9 – –
Note 1 : Md ROI Location (X . Y cm) = (9 . 0 cm)

8–7 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 28 2202123
Table 8–2 Image Performance Check ( For Systems with Gantry 2247002 or 2247002–3 ) (ZXi) (continued)
42cm PP Large 120 1 200 5 – – – – – – Note 3
42cm PP Large 120 1 60 10 – – – – – – Note 4
Resolution Small 120 1.5 130 10 – – – – – – Note 5
QA Small 120 1 230 10 – <3 – – –
QA Small 120 1 230 10 – <3 – – –
Note 3 : Perform 30 slices/30 sec scan.

Smudge or band artifact is not on the image.
Note 4 : For systems which have a 120 continuous scan capability only.
Note 5 : Confirm 1mm slit.
8–8 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 28 2202123
Table 8–3 Image Performance Check ( For Systems with Gantry 2246999, 2246999–3, 2247000, 2247000–3, 2247001, 2247001–3,
2247799 , or 2247799–3 ) (BS3, LXi, FXi, DXi)
42cm PP Large 120 0.8 80 10 –110<Mc<–90 – – – –
42cm PP Large 120 1 90 7 Mc ± 3 – – – –
42cm PP Large 120 1 120 5 Mc ± 3 – – – –
42cm PP Large 120 1 200 3 Mc ± 3 – – – –
42cm PP Large 120 1 200 2 Mc ± 5 – – – –
42cm PP Large 120 1 200 1 –1 ≤ Mc ≤ +9 – – – –
25cm WTR Large 120 1 250 10 0±3 < 3.1 Mc ± 3 Note 1
25cm WTR Small 120 1 250 10 0±3 < 4.9 Mc ± 2 Note 2
25cm WTR Large 120 1 10 10 – < 17.8 – – –
25cm WTR Small 120 1 10 10 – < 32 – – –
25cm WTR Small 120 0.8 260 10 0±2 < 5.4 – –
25cm WTR Small 120 1 300 7 0±2 < 5.4 – –
25cm WTR Small 120 1.5 280 5 0±2 < 5.4 – –
25cm WTR Small 120 2 350 3 0±2 < 5.4 – –
25cm WTR Small 120 2 150 2 0±3 < 10.5 – –
25cm WTR Small 120 3 200 1 0±3 < 11.3 – –
25cm WTR Large 140 1 160 10 0±2 < 3.7 – –
25cm WTR Small 140 1 40 10 0±2 < 10.3 – –

8–9 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 28 2202123
Table 8–3 Image Performance Check ( For Systems with Gantry 2246999, 2246999–3, 2247000, 2247000–3, 2247001, 2247001–3,
2247799 or 2247799–3 ) (BS3, LXi, FXi, DXi) (continued)
42cm PP Large 120 1 200 5 – – – – – – Note 3
42cm PP Large 120 1 60 10 – – – – – – Note 4
Resolution Small 120 1.5 130 10 – – – – – – Note 5
QA Small 120 1 230 10 – < 3.3 – – –
QA Small 120 1 230 10 – < 3.3 – – –
Note 3 : Perform 30 slices/30 sec scan.

Smudge or band artifact is not on the image.
Note 4 : For systems which have a 120 continuous scan capability only.
Note 5 : Confirm 1mm slit.
8–10 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 28 2202123
Table 8–4 Image Performance Check ( For Systems with Gantry 2247010, 2247010–x, 2249696, or 2249696–x ) (NX/i, NX/i Pro)
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Perform continuously two scans, then use the second data for this check.
PTM FOV*1 KV TIME MA*2 THK Mode SPECIFICATION DATA Description

(cm) (sec) (mm) 1i mode 2i mode
A B |Del- SD ratio
ta(A–B)| (A/B)
MC SD MC SD MC SD MC SD
42 cm PP Large 120 1 250 10 2i – – – – – – – – No Rings/

Bands
42 cm PP Large 120 1 250 10 1i – – – – checked visu-
ally
42 cm PP Large 120 1 160 1 2i – – – – – – – –
25 cm WTR Large 120 1 250 10 2i 0±2 ≤ 3.1 0±2 ≤ 3.1 5 1 ± 0.1
25 cm WTR Large 120 1 250 10 1i 0±2 ≤ 3.1

25 cm WTR Large 120 1 250 7 2i 0±2 ≤ 3.7 0±2 ≤ 3.7 5 1 ± 0.1
25 cm WTR Large 140 1 160 10 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –
25 cm WTR Large 80 3 250 10 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –
25 cm WTR Large 140 1 160 7 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –
25 cm WTR Large 80 3 250 7 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –
25 cm WTR Small 120 1 250 10 2i 0±2 ≤ 4.9 0±2 ≤ 4.9 5 1 ± 0.1
25 cm WTR Small 120 1 250 10 1i 0±2 ≤ 4.9

25 cm WTR Large 120 1 60 10 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –
25 cm WTR Large 120 1 90 7 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –
25 cm WTR Large 120 1 120 5 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –
25 cm WTR Large 120 1 200 3 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –
8–11 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 28 2202123
Table 8–4 Image Performance Check ( For Systems with Gantry 2247010, 2247010–x, 2249696, or 2249696–x ) (NX/i, NX/i Pro)
PTM FOV*1 KV TIME MA*2 THK Mode SPECIFICATION DATA Description

(cm) (sec) (mm) 1i mode 2i mode
A B |Del- SD ratio
ta(A–B)| (A/B)
MC SD MC SD MC SD MC SD
25 cm WTR Large 120 1 300 2 2i 0±3 – 0±3 – 5 – –
25 cm WTR Large 120 1 200 1 2i 0±3 – 0±3 – 5 – –
25 cm WTR Small 120 1 60 10 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –
25 cm WTR Small 120 1 90 7 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –
25 cm WTR Small 120 1 120 5 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –
25 cm WTR Small 120 1 200 3 2i 0±2 – 0±2 – 5 – –
25 cm WTR Small 120 1 300 2 2i 0±3 – 0±3 – 5 – –
25 cm WTR Small 120 1 200 1 2i 0±3 – 0±3 – 5 – –
25 cm WTR Large 140 1 60 10 1i 0±2 –
25 cm WTR Large 140 1 100 6 1i 0±2 –
25 cm WTR Large 140 1 150 4 1i 0±2 –
25 cm WTR Large 140 1 300 2 1i 0±3 –
25 cm WTR Small 140 1 60 10 1i 0±2 –
25 cm WTR Small 140 1 100 6 1i 0±2 –
25 cm WTR Small 140 1 150 4 1i 0±2 –
25 cm WTR Small 140 1 300 2 1i 0±3 –
*1: Large: 50 cm or 45.5 cm Small: 25 cm

*2: 300 mA: for systems where the maximum MA available is 300 mA only.
8–12 SYSTEM
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
OPERATOR CONSOLE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – OC COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 DC POWER SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1-3 CRT MONITOR CONTROLS AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
1-3-1 General Procedures for Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
1-3-2 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
1-4 CLAMP LIMIT SWITCH (FOR MOBILE SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11
SECTION 2 – OC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 OC POWER–UP SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 MONITOR FUNCTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2-3 KEYBOARD FUNCTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2-4 AUDIO FUNCTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2-5 MISC TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
2-6 WORKSTATION DEFAULT TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
i OPERATOR CONSOLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123
ii OPERATOR CONSOLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
SECTION 1 – OC COMPONENTS
WARNING
1-1 DC POWER SUPPLIES

The Operator Console contains two power supplies: +12V, –12V and +5V.
1. Switch OFF the Operator Console.
2. Remove the OC front and EMC covers.
3. Swing out the speaker panel assy, to access the OC power supplies (see illustration 1–1).
Ground Connection
If this is the first time to check the OC power supplies after system installation, preform this ‘Ground Connection’
check.
4. Check the ground connection of the power supplies as follows (see illustration 1–1):
Note
When you adjust power supply potentiometers, slowly turn them; otherwise, power supply built–in
protector will shou themselves down. If this happens, switch OFF the Operator Console, wait approx-
imately three minutes, and switch ON the Console.
a. Connect a digital multimeter between the OC ground stud and ground (FG Ground) on one power supply.
(Multimeter: resistance measure mode)
b. Verify that the resistance reads less than 0.2 ohms. If resistance exceeds the above value, tighten, clean or
re–crimp connections, and measure again.
c. Perform the above check on the other power supply.
1–1 OPERATOR CONSOLE

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
1-1 DC POWER SUPPLIES (continued)
Illustration 1–1 OC DC Power Supplies
+5V Power
Supply
+12V Power
Supply
Front Cover
EMC Cover
–12 V Power NAA Assy
Supply
Speaker Panel Assy

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
Voltage Check
5. Check the output of the +5 VDC power supply as follows:
a. Switch ON the Operator Console
b. Connect a digital multimeter at the terminal strip (J18) on the NPSC assy (Multimeter: voltage measure mode)
(see illustration 1–2).
c. Measure the voltage and check that it is within +4.90 VDC ∼ +5.10 VDC. If it falls outside these limits, adjust it
by turning the potentiometer (see illustration 1–1).
d. Connect an oscilloscope to the dame points as above.
e. Observe the voltage and check that the ripple is less than 200mVp–p. If it falls outside this range, replace the
power supply.
6. Check the output of the +12 VDC power supply as follows:
a. Connect a digital multimeter at the terminal strip (J19) on the NPSC assy (Multimeter: voltage measure mode)
b. Measure the voltage and check that it is within +11.76 VDC ∼ +12.24 VDC. If it falls outside these limits, adjust
it by turning the potentiometer (see illustration 1–1).
c. Connect an oscilloscope to the dame points as above.
d. Observe the voltage and check that the ripple is less than 100mVp–p. If it falls outside this range, replace the
power supply.
7. Check the output of the –12 VDC power supply as follows:
a. Connect a digital multimeter at the terminal strip (J20) on the NPSC assy (Multimeter: voltage measure mode)
b. Measure the voltage and check that it is within –11.76 VDC ∼ –12.24 VDC. If it falls outside these limits, adjust
it by turning the potentiometer (see illustration 1–1).
c. Connect an oscilloscope to the dame points as above.
d. Observe the voltage and check that the ripple is less than 100mVp–p. If it falls outside this range, replace the
power supply.

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
Illustration 1–2 Measure Point for DC Power Supplies
SCSI bay
NPSC Assy
J18 J19 J20

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
1-2 FANS
1. Turn OFF the OC main power.
2. Remove the following covers:
D OC Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four(4) Screws

D EMC Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four(4) Screws
D Rear Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four(4) Screws
3. Using a flashlight, or by feeling for the proper airflow, check that the FAN is operating normally.
If any fan is defective, replace the unit.
Illustration 1–3 OC Fan Locations
Power Supply
FAN
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ FANs
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
Nest Assy
FANs
FANs

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
1-3 CRT MONITOR CONTROLS AND SWITCHES

This section describes how to adjust the monitor. For other adjustments (listed below) without description in this sec-
tion, refer to Installation Procedure, Section 1, Monitor Set–Up.
Item Reference Manual

Installation Functional Check / Adjustment
(this manual)
Contrast x
Brightness x
Manual Degaussing x
Memory Recall x
H. Position x
H. Size x
V. Position x
V. Size x
V. Pincushion x
Trapezoidal x
Parallelogram x
Rotation x
Color Temp x
User Color x
Disp. Freq x
Video Input Level x
Input Select x
H. Moire Reduction x
V. Moire Reduction x
Language selection x
1-3-1 General Procedures for Setup

For usage of adjustment menu, refer to Installation Procedure, Section 4, Monitor Set–Up.

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
1-3 CRT Monitor Controls and Switches (Continued)
1-3-2 Adjustment
The adjustment items are represented by icon. (Refer to Illustration 1–4.)
Illustration 1–4 Setup Menu
MENU DISPLAYED
User Color
The white in the video image can be adjusted to the user’s preferred color.
Note
Memory recall of the user’s color is not possible. So, record initial setting before starting adjustment.
1. Press 1 button on the front panel of the monitor to display setup menu.
2. Move the Cursor to “User color” icon.
3. Press 2 button to enter adjustment menu.
4. Press 2 button to select R (red), G (green), or B (blue).
5. Using or button, adjust color as desired.
6. Press 1 button twice to register value and exit from the menu.

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
Video Input Level

The video input signal level can be matched to the computer being used.
2. Move the Cursor to “Video Input Level” icon.
4. Press 2 button to select either 1 V or 0.7V.
Input Select
The Input signal port can be selected.
Note
When power management is in effect on either port A or port B, the input cannot be switched from
one to the other. Release power management before switching terminal selection.
2. Move the Cursor to “Input Select” icon.
4. Press 2 button to select either the rear panel input terminal port A (Mini D–sub type) or port B (BNC type).

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
H. Moire Reduction
NOTICE
If moire reduction is overcorrected, the picture quality (for improper focus, improper vertical
line stability, etc.) will sometimes be affected. Keep this adjustment within the range in which
the picture quality is not affected.
Moire pattern are caused by interference of the CRT dot pitch and video signal due to the resolution of the input signal,
video pattern, etc., producing patterns of horizontal stripes (Horizontal moire pattern) or vertical stripes (Vertical moire
pattern).
2. Move the Cursor to “H. Moire Reduction” icon.
4. Press 2 button to switch ON the moire correction circuit. (Toggle button)
5. Using or button, adjust so that the striped moire pattern is in optimum condition.
button decreases the amount of adjustment.
button increases the amount of adjustment.
V. Moire Reduction
Refer to H. Moire Reduction procedure described above.
Language Selection
The language of the On–screen display can be selected from among German, French, English, Italian, and Spanish
(Japanese is not available).
2. Move the Cursor to “Language Selection” icon.
4. Using or button, select language as desired.

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
Resetting to Factory Preset Level

To reset all of the monitor adjustment to factory preset levels:
1. Press 1 button.
2. Move the Cursor to (Memory Recall).
3. Press 2 button to enter factory preset menu.
4. Press 1 button (YES) to reset the settings to the factory preset level.
Note
If there are no operations performed for approx. 30 seconds, the screen goes off without resetting
data.
5. Press 1 button to exit from setup menu.
If the image has irregular colors:

Use MANUAL DEGAUSSING to reduce the irregular colors in the image if irregular colors are dis-
played in the image after moving the monitor or changing the monitor angle.
a. Press 1 button.
b. Move the Cursor to (Manual Degaussing).
c. Press 2 button to execute this function.
d. Press 1 button to exit from the setup menu.

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
1-4 CLAMP LIMIT SWITCH (FOR MOBILE SYSTEM)

1. Pull the Lock Lever up to release the OC lock.
2. Unscrew the two screws, and remove the OC Lock Switch Cover.
3. Verify that the Clamp Limit Switch is the following state:
Illustration 1–5 Clamp Limit Switch
Lock Unlock Lock Lever

Plunger
Plunger
If not, adjust the Limit Switch position by moving the Switch Base.
Illustration 1–6 Switch Base
Screws(x2)
Switch Base Limit Switch

CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
SECTION 2 – OC OPERATION
WARNING
2-1 OC POWER–UP SEQUENCE

The processor of the Operator Console starts with a power–on self test right after powered on, as follows:
D System disk test
D CD–ROM test
D MOD Driver test
D ST1800 test
D DASM test
D Raw data disk test
D NPR (Recon board) test

–PCI test, DSP test
D DBPCI board test

–PCI test
D HINV (Hardware Inventory) test

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
2-1 OC Power–up Sequence (Continued)

The test progress information is displayed on the CRT monitor.
After the power–on test completes with no error occurred, the processor loads the OS and application software from
the hard disk into memory and starts the application software.
When no error is found in these processes, the start–up screen will be shown on the CRT monitor.
If error occurs, the power–on test will stop and the test log window appears. You can confirm the problem by reviewing
test log, then select either of the following:
D [H/W diag] : Go to [H/W diag Main Menu]

(Refer to Diagnostics manual.)
Note
Using [H/W diag Main Menu] –> [Offline test] –> [Quick] or [Normal], the detailed power–on test can
be performed.
NOTICE
When the interactive test or off–line test is completed, the system MUST be powered OFF
([Exit] –> [OK]) to avoid accidental X–ray Exposure. That is because system reboot can NOT
activate the system reset line.
D [Startup] : The error is skipped and the power–on sequence proceeds so that the start–up screen will be
shown on the CRT monitor.
Note
When the start–up screen does NOT appear even if using the [Startup] command, the system must
be shutdown using [shutdown] button in the desktop menu.
D [Shutdown] : The system runs the shutdown sequence, resulting in the system powered OFF automatical-
ly.

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
2-2 MONITOR FUNCTION TEST

This includes the following main tests:
D Color test
D Display pattern test
1. Select [Service] –> [H/W Diagnostics] –> [Interactive Test] –> [Monitor Test].
The monitor test screen appears.
2. To return to [Interactive Test Menu], click on [Back].
Note
To exit from [H/W Diagnostics] menu, the system must be rebooted so that the [Exit] button must be
used to shut down the system.
Color
3. Click on any color key (RED, GREEN, BLUE, WHITE, or BLACK).
The display color changes in the selected one.
4. Verify that no hole exits on the monitor display.
5. To exit from this test, press the left button of the mouse.
This operation returns to the monitor test screen.
Display Pattern
6. Click on any pattern key (Flat, Horizontal Gradation 1 or 2, or Vertical Gradation 1 or 2).
The display pattern changes in the selected one.
7. Using the test pattern to be displayed, adjust position, size, trapezoid, or parallelogram of the monitor.
(For adjustment, refer to Installation, Wiring and Power–ON.)
8. To exit from this test, press the left button of the mouse.
This operation returns to the monitor test screen.
Auto Sequence Test

This runs the mixing tests of color and display pattern described above automatically. To go to next test, press the
left button of the mouse.

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
2-3 KEYBOARD FUNCTION TEST

D Input test
D LED ON/OFF/Flash test
D 103 keyboard test
1. Select [Service] –> [H/W Diagnostics] –> [Interactive Test] –> [Keyboard Test].
The keyboard test screen appears.
Note
Input Test
This test sends command from the keyboard to the screen (system).
3. Press any key on the keyboard.
4. Verify that the key on the screen related to the pressed key is highlighted.
LED ON/OFF/Flash Test

This test sends command from the screen (system) to the keyboard.
5. Press any button ( [Prescribed Tilt], [Move to Scan], [Stop Move], [Start Scan], [Pause], [X–ray on], [Stop Scan],
[Emergency Stop], or [Talk] ) on the screen.
6. Verify that the key on the keyboard related to the pressed screen key is ON, OFF, or Flashed.
103 Keyboard Test

7. Select [103 Keyboard Test].
The keyboard test screen disappear, then the 103 Keyboard Test screen will appear.
8. Press any button on the keyboard.
9. Verify that the key on the keyboard screen related to the pressed key is highlighted.
10. Click on any place on the 103 keyboard test screen using the left button of the mouse to returns to the keyboard
test screen.
Note
The LEDs for Num Lock, Caps Lock, and Scroll Lock MUST be OFF before exiting from the 103 key-
board test. If it is not, it has significant impact on other tests.

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
2-4 AUDIO FUNCTION TEST

D OC speaker test, including tests for Auto Voice, CD player, X–ray ON, and Alert
D Gantry speaker test, including Auto Voice and CD player
1. Select [Service] –> [H/W Diagnostics] –> [Interactive Test] –> [Audio Test].
The Audio test screen appears.
Note
OC Speaker – Auto Voice

3. Click on [Show Player] for Auto Voice.
4. Click on [Audio] . The Input/Output screen appears.
5. Click on [Output] . The audio confidence test screen appears.
6. Click on [OK]. The voice message, “This is audio confidence test. If...” will be heard from the OC speaker.
7. While playing auto voice message, move the L and R volume sliders for Auto voice so that the message will be-
come loud or faint.
Note
When the [Play Back] button is ON, a sound via the Gantry microphone (patient voice) will NOT be
heard from the OC speaker. This function is one for recording, so that the [Play Back] button MUST
be OFF when exiting from this test if it is performed.
8. Click on [OK] again. The audio confidence test screen disappears.
9. Click on [Exit] to exit from this test.
OC Speaker – CD player
10. Click on [Show Player] for CD (music) player of the OC.
11. Set a music CD into the CD–ROM drive of the OC.
12. While playing CD, move the L and R volume sliders for CD so that sound will become loud or faint.

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
2-4 AUDIO FUNCTION TEST (Continued)
OC Speaker – X–ray ON Buzzer

13. Click on [ON/OFF] button so that it remains ON. Verify that X–ray ON buzzer continues to sound until the button
is OFF.
14. Move the [Mod] (Modulation) and [Freq] (Frequency) slider for X–ray ON buzzer so that sound varies.
15. Move the L and R volume sliders for the X–ray ON buzzer so that sound will become loud or faint.
16. Click on [ON/OFF] button so that it remains OFF.
OC Speaker – Alert
17. Click on [ON] button once. Verify that alert sounds once.
18. Move the [Width] and [Freq] (Frequency) slider for Alert so that sound varies.
19. Move the L and R volume sliders for Alert so that sound will become loud or faint.
Table Speaker – Auto Voice / CD Player

20. When adjusting the Table speaker for Auto Voice or CD player, use buttons for OC speaker.
Note
When adjusting the speaker volume for Auto Voice, use the volume on the OC keyboard.
Audio Setting Save / Load

When current Audio setting want to be temporarily saved, click on [Save] button. Then modifying setting and clicking
on [Load] returns to the setting before modification.
Note
The file saved will be deleted when shutting down the system since it is a temporary file.

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
2-5 MISC TEST

This includes the following tests:
D Hardware Inventory
D SCSI test
D View SYSLOG
D NPR LED Test
D Safety Loop test
D Shutdown test
1. Select [Service] –> [H/W Diagnostics] –> [Interactive Test] –> [Misc Test].
The Misc test selection window appears.
Note
Hardware Inventory
This program shows the hardware configuration of the Host Computer. This program runs “hinv” command.
Note
When changing the hardware configuration (e.g. Memory addition, Disk change...), always run this
program to check if the system properly recognizes the hardware to be changed.
3. Click on [Hardware Inventory] from the Misc test selection window.

The list of hardware connected to the host computer appear.
4. Click on [Close] to return to the Misc test selection window.

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
2-5 MISC TEST (Continued)

D Example for Result to be displayed:
.................
.................
.................
Integral SCSI controller 0:Version ADAPTEC 7880 # On–board SCSI controller 0
Disk drive: unit 1 on SCSI controller 0 # SYSTEM DISK/IMAGE DISK
Disk drive: unit 2 on SCSI controller 0 # OPTION IMAGE DISK
Integral SCSI controller 1:Version ADAPTEC 7880 # On–board SCSI controller 1
CDROM: unit 1 on SCSI controller 1 # CDROM
Disk drive: unit 3 on SCSI controller 1 # OPTION DASM
Comm device: unit 4 on SCSI controller 1 # ST1800
Comm device: unit 4, lun 1 on SCSI controller 1
Optical disk: unit 5 on SCSI controller 1 # OPTION Pioneer MOD
Optical disk: unit 6 on SCSI controller 1 # STD MOD
PCI SCSI controller 3: Version ADAPTEC 7880 # SCSI PCI card
Disk drive: unit 1 on SCSI controller 3 # RAW DISK 1
Disk drive: unit 2 on SCSI controller 3 # (OPTION) RAW DISK 2
.................
.................
.................
– Adaptec SCSI : PCI Adapter ID (vendor 36868, device 32888) pci slot 1
– Bit3 PCI Exp : PCI Adapter ID (vendor 4113, device 36) pci slot 3
– NPR (RECON) : PCI Adapter ID (vendor 4277, device 36961) pci slot 5
– DBPCI (DAS Buf) : PCI Adapter ID (vendor 4277, device 36960) pci slot 6
– DBPCI (DAS Buf) : PCI Adapter ID (vendor 4277, device 36960) pci slot 7 # For TWIN
Only
.................
.................
.................
D If “Bit3 xxxx” is NOT displayed, check the following cable for loose connection or short circuit:
– Signal cable between CPU board and PCI backplane controller card
– Power cable between NPD J8 and PCI backplane P8/P9
D The unit number of the SCSI device to be displayed MUST be the same number as the device ID.

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
2-5 MISC TEST (continued)
SCSI Test
This program runs HDD access test, CD–ROM access test, MOD #0 access test, MOD #1 access test, ST–1800
access test, and DASM access test so that their results will be displayed.
Note
SCSI information can be known by the hardware inventory test, but this SCSI test will give you more
detailed information.
Note
For Option Image disk, this SCSI test will be skipped, so that this result is NOT displayed.
5. Click on [SCSI Test] from the Misc test selection window.

The result of their tests appear.

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
View SYSLOG
This program displays system log information after last reboot.
7. Click on [View SYSLOG] from the Misc test selection window.

The system log information appears.
Note
The system log to be displayed shows only a day’s worth of log after last reboot. When the following
day comes, the log of the day before is saved on “SYSLOG.0” file, then it will be deleted from the
SYSLOG viewing window.
Note
8 day’s worth of log files are being saved as a backup on the directory “/var/adm”. You can see them
using “ls” and “cat” commands. Today’s log is “SYSLOG”. Yesterday’s is “SYSLOG.0”.
NPRM LED Test

This program can check if
9. Remove the front cover of the OC, then remove the Nest cover to access the NPRM board.
10. Click on [NPR LED Test] from the Misc test selection window.
11. Verify that the same number of the LEDs as the setting of the Dip switch S1 are ON.
(The LEDs and dip switch are located at the upper left side of the NPRM board.)
Safety Loop
This program can switch ON or OFF the relay for safety loop of the OC.
13. Click on [Safety Loop] from the Misc test selection window.
14. The message screen appears. Click on [OK] button.

The safety loop relay of the OC is in close position, so that OC safety loop is connected and the selector is ON.
15. Click on [Safety Loop] again to open the safety loop relay of the OC.
NOTICE
Before starting other test, the safety loop MUST return to the default setting. (The OC relay
is OPEN.)

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
Shutdown
This program shutdown the system.
17. Click on [Shutdown Test] from the Misc test selection window.
The system runs shutdown sequence automatically, then the system is down.
Note
If either of the relay of the front panel or DBPCI board is faulty, the system can NOT shut down.

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
2-6 WORKSTATION DEFAULT TEST

D Audio
D Monitor
D Mouse
Select [Service] –> [H/W Diagnostics] –> [Interactive Test] –> [Workstation Default Test].
The test selection window appears.
Note
Audio Test
Click on audio icon. The same test window as audio function appears. For usage, refer to 2-4 Audio Function Test.
Monitor Test
Click on monitor icon. The monitor pattern list appears. Select any pattern and verify that appropriate pattern can
be shown.
Mouse Test
Click on mouse icon. The mouse image appears on the screen. Press any mouse key to verify that the proper key
on the screen is highlighted.
Move the mouse to verify that the mouse image on the screen moves to the same direction.

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 29 2202123
GANTRY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – DC POWER SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 POWER SUPPLIES ON STATIONARY FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 POWER SUPPLIES ON ROTATIVE FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
SECTION 2 – ROTATIONAL MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 CLEARANCE BETWEEN ROTATIONAL AND STATIONARY COMPONENTS . . . . 2–1
2-2 ROTATION BALANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2-3 G. PULSE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2-4 AZIMUTH BELT TENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
2-5 RF SHOE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2-6 HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
2-7 SLIP RING RADIAL POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
SECTION 3 – ROTATIONAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

3-1 GANTRY INITIALIZE MOVEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-2 MOVEMENT CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3-3 ROTATION VELOCITY OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3-4 ROTATION SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
SECTION 4 – SLIP RINGS AND BRUSHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

4-1 CAUTION AND NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-2 SIGNAL BRUSH CONTACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4-3 SIGNAL AND POWER BRUSHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4-3-1 Signal and Power Brush Wear (Erosion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4-3-2 Cleaning of Brush Block Assy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4-4 SLIP RING CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4-4-1 RF Slip Ring Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4-4-2 HSDCD Slip Ring Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
4-5 BRUSH DEBRIS CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–19
SECTION 5 – TILT OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

5-1 ROTATION CHECK WHILE TILTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5-2 TILT ROLLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5-2-1 Tilt Rollers (For Non–Mobile System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5-2-2 Tilt Rollers (For Mobile System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5-3 TILT SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5-4 TILT ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
5-4-1 Tilt Angle Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
5-4-2 Tilt Angle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
5-5 TILT BWD LOCK SWITCH POSITION (FOR MOBILE SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
i GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 29 2202123
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 6 – COLLIMATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1

6-1 APERTURE RATIO (FOR SINGLE DETECTOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6-2 APERTURE RATIO (FOR TWIN SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6-3 BOW–TIE FILTER CURVE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–10
6-4 APERTURE Z–AXIS BELT TENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–13
SECTION 7 – TABLE AND GANTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1

7-1 TABLE POSITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7-2 POSITIONING LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7-2-1 Halogen Positioning Lights (NP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7-2-2 Laser Positioning Lights (NP+/NP++/Twin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7-3 GANTRY PANEL SWITCH CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7-3-1 Table Up, Down, Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7-3-2 Table In, Out, Fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7-3-3 Move to Scan, Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7-3-4 Tilt Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7-3-5 POSN Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7-3-6 Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7-4 TABLE AND GANTRY INTERLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
ii GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
SECTION 1 – DC POWER SUPPLIES
1-1 POWER SUPPLIES ON STATIONARY FRAME

Understand and follow the Safety Guidelines Manual.
1. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’, and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove the front and left side covers.
3. Check DC power supply voltages on the TGP Board and SUB board, according to Table 1–1 by referring to il-
lustration 1–1. Adjust the Power Supplies PS1 and PS2 if necessary.
Illustration 1–1 Stationary Gantry Voltage Adjustment
Adjusting GANTRY LEFT SIDE TP1

Potentiometer
PS3 TP2
PS1/PS2/PS3
SUB BOARD
PS2
TP5 TP4
PS1
TP6
TGP BOARD
TP7
TP2
Table 1–1 Power Supply Specifications
DC Measuring Points SPECIFICATION

VOLTAGE
Board (High) (Low)
+5 V TGP TP4(+5V) TP5(+DGND) PS1: 5V ± 0.1V (check/adjustment)
+24 V SUB TP1(GNT24V) TP2(COM) PS2: 24.0V ± 0.5V (check/adjustment) (NP/NP+)
PS3: 24.0V ± 0.5V (check/adjustment) (NP++/Twin)
+24 V TGP TP2(+24V) TP5(+DGND) PS2: 24 V ± 0.6 V (checking only) (NP/NP+)
PS2: 24 V ± 0.6 V (check/adjustment) (NP++/Twin)
+15 V TGP TP6(+15V) TP5(+DGND) PS1: +15 V ± 0.9 V (checking only)
– 15V TGP TP7(–15V) TP5(+DGND) PS1: –15 V ± 0.9 V (checking only)
1–1 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
1-2 POWER SUPPLIES ON ROTATIVE FRAME

1. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’, and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove the front and right side Gantry covers.
3. Switch ON the Service Switch, then Rotate the Gantry to the 270_ tube position.
4. Switch OFF the Service Switch.
5. Remove the Power Supply PS L Cover by unscrewing nuts. (Refer to illustration 1–2)
6. Disconnect the OGP, DTRF and RF power cables connectors.
7. Switch ON the ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
8. Measure and adjust if necessary, the potentiometers of the Power Supply according to the table 1–1. The poten-
tiometer positions is shown in the illustration 1–2.
Illustration 1–2 Power Supply PS L Voltage Adjustment
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
PS1
ÀÀ
À
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
À
ÉÉÉ
ÀÀ
PS2
À
ÀÀÀ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÀÀ
ÀÀ
À ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÉÉÉÀÀ
É
PS3
À
ÀÀÀ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
À
ÀÀ
ÉÉÉ
À
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÉÀÀ
É
À ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀ
ÉÉÉÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
É ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
PS4
À
ÀÀ
ÉÉÉ
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀ
ÀÀ À
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ ÀÀÀ
À ÀÀÀÀÀ
À
ÀÀ
ÉÉÉÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÀÀÀ
É ÀÀ
À ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
À
ÀÀ
À
ÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀ À
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ ÀÀÀ
À ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
À
ÀÀ À ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ ÀÀÀ
À ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀ ÀÀÀÀ À ÀÀÀÀÀ
À
ÀÀÀÀ
NUTS
The denominations PS1 ∼ PS4 are only for reference in this procedure. They do not correspond to
the part name in Renewal Parts.
1–2 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
1-2 POWER SUPPLIES ON ROTATIVE FRAME (continued)
Adjustment Measuring Points Connector Voltage Range

Pins
PS1 (A) and (B) , or OGP PS Connector 3&4 24 ∼ 24.2V
5&6 24 ∼ 24.2V
PS2 (C) , or OGP PS Connector 1&2 4.9 ∼ 5.1V
PS3 (D) , or DTRF PS Connector 5.0 ∼ 5.2V
PS4 (E) , or RF PS Connector 14.35 ∼ 15.85
(A) 24V
PS1
(B) 24V
OGP PS
PS2
(C) 5V
PS3 DTRF PS
(D) 5V
PS4 RF PS
(E) 15V
CAUTION !
AC115V POTENTIOMETER
Illustration 1–3 Measuring Point for RF Power Supply Adjustment

1–3 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123
1–4 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
SECTION 2 – ROTATIONAL MECHANISM
2-1 CLEARANCE BETWEEN ROTATIONAL AND STATIONARY COMPONENTS
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD !
WHEN YOU PRESS THE ‘POSN LIGHT’ BUTTONS (LARGE BUTTON AND SMALL BUTTON),
THE GANTRY QUICKLY ROTATES TO THE –14 DEG. POSITION. IF IT IS NECESSARY TO
PLACE ANY PART OF YOUR BODY INSIDE OR NEAR THE GANTRY, SWITCH OFF THE
‘ROTATE’ SWITCH FIRST.
1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’ and ‘Slip Ring’ switches at the Gantry rear Base.
b. Remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers of the Gantry.
c. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
2. Verify that the clearance between each rotating component part and all fixed parts is more than 10mm, while
rotating the Gantry in the CW direction by hand.
3. Check to make sure that the cables does not catch on any stationary components during each revolution.
Illustration 2–1 Clearance between Rotational and Stationary Components
more than 10mm

more than 10mm
more than 10mm
more than 7mm
more than 10mm
2–1 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
2-2 ROTATION BALANCE
Special Equipment
D Spring Balance (Fish Scale) included in the SV Tool Set.
WARNING
MECHANICAL HAZARD !
FAILURE TO HOLD THE GANTRY USING THE AZIMUTH LOCK PIN PRIOR TO REMOVING
COMPONENTS MAY LEAD TO GANTRY MOTION WHICH CAN STRIKE A PERSON CAUSING
INJURY OR DEATH.

1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’ and ‘Slip Ring’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers of the Gantry.
Illustration 2–2 Gantry Balance Weight Locations
Spare Weights
(under the bottom cover)
Main Weight
(0.5kg)
Side Weight (0.5kg)
For System with D3152TI Tube
Rear Weights
(Max. 4kg)
Center Weights
(Max. 4kg) DAS Assy
Front Weights
(Max. 4kg)
Side Weight (0.5kg)
2–2 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
2-2 ROTATION BALANCE (continued)

2. Perform the rough weight balance check/adjustment by observing the free movement:
a. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
b. Rotate the Gantry until the main weight (under the DAS Assy) reaches the 6 o’clock position.
c. Verify that the Gantry does not rotate on its own, due to unbalance.
If the Gantry rotates in the CW direction, increase the side weight by 2 kg (0.5kg x 4).
If the Gantry rotates in the CCW direction, decrease the side weight by 2 kg (0.5kg x 4).
d. Repeat above step until the Gantry is balanced.
e. Rotate the Gantry until the side weight (near the OGP Assy) reaches the 6 o’clock position.
f. Verify that the Gantry does not rotate on its own, due to unbalance.
If the Gantry rotates in the CW direction, decrease the main weight by 2 kg (0.5kg x 4).
If the Gantry rotates in the CCW direction, increase the main weight by 2 kg (0.5kg x 4).
Note
Adjust (decrease/increase) the main weights in the following order (see illustration 2–2):
decrease increase
For System with D3142T Tube: Front Weights Rear Weights
↓ ↓
Center Weights Center Weights
↓ ↓
Rear Weights Front Weights
For System with D3152T Tube: Rear Weights Front Weights
↓ ↓
Center Weights Center Weights
↓ ↓
Front Weights Rear Weights
g. Repeat above step until the Gantry is balanced.
Illustration 2–3 Rough Weight Balance
CCW CW CCW CW
Main Weight
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
Side Weight
ÂÂ
ÂÂ 70°
Main Weight Side Weight
2–3 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
2-2 ROTATION BALANCE (continued)

3. Perform the fine weight balance check/adjustment using a spring balance:
a. Rotate the Gantry until the main weight reaches the 12 o’clock position.
b. Measure the force (F1 and F2) required to initiate Gantry rotation by pulling the Gantry with a spring balance.
If the value ( F2–F1 ) is positive, increase the weight in the Side Weight.
If the value is negative, decrease the weight in the Side Weight.
c. Rotate the Gantry until the side weight reaches the 6 o’clock position.
d. Measure the force (F3 and F4) required to initiate Gantry rotation by pulling the Gantry with a spring balance.
If the value ( F4–F3 ) is positive, increase the weight in the Main Weight.
If the value is negative, decrease the weight in the Main Weight.
4. Switch OFF the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
Illustration 2–4 Gantry Static Balance Force Measurements
F1 F2
ÂÂ
ÂÂ F3
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
F4
ÂÂ
Side Weight Main Weight
| F2–F1 | Balance Weight(s) | F4–F3 | Balance Weight(s)

0.0 ∼ 0.4 – – 0.0 ∼ 0.4 – –
0.6 ∼ 1.2 1 pcs. (0.5kg) 0.6 ∼ 1.4 1 pcs. (0.5kg)
1.4 ∼ 2.2 2 pcs. (1.0kg) 1.6 ∼ 2.4 2 pcs. (1.0kg)
2.4 ∼ 3.0 3 pcs. (1.5Kg) 2.6 ∼ 3.6 3 pcs. (1.5Kg)
3.2 ∼ 3.8 4 pcs. (2.0Kg) 3.8 ∼ 4.6 4 pcs. (2.0Kg)
4.0 ∼ 4.8 5 pcs. (2.5kg) 4.8 ∼ 5.8 5 pcs. (2.5kg)
2–4 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
2-3 G. PULSE POSITION

1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Remove the Gantry rear and left maintenance covers.
c. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
d. Push the Emergency Reset switch on the TGP board.
2. Rotate the Gantry in the CW direction by hand until LED on the G. Pulse1 sensor turn OFF (on the stationary rear
side). Refer to illustration 2–5.
3. Measure the angle of the collimator plate. Verify that the angle is –1.0 ±0.5 deg.
4. Switch OFF the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
Illustration 2–5 G. Pulse Photo Sensor Location
Photo Sensor LED

(G. Pulse 1)
Plate Plate
Gantry Frame
Photo Sensor
(G. Pulse 2)
TGP BOARD
Emergency Reset RESET
(EMRG RESET)
TEST1
TEST2
2–5 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
2-3 G. PULSE POSITION (continued)
Illustration 2–6 Photo Sensor & Plate Position
(TOP or BOTTOM VIEW)
Photo Sensor
Plate
6mm ± 0.5mm
(Side VIEW)
Photo Sensor
Plate
(G. Pulse 1)
(Stationary)
–1 deg. Gantry Position→ Plate (Stationary)
Photo Sensor (Rotational)
H
(G. Pulse 2) A
(Rotational)
A = H/2 ± 1.5mm
Plate Photo Sensor

Plate
(Rotational) (G. Pulse 1)
(Stationary)
0 deg. Gantry Position→ (Stationary)
A = H/2 ± 1.5mm
H
A
Photo Sensor
(G. Pulse 2)
(Rotational)
2–6 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
2-4 AZIMUTH BELT TENSION

1. Preparation:
b. Remove the Gantry rear cover.
2. Remove the Axial Motor Pulley cover by unscrewing its 8 screws.
3. Adjust the adjusting bolt:
a. Loosen the three mounting plate bolts.
b. Loosen the set nut, and then rotate the adjusting bolt in the CCW direction until the distance D (between part A
and part B) is approximately 2 ∼ 3mm.
NOTICE
Over tension. After part A and part B are just touching, do not rotate the adjusting bolt; other-
wise, this will cause over tension and will shorten the life of the axial drive belt.
c. Turn the adjusting bolt in the CW direction until part A and part B are just touching.
d. Tighten the set nut.
e. Tighten the three mounting plate bolts.
4. Install the Axial Motor Pulley cover.
2–7 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
2-4 AZIMUTH BELT TENSION (continued)
Illustration 2–7 Belt Tension Adjuster
D B
GANTRY REAR VIEW

A
Set Nut
Spring
Adjusting Bolt
Mounting
Axial Plate Bolts
Belt
Axial Motor Pulley Mounting Plate
2–8 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
2-5 RF SHOE POSITION
Special Equipment
D Alignment Tool
1. Preparation:
2. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
3. Rotate the Gantry by hand, until the ‘SHOE ADJUSTMENT INDEX’ on the slip ring meets RF Shoe Assy (see
illustration 2–9).
4. Switch OFF the Service Switch on the SUB board and ‘Table/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
5. Remove the RF Shoe by unscrewing its screw A, and attach the alignment tool to the RF Shoe Assy.
Note
Pay attention to the orientation of the Alignment Tool (see illustration 2–8).
6. Reposition RF Shoe with the alignment tool, and hand–tighten the screw A.
Illustration 2–8 Receiver Assy and RF Shoe
Mounting
Screws Mounting Plate
RF Shoe
Mounting
Screws
Alignment
Tool
ÂÂÂÂ
Screw B (x 4)
ÂÂÂÂ
Screw A
ÂÂÂÂ
2–9 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
2-5 RF SHOE POSITION (continued)

7. Adjust the RF Shoe position as follows:
a. Loosen the screw A, and adjust the gap between the bottom surface of the alignment tool (part d) and bottom
surface of the slip ring groove so that they just touch, then tighten the screw A. (illustration 2–8)
b. Check if the side surface of the alignment tool and the wall of the slip ring groove just touch. (illustration 2–8)
If not, perform the following:

Loosen the screw B (x4), and adjust the RF Shoe Z–Axis position so that the side surface of the alignment tool
and the wall of the slip ring groove just touch, then tighten the screw B (x4).
c. Loosen the screw A and the three mounting screws that fasten the receiver assy to the Gantry (illustration
2–8),
and tilt the mounting plate so that the part d, e and the bottom surface of the slip ring groove just touch (loosen
the screw A, and move the RF Shoe, if necessary),
then tighten the three mounting screws.
Illustration 2–9 RF Shoe Position
RF Shoe
Alignment
c Part d Tool
Part e c
Index
Just Touch
a a
Bottom Surface of
the Slip Ring Groove
b
Just Touch
b Slip Ring
Front Rear
Slip Ring
(Gantry/Table)
Slip Ring
Groove Wall of the Alignment Tool
Slip Ring Groove
2–10 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
2-5 RF SHOE POSITION (continued)

8. Slide the alignment tool off the RF Shoe.
9. Switch ON the ‘Table/Tilt’, ‘Rotate’ and ‘Slip Ring’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
Note
The Gantry rotation alarm sounds indicate that Gantry rotation is enabled.
10. Switch ON the Service Switch of the SUB Board.
11. Rotate the Gantry in CW direction by hand and verify that the RF Shoe does not hit the bottom surface and both
side walls of the slip ring groove, in visually.
12. Tilt the Gantry to the FWD 30 deg. position and check the RF Shoe position according to previous step.
13. Switch OFF the Service Switch of the SUB Board.
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD!
WHEN YOU SET THE CONT/HOME/90_ TO ‘CONT’, THE GANTRY QUICKLY ROTATES. IF IT
IS NECESSARY TO PLACE ANY PART OF YOUR BODY INSIDE OR NEAR THE GANTRY,
SWITCH OFF THE ‘ROTATE’ SWITCH FIRST.
14. Rotate the Gantry by setting the TGP Service switches as follows:
ABT/SVE/FIX : FIX ↓
SPD2/SPD1/SPD0 : SPD2 ↓
FAST/MID/SLOW : MID ↓ (0.8 sec/Rot)
CONT/HOME/90_ : CONT ↓
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
Note
The Gantry start to rotate when you set the CONT/HOME/90_ to CONT.
The Gantry stop to rotate when you set the CONT/HOME/90_ to HOME.
Verify that the RF Shoe does not hit the bottom surface and both side walls of the slip ring groove in visually.
15. Stop the Gantry rotation, then tilt the Gantry to the BWD 30 deg. position and check the RF Shoe position accord-
ing to previous step.
16. Stop the Gantry rotation, then tilt the Gantry to 0 deg. position.
17. Perform the following check according to the CD–ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment.
D DAS TRANSFER TEST
2–11 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
2-6 HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY POSITION
Special Equipment
D Alignment Tool
NOTICE
HSDCD Receiver and Antenna are static sensitives. Before touching the components, attach
the wrist strap to your wrist and to the metal part of the chassis.
1. Preparation:
2. Remove the HSDCD Receiver Cover.
3. Remove the Slip Ring Covers.
4. Disconnect the RF cables.
6. Install the dial gauge onto HSDCD Slip Ring PCB surface, using the attachment tool (see illustration 2–19).
7. Rotate the Gantry by hand and find the average of radial eccentric position of the slip ring:
a. Find the Innermost and Outermost point;
b. Calculate the average between both;
c. Rotate the Gantry so that the obtained average value stay positioned underneath the HSDCD Receiv-
er Assy position.
d. Switch OFF the Service Switch.
Illustration 2–10 HSDCD Receiver Assy and its supports
HSDCD Support 1
HSDCD Support 2
HSDCD Receiver
HSDCD Antenna
HSDCD Support 4
2–12 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
2-6 HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY POSITION (continued)

8. Screw temporarily but not tighten the three screws (with washers) of HSDCD Antenna that holds the HSDCD
Support 1. (Illustration 2–11).
Illustration 2–11 HSDCD Receiver Assy position adjusment
Screw and
washer (x3) screw in the middle of hole
HSDCD HSDCD
Antenna Support 1
PCB
Slip Ring
9. Insert the thickness gauge provided in the Alignment Tool between the HSDCD Antenna and Slip Ring.
Illustration 2–12 Special thikness gauge
Screws (x2)
HSDCD
Receiver
Keep the HSDCD

HSDCD Antenna always in
Antenna contact with the
thickness gauge.
2–13 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123

10. Tighten the two screws of HSDCD Support 2 on the Mounting Plate keeping the HSDCD Receiver in contact with
thickness gauge. (Illustration 2–13).
Illustration 2–13 HSDCD Receiver Assy on the mounting plate
Screws (x2)
11. Tighten the two screws A of HSDCD Support 2. These screws keep the HSDCD Antenna in parallel with Slip
Ring’s PCB. (Illustration 2–14).
Illustration 2–14 Screws for positioning adjusment
A (both side)
HSDCD Support 1 HSDCD
B Support 2
C
(both side)
2–14 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123

12. Remove the thickness gauge.
13. Adjust the HSDCD Antenna position along the antenna of Slip Ring so that the tolerance between the center lines
does not exceed 0.4 mm. (Illustration 2–15).
14. Loosen but not remove the three screws B (Illustration 2–14) to allow fine horizontal adjustment.
15. Adjust with screws C (Illustration 2–15) for fine horizontal adjustment. Use the magnifyng glass included in the
Alignment Tool to check the alignment between the HSDCD Antenna and PCB Antenna.
16. Tighten the three screws B of HSDCD Support 1. (Illustration 2–14).
(approx. 0.4 mm) (approx. 0.4 mm)
Slip Ring C screw (x2)
HSDCD HSDCD HSDCD

PCB Antenna PCB Antenna PCB Antenna
Antenna Antenna Antenna
OK OK Not allowed
Readjusment
required
2–15 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
MEASUREMENT CHECK
Special Equipment
Prepare the following measurement tools:
D Shim (Alignment Tool)
D 4.3mm Master Gauge (Alignment Tool)
D Magnifyng glass
a. Prepare a 4.3mm shim and insert/remove few times in a 4.5mm Master Gauge. The objective of this proce-
dure is to obtain a better accuracy by familiarizing yourself the clearance of a determined thickness.
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
Illustration 2–16 Master Gauge
Master Gauge
ÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒ
Master Gauge
ÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒ
ÚÚÚÚÚÚÚ
ÚÚÚÚÚ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒÒÒ
ÚÚÚÚÚÚÚ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÚÚÚÚÚ
ÒÒÒÒÒ
ÚÚÚÚÚÚÚ
ÚÚÚÚÚ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÚÚÚ
ÚÚÚÚÚÚÚ
4.3mm shim
ÒÒÒÒÒ
ÚÚÚ
ÚÚÚÚÚ
ÚÚÚ
2–16 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123

b. Prepare a 1.0mm shim and certify that might be inserted between the HSDCD Antenna and Slip Ring in four
places indicated in the Illustration 2–17.
c. Prepare a 1.8mm shim and certify that might not be inserted between the HSDCD Antenna and Slip Ring in
four places.
d. If at least one of condition b. and c. does not agree, proceed againg the HSDCD Receiver Assy Position from
the step 10. Otherwise proceed the next step.
Check the clearance here
PCB
HSDCD
Antenna
17. Lock the screws C with “Locktite”. (Illustration 2–15).
2–17 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123

18. Reconnect the RF cables to its original configuration. Place them close by HSDCD Antenna to avoid interference
between HSDCD Receiver Cover and these cables.
Illustration 2–18 RF Cables must be placed close by HSDCD Antenna
RF Cables
HSDCD
Antenna
20. Rotate the Gantry manually to perform the following checks:
Check to make sure that the HSDCD Antenna does not touch the Slip Ring during its revolution.
Check to make sure that the cables does not catch on any stationary components during each revolution.
Check if the movement is smooth and there is no abnormal noise. Make more than one complete rotation.
21. Perform the Gantry rotation using TGP service switches and verify if the movement is smooth.
22. Restore the HSDCD Receiver cover original configuration.
23. Perform following adjustment and check according to the CD–ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment,
Gantry.
DATA TRANSFER CHECK
24. Install the rear, right side, and left maintenance covers.
25. Switch ON the “Rotate”, “XG Power”, “Slip Ring115V” and “Table Tilt” switches at the Gantry rear base.
27. END
2–18 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
2-7 SLIP RING RADIAL POSITION
Special Equipment
D Gloves
D Vacuum Cleaner
D Attachment Tool
D Plastic Hammer
CAUTION
When servicing the Slip Rings and Brushes, wait approximately five minutes after switching
OFF the CB1 in the PDU for all capacitors in the XG Unit to discharge.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when working with slip ring components to avoid contact, inhalation, and
ingestion of slip ring brush powder.
Gloves : Large size : 46–194427P400, X–Large size : 46–194427P401

HEPA Vacuum Cleaner : 46–297933P1 to remove brush block powder (dust).
Do not remove gloves near an exposed slip ring. The powder inside the glove can contami-
nate the ring.
NOTICE
Do not touch the slip ring surfaces. Do not touch the brush surfaces either.
Do not handle the slip ring surfaces and brushes without GLOVES.
2–19 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
2-7 SLIP RING RADIAL POSITION (continued)

1. Preparation:
a. Remove the PDU front cover by unscrewing its 2 screws.
b. Switch OFF the CB1 and CB5 breakers in the PDU.
c. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
d. Remove the Gantry rear, right side and left maintenance covers.
e. Remove the following components from the Gantry: (Refer to Component Replacement Manual, Gantry,
Gantry Rotational, Slip Ring Assy)
D Magnet Bracket (Bottom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Screws
D Brush Block Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Screws
D All Slip Ring Cover
D RF Shoe Assy for RF Slip Ring
D HSDCD Receiver Assy for HSDCD Slip Ring
D 4 Cable Protect Cover
2. Install the dial gauge onto slip ring groove or PCB surface, using the attachment tool (see illustration 2–19).
3. Check the radial position of the slip ring:
a. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board.
b. Check that the rotation center of the slip ring is not out of the Gantry rotation center, while rotating the Gantry in
the CCW direction by hand
i. for RF Slip Ring: less than 0.5mm, ignore the RF SOURCE GAP and the RF TERMINATION GAP on the
Slip Ring Groove.
ii. for HSDCD Slip Ring: less than 0.7mm, ignore the PCB TERMINATION GAP on the PCB surface.
If the radial position of slip ring is out of specification, perform step 4.
If the position is within the specification, go to step 7.
Illustration 2–19 Dial Gauge Attachment
Attachment Tool For RF Dial Gauge
ÙÙ ÙÙÙ
Slip Ring
ÙÙ
ÙÙ ÙÙÙ
ÙÙÙ Slip Ring Groove
Dial Gauge
ÙÙ ÙÙ
ÙÙ ÙÙ
ÙÙ ÙÙ
For HSDCD
Slip Ring PCB surface
2–20 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123

4. Adjust the radial position of the slip ring:
a. Rotate the Gantry by hand until a slip ring support frame is accessible.
b. Loosen the 4 mounting bolts that fasten the slip ring assy to the support frame.
c. Rotate the Gantry by hand until another support frame is accessible.
d. Loosen the mounting blots, and repeat the procedure to loosen a total of 24 mounting bolts.
e. Tighten the 6 mounting bolts (Torque: 1Nm) shown in illustration 2–20.
Illustration 2–20 Slip Ring Support Frame and Mounting Bolts
Alignment Groove Pin(*1)
(*2)
Slip Ring (*2)
Support Frame
Pin (*1) Tighten 6 Mounting Bolts

(Torque: 1Nm)
Mounting Bolts
Slip Ring Assy Pin (*1)

(*2)
Slip Ring Assy
Bolts
(*1): Pin behind Support Frame

(*2): Support Frame without Pin
2–21 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123

f. Rotate the Gantry by hand and stop when the rod of the dial gauge retracts most (see illustration 2–22).
g. Shift the slip ring assy in the a–a’ direction using the plastic hammer while checking the slip ring movement
with the dial gauge.
NOTICE
Hammer the inner circumference part of the slip ring assy only. Do not hit other parts.
If the slip ring assy does not move, perform the following until the slip ring can be moved by hammering:
i. Loosen the 6 mounting bolts tightened in step e, and tighten them again. (Torque: decrease by 0.1Nm).
h. Repeat steps f and g, until the slip ring assy is positioned at the Gantry rotation center.
i. for RF Slip Ring: less than 0.5mm, ignore the RF SOURCE GAP and the RF TERMINATION GAP.
ii. for HSDCD Slip Ring: less than 0.7mm, ignore the PCB TERMINATION GAP and its adjacency (Illustra-
tion 2–21).
Illustration 2–21 PCB Termination Gap
PCB PCB Termination Gap
Ignore the PCB Termination Gap and its adjacen-

cy (at least three channels of each side) when
measuring with dial gauge
2–22 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123

Note
If the position of the slip ring assy does not meet the specification, loosen the 2(x3) bolts fastening
support frame (without Pin) to Gantry rotational frame, and perform step h, then tighten the 6 (2x3)
bolts (Torque: 6N.m) (see illustration 2–20).
Illustration 2–22 Slip Ring Positioning
Dial Gauge Outer

Circumference
Rod
a
a’
Correct Radial Position

of the Slip Ring Slip Ring Assy
Inner Circumference
2–23 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
5. Tighten the 6 mounting bolts (Torque: 6N.m) in the order shown in illustration 2–23 ( 1 ∼ 6 ).
6. Tighten the rest mounting bolts (Torque: 6N.m) in the cross order shown in illustration 2–23 ( 1 ∼ 6 ).
7. Install the following components:
D Magnet Bracket (Bottom)

D Brush Block Assy
D All Slip Ring Cover
D RF Shoe Assy for RF Slip Ring (Refer to Section 2–5. RF SHOE POSITION)
D HSDCD Receiver Assy for HSDCD Slip Ring (Refer to Section 2-6. HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY
POSITION)
D 4 Cable Protect Cover
8. Restore the Gantry and the PDU to original configuration.
9. END
Illustration 2–23 Mounting Bolts Tightening
Pin
1 (behind Support Frame)
Pin
(behind Support Frame)
1 4
6 3
6 2
4 5
3 5
2 Pin
(behind Support Frame)
2–24 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
SECTION 3 – ROTATIONAL OPERATION
3-1 GANTRY INITIALIZE MOVEMENT

1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF all the switches at the Gantry rear base.

(‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power(Safety Loop)’, ‘Table/Tilt’, and ‘Slip Ring 115V’)
b. Remove the front and left maintenance covers from the Gantry.
c. Set the safety bracket located on the right side of the Gantry.
2. Verify the following settings:
D Service Switch of the SUB Board is OFF.
D Azimuth Lock pin is released.
3. Set the service switches of the TGP Board as follows;
ABT/SVE/FIX : FIX
SPD2/SPD1/SPD0 : SPD0
FAST/MID/SLOW : SLOW
CONT/HOME/90° : HOME
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
3–1 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
3-1 GANTRY INITIALIZE MOVEMENT (continued)
CAUTION
Gantry may experience sudden high speed rotation due to order from the OC. Be very careful;
stand clear of the rotating Gantry.
4. Check that the Gantry Initialize Sequence is normally performed.
a. Be ready to hit the Emergency OFF switch in case of any rotational problems, and then, switch ON the Gantry
switches in the following sequence:
‘Slip Ring’ ––> ‘Rotate’ ––> ‘Table/Tilt’
(Do NOT switch ON the ‘XG (Safety Loop)’ switch)
Note
The Gantry rotation alarm sounds indicate that Gantry rotation is enabled.
The Gantry starts rotating at 15 sec/Rot and stops at the Home position after one rotation (during which
Gantry Initialize Sequence is performed). The Gantry Display shows the Test Sequence pattern. See Illustra-
tion 3–11.
During the Gantry Initialize Sequence, if the Gantry can not rotate (ex. TGP service switch (SYS/OFF/MNL) is
set to OFF), LEDs ‘ERRG’ and ‘LOOPG’ are lit on alternately on the TGP Board. (Waiting for Gantry rotation)
To release this status, push the reset button, after setting the service switches properly.
5. Set the TGP service switch SYS/OFF/MNL to SYS.
6. Set the TGP service switch ABT/SVE/FIX to SVE.
3–2 GANTRY
FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
GANTRY
2202123
CT HISPEED SERIES
Management
Table Processor
Processor
Gantry Switch Gantry LooK
Gantry Display
Panel Display Guide
DS8 DS9 DS Tilt Tilt Ran DS DS DS Pos Pos Lock Un– DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6 DS7 Ex IMS FWD BWD P– Xray STP FRE
10 S I ge 21 22 23 S I Lock LM Light On
3–3
Gantry Initialize Display
GANTRY INITIALIZE MOVEMENT (continued)
*1
8
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
Illustration 3–11
10
11
REV 19
3-1
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
3-2 MOVEMENT CHECK

1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
b. Remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers from the Gantry.
c. Set the safety switch bracket on the right side of the Gantry.
d. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
2. Set the TGP service switches as described below:
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
ABT/SVE/FIX : FIX
3. Check the Gantry rotation movement by setting all the possible speeds:
a. Set the CONT/HOME/90_ switch to CONT from HOME. Gantry will start the rotation.
Verify that the Gantry rotates smoothly, and that there is no abnormal noise, while the Gantry rotates for more
than one rotation.
b. Set the CONT/HOME/90_ switch to HOME from CONT. Gantry will stop the rotation.
c. Do the same check above for each of the following settings.
TGP SERVICE SWITCH

SYS/OFF/MNL ABT/SVE/FIX SPD2/SPD1/SPD0 FAST/MID/SLOW CONT/HOME/90°
MNL FIX SPD0 SLOW CONT/HOME
MNL FIX SPD0 MID CONT/HOME
MNL FIX SPD0 FAST CONT/HOME
4. Set the TGP service switch SYS/OFF/MNL to SYS.

Set the TGP service switch ABT/SVE/FIX to SVE.
3–4 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
3-3 ROTATION VELOCITY OFFSET

1. Remove the Gantry left maintenance cover.
2. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ and ’Table/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
(Switch OFF the ‘XG Power(Safety Loop)’, and ‘Slip Ring 115V’)
3. Set the G6 Gantry dip switch (switch S2 : location 7S) to ON on the TGP Board.
4. Push the TEST1 switch to enter TGP off–line function #400 (Gantry azimuth position display mode).
5. Set the TGP service switches as described below (xxx means any position):
ABT/SVE/FIX : SVE
SPD2/SPD1/SPD0 : xxx
FAST/MID/SLOW : xxx
CONT/HOME/90° : CONT
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
6. Verify that the seven segment display of the Servo Amp shows ‘0’ (Servo ON).
7. Push TEST2 switch on the TGP.
Right most digit of the Position Display starts to blink.
8. Wait until blinking stops.
9. Measure the time from the first change to next change on Gantry Position display. If it is less than 4 seconds, go to
step 7. Otherwise proceed to next step.
10. If CHANGE LED on the TGP lits on, press the FAST and the RANGE keys simultaneously on the gantry switch
panel to store the new adjustment data.
Check that the CHANGE LED turns off.
3–5 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
3-4 ROTATION SPEED

1. Preparation:
a. Remove the Gantry left maintenance cover.
b. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’, ‘Table/Tilt’ and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
(Switch OFF the ‘XG Power’.)
2. Set the TGP service switch SYS/OFF/MNL to OFF.
3. Enter the TGP off–line function #401 (Gantry rotation speed display mode), by following step:
a. Set the G6 Gantry dip switch (switch S2 : location 7S) to ON on the TGP Board.
b. Push the RESET switch on the TGP Board.
The Gantry rotates to the home position, and the Gantry Display panel displays a test number ‘400’.
c. Press the TEST1 switch once on the TGP Board. The Gantry Display will change from ‘400’ to ‘401’.
4. Rotate the Gantry at a specified speed and check/adjust the Gantry rotation speed displayed on the Gantry Dis-
play:
a. Set the TGP service switches as follows to rotate the Gantry (1.0 sec/Rot).
ABT/SVE/FIX : FIX
CONT/HOME/90° : CONT
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
b. After Gantry rotation is stabilized (a few rotations are required), push TEST2 switch on the TGP Board:
Right most digit of the Position Display starts to blink.

When the system completes velocity gain adjustment, blinking stops.
c. Check if the rotation time shown in the Position Display shows a value 1000 ±5.
If not, return to step 4–b.
5. If CHANGE LED on the TGP Board lits on, press the FAST and the RANGE keys simultaneously on the gantry
switch panel to store the new adjustment data.
Check that the CHANGE LED turns off.
3–6 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
3-4 ROTATION SPEED (continued)

6. Perform the same check/adjustment for the following Gantry rotation speeds, by repeating steps 3b, 3c, and 4,
for each gantry rotation speed.
Table 3–2 Gantry Rotation Speed
TGP SERVICE SWITCH SPEED GANTRY DISPLAY VALUE

(Speed Specification)
MNL/SPD1/SLOW/CONT/FIX 3.0 sec/Rot 3000 ± 60
MNL/SPD1/MID/CONT/FIX 2.0 sec/Rot 2000 ± 40
MNL/SPD2/SLOW/CONT/FIX 1.0 sec/Rot 1000 ± 20
MNL/SPD2/MID/CONT/FIX 0.8 sec/Rot 800 ± 16
MNL/SPD2/FAST/CONT/FIX 0.7 sec/Rot 700 ± 14
7. Set the TGP service switches as follows, when completed all of above check/adjustment procedure.
ABT/SVE/FIX : SVE
SYS/OFF/MNL : SYS
8. Set the G6 Gantry dip switch (switch S2 : location 7S) to OFF on the TGP Board.
9. Press the RESET switch on the TGP Board.
3–7 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123
3–8 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
SECTION 4 – SLIP RINGS AND BRUSHES
4-1 CAUTION AND NOTICE
CAUTION
When servicing the Slip Rings and Brushes, wait approximately five minutes after switching
OFF the CB1 in the PDU for all capacitors in the XG Unit to discharge.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when working with slip ring components to avoid contact, inhalation, and
ingestion of slip ring brush powder.
Gloves : Large size : 46–194427P400, X–Large size : 46–194427P401
HEPA Vacuum Cleaner : 46–297933P1 to remove brush block powder (dust).
Do not remove gloves near an exposed slip ring. The powder inside the glove can contami-
nate the ring.
NOTICE
Do not handle the slip ring surfaces and brushes without GLOVES.
GANTRY REAR VIEW RF SLIPRING HSDCD SLIPRING
Signal Power
Slip Slip
Rings Rings
Signal Slip Power
Groove Cables
Brush
Power Block
Cables Assy
Protect Power
Cover Brushes
Power
Brush Bar
CN1
Signal
CN1 Brush
Board
4–1 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-2 SIGNAL BRUSH CONTACT
Special Equipment
D Ring Service Tool (2206131)
This includes a test battery source. The output voltage should be 6 V or more; otherwise replace the dry
batteries with new ones.
D Oscilloscope
D Maintenance Connector
Overview
The following procedure checks if the contact (conductivity) between signal brushes and slip rings is proper. The con-
ductivity is examined by injecting a DC current and observing the current flow in the circuit by the oscilloscope while
rotating the slip ring, as outlined in Illustration 4–1.
Ten signal slip rings are equipped on the slip ring frame:
7 & 8: for DAS Trigger signal
9 & 10: for TGP → OGP Com. Data
11 & 12: for OGP → TGP Com. Data
The contact check will be performed for each of these three sets of rings.
Illustration 4–1 Connection Diagram
Signal Brushes
Signal Board
7 & 8, or
9 & 10, or
11 & 12
6 VDC 120 Ω
Oscilloscope
Short Circuit in
Slip Ring Frame
4–2 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-2 SIGNAL BRUSH CONTACT (continued)

1. Preparation:
d. Remove the Gantry rear, right side and left maintenance covers.
e. Set the safety switch brackets located on the right side of the Gantry.
2. Short–circuit the slip rings:
The following will short–circuit Rings 7 & 8, 9 & 10, and 11 & 12, all at once.
a. Disconnect the signal cable connector from the Signal Interface Board.
b. Connect the maintenance connector to the Signal Interface Board.
Illustration 4–2 Connection Exchange
Signal Cable Connector
Signal Interface Board
Slip Ring
4–3 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123

3. Set the Signal Brush Board for current flow check:
a. Disconnect the cable connector CN1 from the signal brush board.
b. Connect the oscilloscope probes and 6 VDC power wires to the Signal Brush Board as shown in illustration
4–3 (for Rings 7 & 8). (Use a digital storage type oscilloscope; envelope mode)
Illustration 4–3 Signal Brush Board Wire Connection – RF Brush Block
Signal Brush Board
Oscilloscope
Test Buttery Source

6 VDC
CN1
Resistor
120Ω
4–4 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
Illustration 4–4 Signal Brush Board Wire Connection – HSDCD Brush Block
Signal Brush Board
Oscilloscope
Test Buttery Source

CN1 6 VDC
11 9 7
Resistor
12 10 8 120Ω
4–5 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
NOTICE
Check to make sure the removed cables does not catch on the any stationary components
during each revolution.
4. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch at the rear of the Gantry.
5. Rotate the Gantry and observe the current flow (voltage across a register) on oscilloscope:
a. Set the TGP Service Switches as follows to rotate the Gantry (0.7 sec/Rot).
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
FAST/MID/SLOW : FAST
CONT/HOME/90_ : CONT
ABT/SVE/FIX : FIX
b. Verify that there are no voltage drops grater than 0.5 V or voltage fluctuations.
c. Set the CONT/HOME/90_ Service Switch to ‘HOME’.
6. Repeat the above check for the other slip rings and brushes (for Rings 9 & 10 and 11 & 12) (see illustration 4–3).
7. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.
8. Restore the Signal Brush Board and Slip Ring to original configuration.
a. Remove the oscilloscope probes and power supply wires.
b. Connect the cable connector CN1 to the Signal Brush Board.
c. Disconnect the maintenance connector from the Signal Interface Board, and connect the signal cable to it.
9. Set the TGP Service Switches to original configuration.
4–6 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-3 SIGNAL AND POWER BRUSHES
NOTICE
4-3-1 Signal and Power Brush Wear (Erosion)

Perform the following check periodically (once every three months).
1. Preparation:
d. Remove the Gantry rear cover.
2. Remove the Brush Block assy by unscrewing its 4 Allen screws.
For HSDCD Brush Block, follow according to the CD–ROM manual below:
COMPONENT REPLACEMENT – GANTRY Section – HSDCD BRUSH Assy, Removal subsection.
4–7 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-3-1 Signal and Power Brush Wear (Erosion) (continued)
RF Brush Block
3. Visually inspect all brushes (Signal Brush 24 and Power Brush 16) for wear.
There is a check line on each brush; if any brush is worn below this line then the brush assembly must be re-
placed. See Illustration 4–5. Refer to ‘Component Replacement Manual / Gantry / Gantry Stationary / Brush
Assy’
Illustration 4–5 Signal and Power Brush Wear (Erosion)
Check Line
New
Replace within 300K
Rotations from Now
Check During Next

Periodic Maintenance
4–8 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-3-1 Signal and Power Brush Wear (Erosion) (continued)
HSDCD Brush Block

5. Visually inspect all brushes (Signal Brushes and Power Brushes) for wear.
There is a check mark on each brush; if any brush is worn the check mark then the brush assembly must be
replaced. See Illustration 4–6. Refer to ‘Component Replacement Manual / Gantry / Gantry Stationary / Brush
Assy’
Illustration 4–6 Checking the worn–out brushes
Low–Power
Brushes (GND)
Low–Power Brushes
(115V)
High–Power
Brushes (480V)
Signal Brushes
Check
mark
New Brush Check during Replace at the

next Periodic next Periodic
Maintenance Maintenance
or within 300k
rotations
6. Restore the Brush Block to its original configuration. Refer to CD–ROM manual below:
COMPONENT REPLACEMENT – GANTRY Section – HSDCD BRUSH Assy, Installation subsection.
4–9 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-3-2 Cleaning of Brush Block Assy.
RF Brush Block Assy
Special Equipment
D HEPA Vacuum Cleaner
D Kim Wipe (2254011)
1. Preparation:
d. Remove the rear Gantry cover.
2. Disconnect the cable connector CN1 connected to the signal brush board.
3. Remove the protect cover by unscrewing its 4 screws from the brush block assy.
4. Remove the Brush Block assy by unscrewing its 4 Allen screws.
5. Clean all the Brush Block assy using dry Kim Wipe and HEPA Vacuum Cleaner.
6. Wipe the scrapings from the brush surface with the dry Kim Wipe.
4–10 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-3-2 Cleaning of Brush Block Assy. (continued)
Illustration 4–7 Cleaning of Filings/Dust
Power Cables
Brush Block Assy

Signal Brushes CN1
Power Brushes
Signal Brush
Board Protect Cover
Scrapings
4–11 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-3-2 Cleaning of Brush Block Assy (continued)
HSDCD Brush Block Assy
Special Equipment
D HEPA Vacuum Cleaner
1. Preparation:
d. Remove the rear Gantry cover.
2. Disconnect the cable connector CN1 connected to the signal brush board.
3. Remove the protect cover by unscrewing its 4 screws from the HSDCD brush block assy.
4. Remove the Brush Block following the CD–ROM manual below:
Power
GANTRY REAR VIEW Cables Power Slip
Rings
Brush Block
Assy
Power
Brushes
CN1
Signal Brush
Board
4–12 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-3-2 Cleaning of Brush Block Assy (continued)

5. Clean all the HSDCD Brush Block assy using dry Kim Wipe.
NOTICE
Handle the Brushes with care to avoid breakages or deep scratches.
Illustration 4–8 Brushes
Signal Brushes
High–Power Brushes
(480V)
Low–Power
Brushes (115V)
Low–Power
Brushes (GND)
6. Wipe the scrapings from the brush surface with the dry Kim Wipe.
7. Restore the Brush Block to its original configuration. Refer to CD–ROM manual below:
4–13 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-4 SLIP RING CLEANING
4-4-1 RF Slip Ring Cleaning
Special Equipment
D Isopropyl Alcohol (2254012)
During periodic maintenance, or when changing the brushes, the Gantry slip rings should be checked for loud scrap-
ping noises.
NOTICE
Use ethyl alcohol (99.5%) or isopropyl alcohol (99.7%) only.
If these are not available, do not perform the following procedure.
NOTICE
Keep grease or dust away from the brushes as grease or dust will considerably deteriorate
the life and performance of the brushes.
4–14 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-4 SLIP RING CLEANING (continued)

1. Preparation:
d. Remove the Gantry rear and left maintenance covers.
2. Remove the Brush Block assy by unscrewing its 4 screws.
The Brush Block assy can be removed with the power cables connected. Therefore, you do not need to cut tie–
wraps of the cables.
Illustration 4–9 Cleaning of Slip Ring
4–15 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
NOTICE
Do not file the slip rings using abrasive or equivalent.
3. Clean the power slip rings and the surrounding area:
a. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
b. Rotate the Gantry (15 sec/Rot) by setting the TGP service switches as follows;
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
ABT/SVE/FIX : FIX
During the rotation, use a vacuum cleaner to clean the filings/powder on the rings and ring housing, then with a
dry Kim Wipe to clean the rings.
Moisten Kim Wipe with ethyl alcohol (99.5%) or isopropyl alcohol (99.7%) only,
and clean out the surface of all the slip rings and slip ring groove, If the Cleaning Pad gets smudged, replace it.
c. Stop the Gantry rotation by set the CONT/HOME/90_ Service Switch to HOME.
d. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.
e. Use dry Kim Wipe to clean the ring housing, and the surfaces of the base frame located below the slip ring
housing.
4. Install the Brush Block assy.
6. Restore the Gantry and the PDU to the original configuration.
4–16 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-4-2 HSDCD Slip Ring Cleaning
Special Equipment
During periodic maintenance, or when changing the brushes, the Gantry slip rings should be checked for loud scrap-
ping noises.
NOTICE
Keep grease or dust away from the brushes as grease or dust will considerably deteriorate
the life and performance of the brushes.
1. Preparation:
d. Remove the Gantry rear and left maintenance covers.
2. Remove the Brush Block following the CD–ROM manual below:
Illustration 4–10 Removal of the Brush Block Assy
4–17 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
NOTICE
Do not file the slip rings using abrasive or equivalent.
3. Clean the power slip rings and the surrounding area:
a. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
b. Rotate the Gantry (15 sec/Rot) by setting the TGP service switches as follows;
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
ABT/SVE/FIX : FIX
During the rotation, use a vacuum cleaner to clean the filings/powder on the rings and ring housing.
Clean with a Vacuum Cleaner only.
c. Stop the Gantry rotation by set the CONT/HOME/90_ Service Switch to HOME.
d. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.
e. Use dry Kim Wipe to clean the ring housing, and the surfaces of the base frame located below the slip ring
housing.
4. Install the Brush Block following the CD–ROM manual below:
4–18 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-5 BRUSH DEBRIS CLEANING
Special Equipment
1. Preparation:
d. Remove the Gantry rear and front covers.
2. Remove the slip ring covers.
3. Clean the following portion using the HEPA Vacuum Cleaner.
D Inside of the Gantry Front Cover

D Inside of the Gantry Rear Cover
D Gantry Rear Base
D Inside of the Slip Ring Cover
D Slip Ring Tracks
D Slip Ring Wear Covers (only HSDCD Slip Ring)
4. Clean the following portion using the dry Kim Wipe.
D Detector Surface
D Inside of the Myler Ring
4–19 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-5 BRUSH DEBRIS CLEANING (continued)
Illustration 4–11 Cleaning Portion
Inside of the Gantry Covers Gantry Rear Base and Slip Ring Inside of the Slip Ring Covers
Wear Covers
(only HSDCD Slip Ring)
Detector Surface Inside of the Myler Ring
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
4–20 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
SECTION 5 – TILT OPERATION
5-1 ROTATION CHECK WHILE TILTED

1. Remove the left maintenance cover from the Gantry.
2. Verify that the other Gantry covers are installed.
3. Return the cradle to the furthest (Out) position from the Gantry.
4. Set the Table height to approximately ‘100 mm’ according to the Gantry Display.
5. Verify that the Gantry tilts safely, while pushing the Gantry switch ‘FWD’ until Gantry tilts to FWD 30 deg. position .
6. Rotate the Gantry while in the FWD 30 deg. tilt position by setting the TGP Service switches as follows:
ABT/SVE/FIX : FIX
FAST/MID/SLOW : MID (1.0 sec/Rot)
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
Verify that no abnormal movement / vibration / noise / tilt position occurs during rotation.
7. Set the CONT/HOME/90_ switch to HOME, to stop the rotation.
8. Verify that the Gantry tilts safely, while pushing the gantry switch ‘BWD’ until Gantry tilts to BWD 30 deg. position .
9. Rotate the Gantry while in the BWD 30 deg. tilt position by setting the TGP Service switch CONT/HOME/90_
switch to CONT.
Verify that no abnormal movement / vibration / noise / tilt position occurs during rotation.
10. Set the CONT/HOME/90_ switch to HOME, to stop the rotation.
5–1 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
5-2 TILT ROLLERS

The tilt rollers on the side plates support the motion of the arched frames during tilt operations.
Five rollers are equipped; located on left upper front, left upper rear, right upper front, right upper rear, and right bottom
rear. All the rollers should rotate during tilt operations.
5-2-1 Tilt Rollers (For Non–Mobile System)

1. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, and “XG Power” switches at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove the front, rear, right and left side covers from the Gantry.
3. Tilt the Gantry to BWD 25 deg. position.
4. Remove the Protect Cover for Right Side Rollers.
5. Tilt the Gantry to 0 deg. position.
6. Unscrew and remove the two Gantry Tilt Adjustment Bracket from lower side of Service Angle (Cover Stand).
This bracket is attached on the Service angle which is used for removing the Gantry cover.
7. Install the two Gantry Tilt Adjustment Bracket on both sides by using two screws removed at previous step,
as shown in Illustration 5–23.
8. Tilt the Gantry backward until the Gantry tilt is stopped by the tilt adjustment bracket.
Illustration 5–23 Tilt Tool Installation
Tilt Adjustment Bracket (P/N 2199986)

(Both Sides)
5–2 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
5-2-1 Tilt Rollers (For Non–Mobile System) (continued)
Tilt Roller Clearance Check

9. Verify that any roller can not be rotated by hand.
If a roller was rotated, perform the following adjustment to gain no clearance.
Illustration 5–24 Tilt Rollers
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
TABLE
(RIGHT SIDE ROLLERS)

NO CLEARANCE
5–3 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
Upper Roller Adjustment

a. Loosen the three roller tensioner mounting bolts, so that the roller can be touched on the arched frame of the
Gantry by spring force. See Illustration 5–25.
b. Verify that any roller can not be rotated by hand (no clearance).
If the roller was rotated, perform the following adjustment:
i. Loosen the roller tensioner lock nut.
ii. Loosen the roller tensioner bolt until it does not touch the spring.
iii. Tighten the tensioner bolt until it touches the spring, and then turn it CW (clockwise) two turns further.
iv. Tighten the tensioner lock nut.
c. Tighten the three roller tensioner mounting bolts in the order shown in illustration 5–25 ( 1 ∼ 3 ).
d. Repeat steps a to c until all the upper rollers (both on the right and left sides) are adjusted.
Illustration 5–25 Upper Roller Adjustment
Tensioner Bolt Tensioner Lock Nut
Spring ÂÂ
ÂÂ
3 ÂÂ
2 1
TABLE
Tensioner Mounting
Bolts
(RIGHT SIDE ROLLERS)
5–4 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
Lower Roller Adjustment (on Right Side Only)

f. Loosen the four roller tensioner mounting bolts.
g. Loosen the roller tensioner lock nut.
h. Tighten the tensioner bolt until the roller touches the arched frame.
i. Tighten the tensioner lock nut securely.
j. Tighten the four roller tensioner mounting bolts securely.
Illustration 5–26 Lower Roller Adjustment
Tensioner Mounting Bolts
TABLE
Tensioner Lock Nut
Tensioner Bolt
Tensioner Mounting Bolts
10. Remove the two Gantry Tilt Adjustment Bracket, and attach them onto the Service Angle.
11. Install the Protect Cover, removed at step 4.
5–5 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
5-2-2 Tilt Rollers (For Mobile System)
1. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, and “XG Power” switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Tilt the Gantry to BWD 25 deg. position.
4. Remove the Protect Cover for Right Side Rollers.
5. Tilt the Gantry to the FWD 10 degree position.
6. Install the two Tilt Zero Adjuster on both sides.
7. Tilt the Gantry BWD until the Gantry tilt is stopped by the Tilt Zero Adjuster.
Illustration 5–27 Tilt Zero Adjuster Installation
Tilt Zero Adjuster
Tilt Zero Adjuster
Gantry Side Frame
5–6 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
5-2-2 Tilt Rollers (For Mobile System) (continued)

8. Verify that any roller can not be rotated by hand. If not, perform the following adjustment to gain no clearance.
a. Upper Roller Adjustment:
i. Loosen the three mounting bolts.
ii. Push the Tilt Roller to the Tilt Rail.
iii. Tighten the three roller tensioner mounting bolts in the order shown in illustration 5–28 ( 1 ∼ 3 ).
iv. Repeat steps i to iii until all the upper rollers (both on the right and left sides) are adjusted.
b. Lower Roller Adjustment (on Right Side Only):
i. Loosen the four mounting bolts.
ii. Loosen the tensioner lock nut.
iii. Tighten the tensioner bolt until the roller touches the Tilt Rail.
iv. Tighten the tensioner lock nut securely.
v. Tighten the four roller tensioner mounting bolts securely.
9. Remove the two Tilt Zero Adjuster.
Illustration 5–28 Tilt Rollers
Tilt Zero Adjuster
Upper Rollers
Mounting Bolt No Clearance

(x3)
Lower Rollers
Mounting Bolt
3 (x4)
1
2 Tensioner
Lock Nut
Tensioner
Bolt
No Clearance
5–7 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
5-3 TILT SPEED
Tilt Speed Check

1. Verify that all the Gantry covers are installed.
3. Set the Gantry to the BWD 30 deg. position using the ‘BWD’ button on the Gantry Panel.
4. Measure the time from BWD 30 deg. to FWD 30 deg., and from FWD 30 deg. to BWD 30 deg. Verify that their
values are in the following specified ranges:
Table 5–1 Tilt Speed Specification
Operation Time
From BWD 30 deg. to FWD 30 deg. 573 sec. (54 ∼ 60 sec)
From FWD 30 deg. to BWD 30 deg. 573 sec. (54 ∼ 60 sec)
Note
Actually, the tilt operation stops at 0 deg. when you tilt the Gantry from BWD 30 deg. to FWD 30 deg.,
or from FWD 30 deg. to BWD 30 deg. For this reason, measure the time in the following way:
Time from BWD 30 deg. to FWD 30 deg. Time from BWD 30 deg. to 0 deg.
+
Time from 0 deg. to FWD 30 deg.
Time from FWD 30 deg. to BWD 30 deg. Time from FWD 30 deg. to 0 deg.
+
Time from 0 deg. to BWD 30 .deg.
If the time is out of the specified range, perform the ‘Tilt Speed Adjustment’.
5–8 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
5-3 TILT SPEED (continued)
Tilt Speed Adjustment

5. Set the hydraulic valve adjusters to initial values:
b. Remove the valve cover by unscrewing 4 screws (see Illustration 5–29).
Illustration 5–29 Valve Adjuster Location
Hydraulic Valve Adjuster
Valve Cover
5–9 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123

c. Mark the current position of Hydraulic Valve Adjuster(s) for reference. See Illustration 5–30.
d. Rotate the two adjusters (FWD and BWD) to the CW limit (S limit). See Illustration 5–30.
Illustration 5–30 Hydraulic Valve Adjuster
F : FAST
S S: SLOW
BWD
F
S
FWD
e. Rotate the two adjusters CCW to the adjuster scale intervals shown in Table below.
Table 5–2 Initial Setting Value
BWD FWD
CCW 22 ± 0.2 CCW 13 ± 0.5
These numbers equal the number or intervals from the CW di-
rection (S) limit.
5–10 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123

6. Adjust the FWD adjuster:
a. Measure the time of movement from BWD 30 deg. to FWD 30 deg.
b. If the time is 57 ± 3 sec, go to step 7; otherwise, perform the following:
If the time is less than 54 sec, rotate the FWD adjuster for 1.0 scale interval in the CW (S) direction.
If the time is more than 60 sec, rotate the FWD adjuster for 1.0 scale interval in the CCW (F) direction.
c. Repeat steps a and b, until the time equals 57 ± 3 sec.
7. Adjust the BWD adjusters:
a. Measure the time of movement from FWD 30 deg. to BWD 30 deg.
b. If the time is 57 ±3 sec, go to step 8; otherwise, perform the following:
If the time is less than 54 sec, rotate the BWD adjuster for 1/5 of a scale interval in the CW (S) direction.
If the time is more than 60 sec, rotate the BWD adjuster for 1/5 of a scale interval in the CCW (F) direction.
c. Repeat steps a and b, until the time equals 57 ±3 sec.
8. Erase the original positions and mark the final adjusted positions
9. Install the valve cover of the pump box.
5–11 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
5-4 TILT ANGLE
5-4-1 Tilt Angle Check

1. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.
2. Remove the Gantry front and left side covers.
4. Press the ‘FWD’ button continually until the Gantry tilt to the FWD 30 degree position (by Gantry display).
5. Verify that the tilt mark(FWD30) on the tilt arm meets the rear edge of the Gantry side frame (see illustration
5–31). If the rear edge does not meet the tilt mark(FWD30), perform ‘5–4–2 Tilt Angle Adjustment’.
6. Continually press ‘BWD’ until the Gantry stops. Verify that the Gantry stops at the 0_ tilt position and the Tilt
Display shows ‘0’. If the rear edge does not meet the tilt mark(0 deg.), perform ‘5–4–2 Tilt Angle Adjustment’.
7. Release the ‘BWD’ button, and then press it again until the Gantry tilts to BWD 30 degree position (by Gantry
display).
8. Verify that the tilt mark(BWD30) on the tilt arm meets the front edge of the Gantry side frame (see illustration
5–31). If the front edge does not meet the tilt mark(BWD30), perform ‘5–4–2 Tilt Angle Adjustment’.
Illustration 5–31 Tilt Mark
Rear Edge Tilt Arm
Front Edge
Tilt Mark
(0 deg.)
Tilt Mark
(FWD30) Gantry Side Frame
Tilt Mark
(BWD30)
5–12 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
5-4-2 Tilt Angle Adjustment

If the tilt angle on the Gantry display does not correspond to the tilt mark on the tilt arm, perform the adjustment as
follows:
1. Set Dip Switch T6 on the TGP board to ON (illustration 5–32) .
2. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board, until the height display of the Gantry display panel indicates ‘000’. (refer
to illustration 5–32)
Illustration 5–32 TGP Board
CHANGE LED RESET
TEST1
ON
TEST2
OFF
T1 T8 S1
TGP BOARD
3. Press the FWD button until the Gantry tilt forward to FWD 30 degree position (by tilt mark FWD30 on the tilt arm).
4. Set the position display to ‘5’ using INLM (Internal Landmark) and EXLM (External Landmark) keys on the Gantry
Switch Panel.
5. Push TEST2 switch on the TGP board.
a. If CHANGE LED is lit, press FAST and RANGE keys (Gantry Switch Panel) together.
b. Verify that CHANGE LED is OFF.
6. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board, until the height display of the Gantry display panel indicates ‘001’.
7. Press the BWD button until the Gantry tilt backward to BWD 30 degree position (by tilt mark BWD30 on the tilt
arm).
8. Set the position display to ‘605’ using INLM and EXLM keys on the Gantry Switch Panel.
a. If CHANGE LED is lit, press FAST and RANGE keys (Gantry Switch Panel) together.
b. Verify that CHANGE LED is OFF.
10. Set Dip Switch T6 on the TGP board to OFF.
11. Perform the Tilt Angle Check (refer to 5-4-1 Tilt Angle Check ).
5–13 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
5-5 TILT BWD LOCK SWITCH POSITION (FOR MOBILE SYSTEM)

Prior to performing this check and adjustment, the TILT ANGLE should have been completed.
1. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
4. Remove the Tilt Sensor Stay with the Lock Switch Assy by unscrewing its 2 screws.
5. Loosen the two screws that fasten the Tilt Sensor Bracket to the Tilt Arm.
Illustration 5–33 Tilt BWD Sensor
Tilt Sensor Bracket
Tilt Sensor Stay and

Tilt Stopper Lock Switch Assy
Gantry Side Frame
5–14 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
5-5 TILT BWD LOCK SWITCH POSITION (FOR MOBILE SYSTEM) (continued)
6. Press the ‘BWD’ button continually until the Gantry tilt to the BWD 30 degree position (by Gantry display).
7. Set the position of the Tilt Stopper as follows:
a. Loosen two screws that fasten the Tilt Stopper to the Tilt Arm.
b. Push the Tilt Stopper to the edge of the Gantry Side Frame, and tighten the screws, and torque to 563kg/cm.
c. Repeat steps a through b for the other side.
8. Install the Tilt Sensor Stay removed in step 4.
9. Set the position of the Tilt Sensor Bracket so that the Lock Switch is activated, and tighten the screws.
10. Tilt the Gantry from 0 degree to BWD 30 degree position repeatedly and check the following:
D Verify that the Lock Switch is activated in the BWD 30 degree position.
Illustration 5–34 Tilt Sensor and Lock Switch Positioning
Tilt Sensor Stay

Lock Switch Assy
Tilt Sensor Bracket
Tilt Stopper
BWD 30degree. Position
5–15 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123
5–16 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
SECTION 6 – COLLIMATOR
6-1 APERTURE RATIO (FOR SINGLE DETECTOR)

1. Perform the following scans, following the steps below.
Exam No. Scan Parameter/Condition

Thickness Focus Scan Parameter/Condition
1 10 mm Large
2 1 mm Small Other Scan Parameters (common to all the scans):
3 2 mm Small Air, Stationary, 3sec, 120kV, 60mA
(1sec: For Gantry 2200997–2, 2200999–2
4 3 mm Large 2201000–2, 2249696–2)
5 5 mm Large Bow–tie Filter: Installed
6 7 mm Large
c. Perform the scans listed above.
2. Obtain the following mean files (vectors) from the acquired raw data, by repeating the steps below.
lected
(10 mm Thickness Scan) Exam#1, Series#1, Acq No:1 1 10mm
b. Select the raw data file (Exam#1, Series#1, Acq No: 1) from the Raw data browser lists.
c. Perform Fan Data with the following settings, then click on OK:

Reference Correction No
6–1 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
6-1 APERTURE RATIO (For Single Detector) (continued)

d. Select Active Mean as “Select Type of Data:”.
e. Click on Store to File.
f. Enter 1 as “Mean Vector Number” and 7mm as “File Comment”, then click on OK.
g. Click on Select RawID... to return to the Fan Data Format screen, and repeat steps b to f to make Vector files 2
to 6.
3. Perform division operations to obtain the following mean files (vectors), by repeating the steps below.
Vector Division Vector Data Files Output Vector Number Comment

File A File B
No.2 (1 mm) / No.1 (10 mm) 2 1 7 1/10
No.3 (2 mm) / No.1 (10 mm) 3 1 8 2/10
No.4 (3 mm) / No.1 (10 mm) 4 1 9 3/10
No.5 (5 mm) / No.1 (10 mm) 5 1 10 5/10
No.6 (7 mm) / No.1 (10 mm) 6 1 11 7/10

d. Enter 7 as “Output Vector Number” and 1/10 (or 1/7 Ach) as “Comment”, then click on OK.
e. Repeat steps c to d to make Vector files 8 to 11.
4. Check the aperture ratio using View Vector:

View Vector
b. Select MeanFile 7– 1/10 (or MeanFile 7– 1/7) as “Select SupMean File:”.
6–2 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
6-1 APERTURE RATIO (For Single Detector) (continued)
Check for ‘(1 mm) / (10 mm)’

c. Click on [Plot].
Enter 0.10 for DATA MIN.
Enter 0.16 for DATA MAX. (The specification for the vector file No. 7 is 0.10 ∼ 0.16)
A graph like in Illustration 6–1 is drawn.

Check that the graph (aperture ratio) falls within the specification, 0.10 ∼ 0.16.
Illustration 6–1 Aperture Ratio
0.16
0.10
Channel
Check for Other Aperture Ratios

e. Check the other aperture ratios (vector files No. 8 (9, ...)) as described in Table below, by similarly repeating
steps b through d. (at step b, select 8, (9, ...) for a vector No., respectively)
Table 6–1 Aperture Ratio Specification (For Single Detector)
Vector File No. Aperture Ratio Specification

7 (1 mm) / (10 mm) 0.13 ± 0.03 (0.10 ∼ 0.16)
8 (2 mm) / (10 mm) 0.2 ± 0.03 (0.17 ∼ 0.23)
9 (3 mm) / (10 mm) 0.3 ± 0.03 (0.27 ∼ 0.33)
10 (5 mm) / (10 mm) 0.5 ± 0.05 (0.45 ∼ 0.55)
11 (7 mm) / (10 mm) 0.7 ± 0.07 (0.63 ∼ 0.77)
6–3 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
6-2 APERTURE RATIO (FOR TWIN SYSTEM)

1. Perform the following scans, following the steps below.
Exam No. Scan Parameter/Condition

Thickness Focus Scan Parameter/Condition
1 7 mm Large
2 1 mm Small Other Scan Parameters (common to all the scans):
3 2 mm Large Air, Stationary, 1sec, 120kV, 60mA
Auto Collimator ON (T/G Control)
4 3 mm Large
5 5 mm Large
Bow–tie Filter: Installed
6 10 mm Large
7 10:1 or Large
10:2 or
6:1*
8 0.5 mm* Small
* : For the system with Sub–mm (0.5mm) or Asymmetric scan (10:1, 10:2, or 6:1) option ONLY
b. Select T/G control → Auto Collimator ON, then click on Back.
c. Select Stationary from ‘Technic – [Scan Type]’.
d. Perform the scans listed above.
6–4 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
6-1 APERTURE RATIO (FOR TWIN SYSTEM) (continued)

2. Obtain the following mean files (vectors) from the acquired raw data, by repeating the steps below.
lected
(7 mm–Ach Thickness Scan) Exam#1, Series#1, Acq No:1 1 7A
(Asym–Ach Thickness Scan) Exam#7, Series#1, Acq No:1 7 AsymA
(0.5 mm–Ach Thickness Scan) Exam#8, Series#1, Acq No:1 8 0.5A
(7 mm–Bch Thickness Scan) Exam#1, Series#1, Acq No:1 9 7B
(Asym–Bch Thickness Scan) Exam#7, Series#1, Acq No:1 15 AsymB
(0.5 mm–Bch Thickness Scan) Exam#8, Series#1, Acq No:1 16 0.5B
Note: A" described in File Comment means A channel for the Twin system ONLY.
b. Select A side. (A channel)

6–5 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123

g. Enter 1 as “Mean Vector Number” and 7A as “File Comment”, then click on OK.
2 to 8.
i. Select B side. (B channel) Then repeat steps c to h above to make Vector file 9 to 16.
Vector Division Vector Data Files Output Vector Number Comment

File A File B
No.1 (7A) + No.9 (7B) 1 9 17 7A+7B
No.2 (1A) + No.10 (1B) 2 10 18 1A+1B
No.3 (2A) + No.11 (2B) 3 11 19 2A+2B
No.4 (3A) + No.12 (3B) 4 12 20 3A+3B
No.5 (5A) + No.13 (5B) 5 13 21 5A+5B
No.6 (10A) + No.14 (10B) 6 14 22 10A+10B
No.7 (AsymA) + No.15 7 15 23 Asy-
(AsymB) mA+AsymB
No.8 (0.5A) + No.16 (0.5B) 8 16 24 0.5A+0.5B
Note: A" described in File Comment means A channel for the Twin system ONLY.

b. Select A+B from ‘Select Operation.’
d. Enter 17 as “Output Vector Number” and 7A+7B as “Comment”, then click on OK.
6–6 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123

Vector Division Vector Data Files Output Vector Num- Comment

ber
File A File B
No.18 (1A+1B) / No.17 (7A+7B) 18 17 25 1/7
No.19 (2A+2B) / No.17 (7A+7B) 19 17 26 2/7
No. 20 (3A+3B) / No.17 (7A+7B) 20 17 27 3/7
No. 21 (5A+5B) / No.17 (7A+7B) 21 17 28 5/7
No.22 (10A+10B) / No.17 22 17 29 10/7
(7A+7B)
No.23 (AsymA+AsymB) / No.17 23 17 30 Asym/7
(7A+7B)
No. 24 (0.5A+0.5B) / No.17 24 17 31 0.5/7
(7A+7B)

d. Enter 25 as “Output Vector Number” and 1/7 as “Comment”, then click on OK.
5. Check the aperture ratio using View Vector:

View Vector
b. Select MeanFile 25– 1/7 as “Select SupMean File:”.
6–7 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
Check for ‘(1 mm) / (7 mm)’

c. Click on [Plot].
Enter 0.11 for DATA MIN.
Enter 0.17 for DATA MAX. (The specification for the vector file No. 25 is 0.11 ∼ 0.17)

Check that the graph (aperture ratio) falls within the specification, 0.11 ∼ 0.17.
Illustration 6–2 Aperture Ratio
0.17
0.11
Channel
6–8 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
Check for Other Aperture Ratios

e. Check the other aperture ratios (vector files No. 26 ~ 31) as described in Table below, by similarly repeating
steps b through d. (at step b, select 26 ~ 31) for a vector No., respectively)
Table 6–1 Aperture Ratio Specification (For Twin Detector ONLY)
Vector File No. Aperture Ratio Specification

25 (1 mm) / (7 mm) 0.14± 0.03 (0.11 ∼ 0.17)
26 (2 mm) / (7 mm) 0.28 ± 0.03 (0.25 ∼ 0.31)
27 (3 mm) / (7 mm) 0.43 ± 0.04 (0.39 ∼ 0.47)
28 (5 mm) / (7 mm) 0.71 ± 0.07 (0.64 ∼ 0.78)
29 (10 mm) / (7 mm) * 1.43 ± 0.14 (1.29 ∼ 1.57)
(See note below.)
30 (Asym) / (7 mm) 0.71 ± 0.07 (10:1 or 10:2) (0.64 ∼ 0.78) (10:1 or 10:2)
0.43 ± 0.04 (6:1) (0.39 ∼ 0.47) (6:1)
31 (0.5 mm) / (7 mm) 0.045 ± 0.02 (0.025 ∼ 0.065)
Note: For 10/7 file (No.29 file) ONLY, the following

shape will be created.
1.57
1.29
Channel
6–9 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
6-3 BOW–TIE FILTER CURVE TEST
General Information
Prerequisites for this test are as follows:
D The DAS/Detector has been powered ON for more than two hours.
D The x–ray alignment (‘Plane of Rotation’, ‘Detector Bean–on–Window’, ‘Q–cal Channel Radio (For Twin
system ONLY)’, ‘Iso Center Alignment’, and ‘Filter Center Alignment’) is proper.
After ending this test, the ‘Filter Center Alignment’ check/adjustment is required.
Replace the filter if the test below fails; or, replace the filter approximately every 100,000 scans, since the filter materi-
al will be gradually deteriorated by x–ray radiation, which may cause crack or break in the filter.
1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
b. Remove the gantry front and both side covers.
2. Perform two air stationary scans with the filter installed and removed:
6–10 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
6-3 BOW–TIE FILTER CURVE TEST (continued)

c. Perform the following scans:
Scan 1 Scan 2
Scan Time : 3.0 sec Scan Time : 3.0 sec
Thickness : 10 mm Thickness : 10 mm
Focus : Large Focus : Large
KV : 120 kV KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA MA : 60 mA
Filter : Installed Filter : Removed
For filter removal, refer to the Component Replacement manual.

(Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch prior to removing the filter!)
3. Store the following vector files (mean files) 1 and 2 out of the acquired raw data, by repeating the steps below.
Raw Data File Raw Data File No. to be SeĆ Mean Vector No. File Comment
lected
(Filter Scan) Exam#1, Series#1, Acq No: 1 1 Filter Ach
(No Filter Scan) Exam#2, Series#1, Acq No: 1 2 No Filter Ach
Note: Ach" described in File Comment means A channel for the Twin system ONLY. Bch" should
be commented when testing B channel.
b. For Twin ONLY:


Reference Correction Yes
g. Enter 1 as “Mean Vector Number” and Filter Ach as “File Comment”, then click on OK.
h. Click on Select RawID... to return to the Fan Data Format screen, and repeat steps b to f to make Vector files 2
.
6–11 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
6-3 BOW–TIE FILTER CURVE TEST (continued)

4. Apply a division to the vector files No.1 and No.2:

d. Enter 3 as “Output Vector Number” and Filter/NoFilter Ach as “Comment”, then click on OK.
5. Check the calculated vector file No.3 using View Vector:
View Vector
b. Select MeanFile 3– Filter/NoFilter Ach as “Select SupMean File:”.
c. Select the vector file No. 3.
d. Click on [Plot].
e. Select ‘Manual Scale.’
Enter 0 for Data Min.

Enter 50 for Data Max. (Change this, if necessary)
A filter curve is drawn, as is shown in Illustration 6–3.

Check that the curve is smooth.
Illustration 6–3 Filter Curve
40.000
10.000
6. For Twin ONLY:

7. Perform ‘Filter Center Alignment’ of ‘System’ Functional Check/Adjustment – ‘X–ray Alignment.’
6–12 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
6-4 APERTURE Z–AXIS BELT TENSION

1. Preparation:
a. Set the Gantry to the 0° tilt position and lower the Table to the lowest position.
b. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
c. Remove the Gantry front cover.
d. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board.
e. Rotate the Gantry until the x–ray tube reaches the 12 o’clock position by hand.
f. Switch OFF the Service Switch.
2. Disconnect the cable connectors of the L_Fan Assy, and remove the following covers (to access the CIF board).
DAS Cover_L
FR Cover
3. Verify no slack in the Aperture Z–Axis Belt .
6–13 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
6-4 APERTURE Z–AXIS BELT TENSION (continued)

4. Set the SW2 on the CIF Board to the Vibration Mode (see illustration below), and push the SW1 switch on the
CIF board once. The pulley of the Z–Axis Motor begins to vibrate.
SW2
If the belt tension is correct, both sides of the belt (upper and lower) are vibrating.
if not, adjust the belt tension as follows:
a. Loosen the four Allen screws that fasten the Motor to the motor bracket.
b. Rotate the pulley of the screw assy in the CW direction by hand, until the upper or lower belt vibrates.
i. If the upper belt is vibrating, increase the belt tension by rotating the adjustment bolt in the CCW direc-
tion, until both sides of the belt vibrates.
ii. If the lower belt is vibrating, decrease the belt tension by rotating the adjustment bolt in the CW direction,
until both sides of the belt vibrates.
c. Push the SW4 switch on the CIF board once, and tighten the four Allen screws (30kgf.cm).
d. Push the SW1 switch, and check if the both sides of the belt are vibrating.
e. Push the SW4 switch.
f. Unscrew one of the four Allen screws, and apply Locktite 242 to the screw, then tighten it again with 30kgf.cm.
g. Repeat the above step for the other screws, one by one.
5. Set the SW2 on the CIF Board to normal position.
6. Install the FR Cover and DAS Cover_L.
Illustration 6–4 Z–Axis Belt
Allen Screws Z–Axis Motor Pulley Belt Screw Assy Pulley
Upper Belt Screw Assy

Pulley
Z–Axis Motor
Pulley Lower Belt
Allen Screws Adjustment Bolt
6–14 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
SECTION 7 – TABLE AND GANTRY
7-1 TABLE POSITIONING

The following procedure adjusts the Table position in the right–left direction so that the Table center line and the scan
center are aligned. See Illustration 7–1.
After completing the adjustment, anchor the Table; see the Installation manual.
1. Preparation:
a. Tilt the Gantry to 0 deg.
b. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
c. Remove the front and both side covers from the Gantry.
Illustration 7–1 Table Right–left Positioning
GANTRY
Scan Center
TABLE
Right–Left
Table Center Line Direction
7–1 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
7-1 TABLE POSITIONING (continued)
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD !
2. Perform an axial scan of the head holder:
a. Mount the axial head holder to the end of the cradle.
b. Switch ON the positioning lights.
c. Advance the cradle into the Gantry until the internal light cuts the approximately middle section of the head
holder.
d. Perform an axial scan of the head holder using the following technique:
Scan Parameters: 35 cm FOV, 3 sec, 120 kV, 60 mA, 10 mm Thickness
3. Check whether the Table center line and the scan center are aligned:
Verify that the difference in the distances ( |1–2| ) is within ± 2 mm. If not, proceed to next step.
1 2
7–2 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
7-1 TABLE POSITIONING (continued)

4. Adjust the Table right – left position:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ and ‘Table/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Remove the Table front and rear bottom covers.

(Refer to the Component Replacement manual, if necessary)
c. Loosen the Table base mounting nuts. See Illustration 7–2.
d. Move the Table to center the head holder in the scan plane, according to step 3.
e. Tighten the Table base mounting nuts securely.
f. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
g. Return to step 2.
Illustration 7–2 Table Mounting Screws
Mounting Screw
(x2) Gantry Base
Table Base Washer
7–3 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
7-2 POSITIONING LIGHTS
7-2-1 Halogen Positioning Lights (NP)

Five positioning lights are equipped on the Gantry rotative frame; these are:
Inner right and left lights
Outer right and left lights
Outer top light.
Illustration 7–3 Halogen Positioning Lights Locations
RIGHT–LEFT
DIRECTION
INNER INNER
HORIZONTAL RIGHT
LEFT GANTRY
DIRECTION
OUTER OUTER
LEFT RIGHT
GANTRY
OUTER
TOP
OUTER
TOP
TABLE VERTICAL TABLE
DIRECTION
(TOP VIEW)
(SIDE VIEW)
The positions of the Inner right and left lights, and Outer right and left lights are adjusted in the horizontal and vertical
directions.
The position of the Outer top light is adjusted in the right–left and horizontal directions.
7–4 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
7-2-1 Halogen Positioning Lights (NP) (continued)
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD !
1. Preparation.
a. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch at the Gantry rear base.
b. Remove the Gantry front and both side cover.
2. Place a fine pin (ex. M3 size hexagonal wrench) on the center of the phantom holder. See Illustration 7–4.
Illustration 7–4 Pin Positioning
Scan of Center Plane
Head Holder
7–5 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
Positioning a Pin at the Scan Center

Refer to Operator Manual, where necessary.
3. Position the pin perpendicular to the scan plane:
a. Perform a 0 deg. scout scan on the pin.
b. Magnify the image by a four factor in the following way:
i. Press the [Crsr] key to display a crosshair (+) cursor.
ii. Position the cursor approximately at the center of the pin image.
iii. Press the [Mag] key.
iv. Enter the magnification factor of four.
c. Display a vertical line in the following way:
i. Press the [Image Meas] key.
ii. Select Set Cursor.
iii. Select Vertical Line.
iv. Set V Angle to 0 deg.
d. Move the vertical line using the trackball onto the pin image to check that the pin and the vertical line are
aligned. See Illustration 7–5.
e. Position the pin so that the pin and the vertical line are aligned, according to the image.
f. Repeat steps a through e, until the pin and the vertical line are alined within ±0.5 mm.
After the pin is correctly positioned, do not move it.
Illustration 7–5 0 deg. Scout Image of Wrench
Align the Wrench

and the Vertical Line
Phantom Holder
7–6 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123

4. Position the pin at the scan center:
a. Perform an axial scan on the pin with the following settings;
Scan Parameters: 3 sec, 120 kV, 60 mA, 10 mm Thickness, 35 cm Recon FOV, x = y = 0
b. Display a grid.
c. Measure the distance between the pin and the scan center in the following way:
i. Press the [Crsr] key to display a crosshair cursor.
ii. Move the cursor using the trackball to the center of the pin, and press the [Dist Angle] key to copy the
cursor over the pin location.
iii. Move the cursor vertically to the X axis; press [Dist Angle] again, to deposit the end location and display
the distance between the pin and the X axis (A). See Illustration 7–6.
iv. Perform the above to measure the distance between the pin and the Y axis (B).
d. Position the pin so that the pin is placed at the scan center, according to the distances measured at the above
step.
Use the up–down adjuster and right–left adjuster of the phantom holder (one turn: 1 mm movement). (The pin
direction is adjusted parallel with the Gantry axial direction, per step 3)
e. Repeat steps a through d, until the pin is positioned at the scan center within ±0.5 mm.
Illustration 7–6 Axial Image of Wrench
Scan Center
Wrench
7–7 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
Vertical Position – Right and Left Lights

5. Turn ON the positioning lights.
6. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch at the Gantry rear base.
7. Adjust the inner right and left lights in the vertical direction using the ‘A’ screw so that the horizontal light and the
pin are aligned within ±0.5 mm. See Illustration 7–7.
Adjust the light angle using the ‘D’ lever, if necessary.
8. Move the cradle in the Out direction over 190 mm.
9. Adjust the outer right and left lights in the vertical direction using the ‘A’ screw so that the horizontal light and the
pin are aligned within ±0.5 mm.
Illustration 7–7 Positioning Light Adjustment
Adjusting Tube
Adjust Adjust A
Direction Screw/Lever
1 – 1’ A Steel Plate
2 – 2’ B a
3 – 3’ D
Before adjusting A, B, or D, loosen a,
b, or d respectively; after adjustment, b
tighten a, b, or d accordingly.
2
1
B
2’
1’ 3’
1 D
3’
d
Light Screen (A hex screw is installed inside this hole)
3
2
1’
2’
7–8 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
Right–Left Position – Top Light

10. Adjust the outer top light in the right–left direction using the ‘A’ screw so that the horizontal (Gantry axial direction)
light and the pin are aligned within ±0.5 mm.
Verification of Table Positioning

11. Verify that the Table is installed perpendicular to the Gantry:
a. Perform a scout scan on the 25 cm water phantom at 0 deg. azimuth.

The scout image and a horizontal line appear.
b. Verify that the horizontal line and the phantom surface are parallel. See Illustration 7–8.
Illustration 7–8 Table Positioning Check
Phantom
Horizontal Line
Phantom Surface
7–9 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
Positioning the Water Phantom

12. Align the position of the water phantom surface to the scan plane:
a. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch at the Gantry rear base.
b. Perform a scout scan on the 25 cm water phantom at 90 deg. azimuth.

The scout image and a vertical line appear.
c. Adjust the direction of the phantom holder, using the front surface angle adjuster (see Illustration 7–4, accord-
ing to the image, so that the phantom surface is parallel with the vertical line.
d. Repeat steps b and c, until the line and the phantom surface are parallel.
e. Move the vertical line until it just touches the surface of the phantom scout image. See Illustration 7–9.
f. Press the [Enter] key.
g. Press the [End] key.
h. Select ‘Confirm’ on the Touch Panel screen and press the ‘Table set’ button.
The phantom surface moves to the scan plane position.
Illustration 7–9 Localize on the Phantom Surface
Phantom Surface
Vertical Line
7–10 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
Horizontal Position – Right and Left Lights

13. Turn ON the positioning lights.
14. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch at the Gantry rear base.
15. Adjust the inner right and left lights in the horizontal direction using the ‘B’ screw so that the vertical light and the
phantom surface are aligned within ±0.5 mm.
16. Move the cradle in the Out direction over 190 mm.
17. Adjust the outer right and left lights in the horizontal direction using the ‘B’ screw so that the vertical light and the
phantom surface are aligned within ±0.5 mm.
Horizontal Position – Top Lights

18. Adjust the outer top light in the horizontal direction using the ‘B’ screw so that the right–left light and the phantom
surface are aligned within ±0.5 mm.
7–11 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
7-2-2 Laser Positioning Lights (NP+/NP++/Twin)
CAUTION
Damage to visual function !!
Never look directly into the laser beam positioning lights. The laser beam can severely harm
the eyes.

Eight positioning lights are equipped on the Gantry rotative frame; these are:
Outer Top right and left

Left upper and lower
Right upper and lower
Inner Left and Right
Illustration 7–10 Laser Positioning Lights Locations
RIGHT–LEFT DIRECTION
GANTRY
Top Left Top Right

Top Left /Right
Inner Left/Right
Inner Left Inner Right
Outer Upper Left/Right
VERTICAL Outer Lower Left/Right

DIRECTION
Outer Outer TABLE

Upper Left Upper Right
Outer Outer
Lower Left Lower Right
GANTRY (FRONT VIEW)

(SIDE VIEW)
HORIZONTAL DIRECTION
The positioning lights are adjusted in the direction shown below:
Top Left, Outer Upper Left and Outer Lower Right: horizontal direction.
Outer Lower Left, Outer Upper Right, Inner Left and Right: vertical direction.
Top Left: right–left direction.
7–12 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
7-2-2 Laser Positioning Lights (NP+/NP++/Twin) (continued)

1. Remove the Gantry front cover.
2. Turn ON the positioning light.
3. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’ switch at rear Gantry base.
4. Position a pin at the scan center by performing the procedures of steps 1 through 4 of section 7-2-1.
Adjust the positioning lights as follows:
Top Left Light Adjustment

See illustration 7–11.
5. Loosen nuts a and adjust Allen screw A so that the beam hit the pin.
6. Loosen nuts b and adjust Allen screw B so that the beam and the pin become parallel.
7. Adjust Allen screw A so that the beam and the pin are aligned within ±0.5mm.
8. Tighten nuts a and b.
9. Verify if the beam crosses both internal and external vertical planes. If not, loosen the Allen screw D and adjust
the light.
Illustration 7–11 Top Left Light Adjustment
D B A
b
7–13 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
Outer Upper Left Light Adjustment

10. Loosen nuts a and adjust Allen screw A so that the beam hits the pin.
11. Loosen nuts b and adjust Allen screw B so that the beam and the pin become parallel. If rough adjustment is
needed prior this adjustment, loosen Allen screw D and rotate the light by hand.
12. Adjust Allen screw A so that the beam and the pin are aligned within ±0.5mm.
Illustration 7–12 Outer Upper Left Light Adjustment
A
D
14. Adjust the Outer Lower Right light by repeating the steps 10 through 13.
7–14 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
Inner Left Light Adjustment

15. Install and adjust the POLYPROPYLENE phantom by referring to steps 11 through 12 of section 7-2-1..
16. Loosen nuts a and adjust Allen screw A so that the beam hits the phantom surface.
17. Loosen nuts b and adjust Allen screw B so that the beam and the phantom surface become parallel. If rough
adjustment is needed prior this adjustment, loosen Allen screw D and rotate the light by hand.
18. Adjust Allen screw A so that the beam and the phantom surface are aligned within ±0.5mm.
Illustration 7–13 Inner Left Light Adjustment
20. Adjust the Inner Right light by repeating the steps 16 through 19.
7–15 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
Outer Lower Left Light Adjustment

21. Move the cradle out over 190mm.
22. Loosen nuts a and adjust Allen screw A so that the beam hits the phantom surface.
23. Loosen nuts b and adjust Allen screw B so that the beam and the phantom surface become parallel. If rough
adjustment is needed prior this adjustment, loosen Allen screw D and rotate the light by hand.
Illustration 7–14 Outer Lower Left Light Adjustment
A
B
a
b
26. Adjust the Outer Upper Right light by repeating the steps 22 through 25.
7–16 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
Top Right Light Adjustment

27. Loosen nuts a and adjust Allen screw A so that the beam hits the phantom surface. If rough adjustment is needed,
loosen Allen screw D and rotate the light by hand.
28. Loosen nuts b and adjust Allen screw B so that the beam and the phantom surface become parallel.
Illustration 7–15 Top Left Light Adjustment
a
D
7–17 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
7-3 GANTRY PANEL SWITCH CHECK
7-3-1 Table Up, Down, Height

1. Tilt the Gantry to 0 deg.
Move the cradle to the furthest (Out) position from the Gantry.
2. Push the ‘Down’ button until the Table reaches its lowest position.
3. Hold down the ‘Up’ button.
Verify that the ‘cradle longitudinal position display’ changes to ‘Table height display’, and that the Table stops on
the way up with the ‘Table height display’ blinking.
Free the ‘UP’ button and hold it down again until the highest position is reached.
4. Return the Table to its lowest position using the ‘Down’ button.
5. Do the same check (step 3) with the Foot Switches.
6. Push the ‘Height’ button and verify that the ‘longitudinal display’ changes to ‘height display.’
7-3-2 Table In, Out, Fast

1. Raise the Table to the highest position.
2. Verify that the cradle moves In and Out smoothly when pressing the ‘In’ or ‘Out’ button on the Gantry Panel
Switch.
3. Press the ‘In’ or “Out’ button together with the ‘Fast’ button and verify that the cradle moves smoothly at approxi-
mately twice the speed as in step 2; check both In and Out.
7-3-3 Move to Scan, Zero

2. Push the ‘Zero’ button. Verify that the ‘Table position’ display is ‘0.0’.
3. Push ‘Move to Scan’ and verify that the ‘In’ LED starts to blink.
4. Continually press the ‘In’ button until the cradle stops. Verify that the cradle moves 175 mm, and that the ‘Table
position’ display increments to “–175”, and then turns to ‘0.0’.
7-3-4 Tilt Range

1. Push the ‘Tilt Range’ button.
2. Verify that the ‘tilt display’ changes to ‘tilt range display.’
7–18 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
7-3 GANTRY PANEL SWITCH CHECK (continued)
7-3-5 POSN Light

1. Push the ‘POSN Light’ button.
Verify that the Gantry rotates to the Home position and the 5 positioning lights are turned ON.
(The Gantry does not rotate, if it is already positioned at the Home position)
Verify that the positioning lights are turned OFF automatically after approximately 1 minute.
(If the positioning lights are not turned ON, push the reset switch on the TGP Board once and perform the above)
7-3-6 Home
1. Raise the Table to approximately –50 mm height.
Move the cradle to the 200 mm position in the In direction from the outer limit position.
Tilt the Gantry to the BWD or FWD limit.
2. Hold down the ‘Home’ button.
Verify the following:

The Gantry rotates to the 0 deg. position;
The cradle moves to the outer limit position;
The Table lowers to the lowest position.
7–19 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 22 2202123
7-4 TABLE AND GANTRY INTERLOCK

Tilt the Gantry to the 0 deg. position.
Move the cradle to any position except the out limit position.
2. Move the Table down until it stops automatically; this is the interlock position.
Verify that the Table up/down function and Gantry tilt function are interlocked along the dashed line indicated in
Illustration 7–16, but that the cradle in/out function can still operate.
3. Move the cradle to the out limit position.
Verify that the Table can be lowered to the lowest position.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 with other tilt angles.
Illustration 7–16 Table/Gantry Interlock

TILT ANGLE [deg.]
TABLE HEIGHT [mm]

THE DASHED LINE IS IN/OUT INTERLOCK, WHICH IS SET AT 5 MM
OUTSIDE OF UP/DOWN – TILT INTERLOCK
7–20 GANTRY
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 30 2202123
TABLE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – ELEVATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION OF THE TABLE BOTTOM COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 MECHANICAL LIMIT CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1-3 TABLE HEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-3-1 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-2-2 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1-4 HEIGHT COMPENSATION BETWEEN TABLE AND GANTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
SECTION 2 – LONGITUDINAL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 CRADLE MECHANICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-1-1 Unlatch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-1-2 Parallel Setting of Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2-1-3 Gap between Cradle and Cradle Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2-2 CRADLE RELATIVE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2-2-1 Longitudinal Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2-2-2 Cradle Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2-3 CRADLE ABSOLUTE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2–3 CRADLE ABSOLUTE POSITION (CONTINUED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
2-4 CRADLE COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
2–4 CRADLE COMPENSATION (CONTINUED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2-5 IMS (INTERMEDIATE SUPPORT) POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2-6 STEPPING MOTOR TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
2-7 CRADLE BELT TENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
SECTION 3 – SHORT–FOOT–PRINT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

3-1 CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-2 TABLE DOWN LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3-2-1 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3-3 CRADLE IN LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3-3-1 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
i TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123
ii TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
SECTION 1 – ELEVATION FUNCTION
NOTICE
Go to Section 3 “Short–Foot–Print Function” in this Tab, when it is using Short–Foot–Print
Mode at the Site.
1-1 REMOVAL / INSTALLATION OF THE TABLE BOTTOM COVERS

1. Move the Cradle and IMS (if it has IMS) to the out limit position. (farthest from Gantry)
2. Raise the Table to its highest position.
3. Switch OFF the “Table/Tilt” switch at the Gantry rear base.
4. Remove the two screw caps from the rear bottom cover.
5. Unscrew the two screws and remove the rear bottom cover.
6. Remove the four screw covers from foot pedals.
7. Unscrew the four Allen screws and remove the four foot pedals.
8. Remove the four screw caps from the front bottom cover.
9. Unscrew the four screws and remove the front bottom cover.
10. END
Illustration 1–1 Table front and rear Bottom Covers
Screw Cover
Foot Pedal
Screw Caps
Rear Bottom Cover Front Bottom Cover
1–1 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
1-2 MECHANICAL LIMIT CHECK

The following procedure checks the mechanical limit, both at the lowest and highest positions.
1. Preparation:
a. Set the Table to it’s highest position.
b. Switch OFF the “Rotate” and “Table/Tilt” switches at the Gantry rear base.
c. Remove the left maintenance cover from the Gantry. (Refer to the “Component Replacement” manual)
d. Remove the Table front and rear bottom covers. (Refer to Section 1–1)
e. Switch ON the “Table/Tilt” switch.
2. Set the T3 switch of the TGP S1 dip–switch to ON position (illustration 1–1).

(Cancels the Table–Gantry interlock function)
3. Press and hold the ‘DOWN’ Foot Switch Pedal (further from Gantry), and the following actions occur:
The Gantry tilts to 0 degrees.
The Table lowers to its lowest position. (Mechanical Lower Limit Position)
The cradle moves to its furthest (Out) position from the Gantry.
Verify that the Table and Gantry motions are smooth and quiet.
4. Verify that the Table height ‘H’ is less than 326 mm. See Illustration 1–2 for proper measuring points.
5. Press and hold the ‘UP’ button on Gantry Panel Switch.

The Table stops at a height of approximately 785 mm.
Release the ‘UP’ button and depress it again until the Table stops at its highest position.
(Mechanical Highest Limit Position)
6. Verify that the Table height ‘H’ is more than 876 mm. See Illustration 1–2 for proper measuring points.
7. Set the T3 switch of the TGP S1 dip–switch to OFF position (illustration 1–1).
(Enable the Table–Gantry interlock function)
8. Restore the Table to original configuration.
NOTICE
Do not forge to switch OFF the T3 switch, otherwise there will be collision hazard, since the
interlock function does not work.
Note
Verify that the Table up and down operations can be correctly performed by each foot pedals , when
the above check procedure is finished and the front and rear bottom covers are re–installed.
1–2 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
1-3 TABLE HEIGHT SETTING
1-3-1 Check
1. Remove the front cover and left maintenance cover from the Gantry. (Refer to the “Component/Replacement”
manual)
2. Remove the Table front and rear bottom covers. (Refer to Section 1–1)
3. Move the Cradle and IMS (if it has IMS) to the out limit position. (farthest from Gantry).
5. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board until the height display on the Gantry Display indicates ‘011’.
TGP BOARD
Change LED RESET
ON TEST1
OFF TEST2
T1 T8
S1
T3 T6
6. Lower the Table to the down limit position.
7. Measure the Table height ‘H’. (e.g. It may be 319 mm or so.)
8. Read the value of position display, while pushing RANGE key on the Gantry Switch Panel.
9. Verify that the position display reads {(H – 311) X 2} ± 10. (e.g. It may be “16±10” or so.)
If not, perform Table Height adjustment.
10. Raise the Table to the up limit position.
11. Measure the Table height ‘H’. (e.g. It may be 879 mm or so.)
12. Read the value of position display, while pushing RANGE key on the Gantry Switch Panel.
13. Verify that the position display reads {(H – 311) X 2} ± 10. (e.g. It may be “1136±10” or so.)
If not, perform Table Height Adjustment.
1–3 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
1-3 TABLE HEIGHT SETTING (continued)
1-3-1 Check (continued)
Illustration 1–2 Table Height Measure
(FRONT VIEW)
H 74mm
9mm
FLOOR
Bottom Center Frame Approx. 50mm
1–4 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
1-3 TABLE HEIGHT SETTING (continued)
1-3-2 Adjustment
1. Move the Cradle and IMS to the out limit position.
2. Set the T3 (interlock release) switch of the TGP S1 dip–switch to ON position (illustration 1–1).
3. Lower the Table to the mechanical down limit position.

(In the mechanical down limit, the Table height ‘H’ may be approx. 311.5 mm.)
5. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board, until the height display on the Gantry Display indicates ‘009’.
6. Check the value of position display indicates “1”.
If not, adjust the position display to “1” by pressing the ‘INLM (Internal Landmark)’ or ‘EXLM (External Landmark)’
keys.
7. Push TEST2 switch on the TGP board (illustration 1–1).
If CHANGE LED is lit, press FAST and RANGE keys together on the Gantry Switch Panel.
Check that CHANGE LED is OFF.
9. Raise the Table to the mechanical up limit position.

(In the mechanical up limit, the Table height ‘H’ may be approx. 888 mm.)
11. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board, until the height display on the Gantry Display indicates ‘010’.
12. Check the value of position display indicates “1154”.
If not, adjust the position display to “1154” by pressing the ‘INLM’ or ‘EXLM’ keys.
14. Set the T3 and T6 switch of the TGP S1 dip–switch to OFF position (illustration 1–1).
1–5 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
1-4 HEIGHT COMPENSATION BETWEEN TABLE AND GANTRY

Note
This function is available for the Gantry with TGP board 2156510–5 or later.
Note
Prior to this adjustment, the table height adjustment MUST be completed.
This adjustment can cancel variations in interlock gap between the table and Gantry which occurs due to different
installed height of the Table and Gantry.
1. Raise the Table up to –50 mm ~ 0 mm down from the Up limit position (shown on Gantry display).
2. Perform an axial scan
a. Advance the cradle into the Gantry so that the position of 20 cm ~ 40 cm from the cradle edge can be scanned.
b. Perform an axial scan of the cradle.
3. Measure distance (X) between scan center and cradle upper surface.
6. Adjust the position display XXXX to {1000 + 2X} by pressing the ‘INLM’ or ‘EXLM’ keys.
e.g.: When the cradle is positioned at 10mm above the scan center, adjust display to1020 (1000 + 2x10).
When the cradle is positioned at 10mm under the scan center, adjust display to 980 (1000 + 2x (–10)).
8. Set the T6 switch of the TGP S1 dip–switch to OFF position.
1–6 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
SECTION 2 – LONGITUDINAL FUNCTION
2-1 CRADLE MECHANICS
2-1-1 Unlatch Switches

To perform the following procedure, a person should ride on the cradle, or some substitute should be placed on the
cradle.
1. Move the cradle to the Out limit position by the ‘OUT’ button.
2. While moving the cradle in the In direction by continuously pushing the ‘IN’ button, perform the following:
a. Push the Unlatch switch (‘Free’). See Illustration 2–1.
Verify that the cradle stops moving, and that the Gantry Display goes blank; this indicating that the cradle is
unlatched.
b. Push the Unlatch switch again (‘Latch’).
c. Release the ‘IN’ button, and then push it.
Verify that the cradle starts moving and the Gantry Display changes to normal (displaying a position in millime-
ter).
3. Repeat the above same check for the Unlatch switch on the opposite side.
Illustration 2–1 Unlatch Switch Location
One Unlatch Switch

per Side (Total 2)
2–1 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-1-2 Parallel Setting of Cradle

1. Switch OFF the ‘Table/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove the Table right and left side covers.
3. Move the cradle to the Out limit position by hand.
4. Adjust the position of the bearings to meet the following conditions. See Illustration 2–2.
D The Table frame and the cradle are parallel; adjust so that the difference between gap DF (measured on
the In side) and gap DR (measured on the Out side) becomes 1.5 mm or less.
D A gap of 0.1 mm or more (‘A’) exists between the cradle and the bearing (at least one of the right and left
bearings); however, the total of the gaps on the right and left sides should be 2.5 mm or less.
Illustration 2–2 Gap Between Frame and Cradle
FRAME
DF DR
CRADLE
GANTRY
FRAME
A
BEARING
2–2 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-1-3 Gap between Cradle and Cradle Support

2. Remove the Table right and left side covers.
4. Measure the distances “AR” and “AL” , and write them down with the first decimal place.
5. Remove the screw, then adjust the gap between the cradle and the cradle support bearing by using the shim, so
that the gap becomes 0.5 ± 0.1mm.
6. Adjust the position of the cradle support to meet the “AR” and “AL” recorded at step 4., and tighten the screw.
Illustration 2–3 Gap between Cradle and Cradle Support
ÈÈÈÈ
AL
ÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈ Bearing
ÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈ
Roller
ÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈ
Bearing
ÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈ AR
0.5mm ± 0.1mm
Cradle Bearing
Shim
Roller
Cradle Support
AR(AL) Screw
2–3 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-2 CRADLE RELATIVE POSITION

The following procedures (‘Longitudinal Accuracy’ and ‘Cradle Repeatability’) check the encoder and its related me-
chanics and electrics.
2-2-1 Longitudinal Accuracy

1. Set the Gantry to 0_ tilt position.
2. Raise the Table to it’s highest position.
3. Move the IMS (Intermediate Support) to the In limit position.

(For systems with IMS only)
Out to In Travel
4. Move the cradle to the Mechanical Out limit position by hand.
5. Press the ‘INLM’ button, and verify that the Gantry Display indicates Zero.
6. Mark the Table cover with a marking tape or other at one end of the cradle. Define this position as a reference.
7. Move the cradle to 1000 mm (Display) by pushing the ‘In’ button (use the slow speed).
8. Measure the actual distance of cradle movement.
Verify that the measurement is 1000 ±2 mm.
In to Out Travel
9. Move the cradle to the Mechanical In limit position by hand.
12. Move the cradle to 1000 mm (Display) by pushing the ‘Out’ button (use the slow speed).
13. Measure the actual distance of cradle movement.
Verify that the measurement is 1000 ±2 mm.
2–4 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-2-2 Cradle Repeatability

1. Set the Gantry to 0_ tilt position.
3. Move the IMS (Intermediate Support) to the In limit position.

Out to In Travel
4. Move the cradle to it’s Mechanical Out limit position by hand.
5. Move the cradle approximately 100 mm, by pushing ‘In’ button.
10. Measure the cradle position difference between before and after the travels
Verify that the measurement is 0 ±0.27 mm.
In to Out Travel
11. Move the cradle to it’s Mechanical In limit position by hand.
12. Move the cradle approximately 100 mm, by pushing ‘Out’ button.
17. Measure the cradle position difference between before and after the travels
Verify that the measurement is 0 ±0.27 mm.
2–5 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-3 CRADLE ABSOLUTE POSITION
Check
1. Move the IMS (Intermediate Support) to the Out limit position.
NOTICE
If the Table has Home Lock function, release the cradle lock using the release lever.
2. Press ’OUT’ key and ’FAST’ key on the Gantry switch panel to move the cradle to out limit position.
3. Press ’OUT’ key again for few seconds, then press ’INLM’ key.
4. Move the Cradle by hand to mechanical out limit position.
5. Check that the position display indicates “10.0 ± 5.0”.
If not, perform adjustment.
6. Move the cradle to in limit position by pressing ’IN’ and ’FAST’ keys.
7. Press ’IN’ key again for few seconds.
8. Check that the position display indicates “1620 ± 5.0“.
NOTICE
If the Table has Home Lock function, return the cradle lock release lever properly to the origi-
nal position.
2–6 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-3 CRADLE ABSOLUTE POSITION (continued)
Adjustment
If the Cradle position is out of specification, proceed as shown below.
Note
Table height adjustment must be done before this adjustment.
1. Set the table to ‘250’mm height position (shown on Gantry display).
NOTICE
If the Table has Home Lock function, release the cradle lock using the release lever.
2. Move the cradle to the mechanical out limit position by hand.

RESET
ON CHANGE LED
TEST1
OFF
TGP BOARD TEST2
T1 T8 S1
T6
3. Set the T6 switch of the TGP S1 dip–switch to ON (illustration 2–4).
4. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board, until the height display on the Gantry Display indicates “003”.
5. Verify that the position display indicates “0”, then push TEST2 switch on the TGP board (illustration 2–4).
If the CHANGE LED (illustration 2–4) is lit, press the RANGE and FAST keys together on the Gantry Switch
panel. Verify that the CHANGE LED is OFF.
6. Verify that the cradle is still at mechanical out limit position.
7. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board, until the height display on the Gantry Display reads “004”.
8. Verify that the position display indicates 0.

Then move the cradle IN by pushing IN button until the position display indicates “3250 ± 10”.
If cradle stopped due to interlock and the position display indicated smaller than “3240”, move the cradle IN until
the position display indicates “3250 ± 10” by hand.
If CHANGE LED is lit, press FAST and RANGE keys together on the Gantry Switch panel.
Verify that the CHANGE LED is OFF.
NOTICE
If the Table has Home Lock function, return the cradle lock release lever properly to the origi-
nal position.
2–7 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-4 CRADLE COMPENSATION

When the Table is raised or lowered, the cradle is automatically moved into the OUT or IN direction to remain at
the same distance from the Gantry. The following procedure checks or adjusts this function.
Check
1. Move the IMS to the Out Limit position. (For systems with IMS only)
2. Raise the Table to 100mm height (shown on Gantry display).
3. Move the cradle IN approx. 400mm from the out limit.
4. Push the positioning light switch and mark the position on the cradle where is lit up with positioning light beam.
5. Raise the table to 0mm height by pushing UP button. (shown on Gantry display)
6. Push the positioning light switch again, and check if the distance between the mark and the positioning light beam
is less than 1 mm.
If the distance is more than 1mm, perform adjustment.
7. Lower the table to 200mm height by pushing DOWN button. (shown on Gantry display)
8. Push the positioning light switch again, and check if the distance between the mark and the positioning light beam
is less than 1 mm.
If the distance is more than 1mm, perform adjustment.
2–8 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2–4 CRADLE COMPENSATION (CONTINUED)
Adjustment
If the cradle compensation is out of specification, proceed as shown below.
1. Move the IMS to the Out Limit position. (For systems with IMS only)
2. Raise/lower the Table to 50mm height (shown on Gantry display).
3. Move the cradle IN approx. 400mm from the out limit.
4. Push the positioning light switch and mark the position on the cradle where is lit up with positioning light beam.
5. Set the T6 switch of the TGP S1 dip–switch to ON (illustration 2–5).
6. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board until the height display on the Gantry Display indicates “012” .
8. Lower the Table approx. 150mm (using a measure).
9. Push the positioning light switch again, and move the cradle until the mark made in step 4 is lit up with positioning
light beam.
If CHANGE LED is lit, press FAST and RANGE keys together on the Gantry Switch panel.
Verify that CHANGE LED is OFF.
11. Set the T6 switch of the TGP S1 dip–switch to OFF position.
CHANGE LED RESET
TEST1
ON
TEST2
OFF
T1 T8 S1
T6
TGP BOARD
2–9 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-5 IMS (INTERMEDIATE SUPPORT) POSITION
Check
Prior to performing this IMS Position adjustment, the following adjustments should have been completed.
D Table Height in the Elevation Function section (in Table tab)
D Tilt Angle in the Tilt Operation section (in Gantry tab)
1. Switch OFF the ‘Table/Tilt’ switch at the gantry rear base.
NOTICE
If the Table has Home Lock function, release the IMS lock using the release lever,
and if the Table is for Mobile System, remove the IMS Stopper Block.
2. Move the IMS to the Out mechanical limit by hand.
3. Switch ON the ‘Table/Tilt’ switch at the gantry rear base.
4. Raise/lower the Table to approx. 200mm height (shown on Gantry display).
5. Move the IMS approximately 100mm by pressing the IN and IMS keys simultaneously.
6. Press the OUT and IMS keys simultaneously until the IMS stopped by the Out electrical limit.
7. Verify that the Position Display indicates between ‘50’ and ‘55’ (52.5 ±2.5).
8. Press the IN and IMS keys simultaneously until the IMS stopped by the In electrical limit.
9. Read the value on the Position Display, and record this value (≡ Y).
10. Set the T6 switch of the S1 dip switch on the TGP board to ON. See Illustration 2–6.
11. Push the TEST1 switch on the TGP board until the Gantry Display indicates ‘008’. See Illustration 2–6.
12. Read and record the value (≡ X) on the Gantry Display while pressing the RANGE key.
13. Verify that the value X = 2 Y ± 5.
14. Set the T6 switch of the S1 dip switch on the TGP board to OFF. See Illustration 2–6.
NOTICE
If the Table has Home Lock function, return the IMS lock release lever (and IMS Stopper
Block) properly to the original position.

RESET
ON CHANGE LED
TEST1
OFF
TGP BOARD TEST2
T1 T8 S1
T6
2–10 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-5 IMS (INTERMEDIATE SUPPORT) POSITION (continued)
Adjustment
Prior to performing this IMS Position adjustment, the following adjustments should have been completed.
• Table Height in the Elevation Function section (in Table tab)
• Tilt Angle in the Tilt Operation section (in Gantry tab)
1. Switch OFF the ‘Table/Tilt’ switch at the gantry rear base.
NOTICE
If the Table has Home Lock function, release the IMS lock using the release lever,
and if the Table is for Mobile System, remove the IMS Stopper Block.
2. Move the IMS to the Out mechanical limit by hand.
3. Switch ON the ‘Table/Tilt’ switch at the gantry rear base.
4. Raise/lower the Table to 180–210mm height (shown on Gantry display).
5. Set the T6 switch of the S1 dip switch on the TGP board to ON. See Illustration 2–6.
6. Push the TEST1 switch on the TGP board until the Gantry Display (Height) indicates ‘006’. See Illustration 2–6.
7. The Gantry Display (Position) will indicates ‘0’, and then, push the TEST2 switch on the TGP board. (see Illustra-
tion 2–6).
If the CHANGE LED lights on the TGP board (see Illustration 2–6), press the FAST and RANGE keys simulta-
neously on the gantry switch panel to store the new adjustment data.
Check that the CHANGE LED is OFF.
8. Push the TEST1 switch on the TGP board until the Gantry Display (Height) will read ‘007’.
9. Check that the IMS is still at the Out mechanical limit position.
10. Press the INLM (Internal Landmark) key, and check that the Gantry Display (Position) indicates ‘0’.
11. Move the IMS by pressing the IN and IMS keys simultaneously until the position display indicates “86010”.
If the value on the Position Display is less than 850, press again the IN and IMS keys simultaneously until the
Position Display indicates “86010”.
12. Push the TEST2 switch on the TGP board.
If the CHANGE LED lights on the TGP board, press the FAST and RANGE keys simultaneously to store the new
adjustment data.
Check that the CHANGE LED is OFF.
13. Set the T6 switch of the S1 dip switch on the TGP board to OFF. See Illustration 2–6.
NOTICE
If the Table has Home Lock function, return the IMS lock release lever (and IMS Stopper
Block) properly to the original position.
2–11 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-6 STEPPING MOTOR TORQUE
Special Equipment
D Spring Balance (Fish Scale): 20kg maximum
3. Place a weight (object or person) of approximately 55kg on the cradle.
4. Set a spring balance to the cradle end as shown in illustration 2–7.
Illustration 2–7 Setting the Spring Balance
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
Spring Balance
2–12 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-6 STEPPING MOTOR TORQUE (continued)

5. Check the value of the maximum motor torque for SPEED 1:
a. Set the T6 switch of the S1 dip switch on the TGP board to ON.
b. Push the TEST1 switch on the TGP board until the Gantry Display (Height) indicates ‘020’.
c. Push the Fast + In (Out) buttons until the Gantry Display (Position) indicates ‘5’.
(This sets the cradle speed to 0.5 mm/sec)
d. Press the IN button to move the cradle in the In direction.

(do not press the In and Fast buttons simultaneously, or speed will be changed)
While the cradle is moving in the In direction, the motor will automatically stop at some position of the cradle:
read the spring balance at this position.
Verify that this value (maximum motor torque) is 17∼18 kg at around 1000mm from the Out limit position.
If the value is out of specification, adjust it by turning the VR2 on the Stepping Motor Driver.
Note
Wait for the motor driver to cool before performing another motor torque measurement.
6. Check the value of the maximum motor torque for SPEED 2:
a. Set the T6 switch of the S1 dip switch on the TGP board to OFF.
(This sets the cradle speed to 20 mm/sec)
b. Check that the value of maximum motor torque is within the specification (17∼18 kg), according to step 5d.
If the value is out of specification, adjust it by turning the VR3 on the Stepping Motor Driver.
Illustration 2–8 Stepping Motor Driver
VR2
VR3
2–13 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-7 CRADLE BELT TENSION
Special Equipment
D Tension Adjustment Tool (2326244)
1. Raise the Table to its highest position.
2. Move the cradle to the mechanical OUT limit position by hand.
4. Remove the following covers and component from the Table:
D Top Cover R / L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refer to Top Cover / IMS Cover

D Top Cover F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two(2) Screws
D Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Six(6) Screws
D Metal–Free Table Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four(4) Screws
D Rail Cover Front (Left/Right) . . . . . . . . Two(2) Screws x 2
Illustration 2–9 Table Covers Removal
Metal–Free Cradle Touch Sensor Connector

Table Cover
Top Cover F
Top Cover–R
Rail Cover Front

(Left) Latch Switch
ÍÍÍ
Connector
ÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍ
Top Cover–L
: Screw Location
2–14 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-7 CRADLE BELT TENSION (continued)

5. Check the cradle belt tension:
a. Set the adjustment tool on the cradle belt as shown in illustration 2–10.
b. Verify that the flat point of the spindle is in narrow slit (see illustration 2–11).
If not, perform step 6.
Illustration 2–10 Adjustment Tool Attachment
:Put the adjustment tool to cradle belt.
Cross at right angles

Fin
Illustration 2–11 Belt Tension Adjustment
Flat Point
Slit
Spindle
2–15 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-7 CRADLE BELT TENSION (continued)

6. Adjust the cradle belt tension:
a. Measure the distance ‘D’ (between the pulley and cradle motor).
b. Loosen 4 screws that fasten the cradle motor to the Table frame.
c. Slide the cradle motor toward the Gantry, to remove tension from the drive belt.
d. Loosen 4 screws that fasten the pulley to the Table frame.
e. Slide the pulley toward the Gantry, to remove tension from the cradle belt.
f. Adjust position of the pulley so that the flat point of the spindle is in the narrow slit (see illustration 2–11),
and fix the pulley.
g. Adjust position of the cradle motor to meet the ‘D’ recorded at step a., and fix the cradle motor.
Illustration 2–12 Release Belt Tension
Screws
Screws (70kgf.cm)
(70kgf.cm)
Screws Cradle
(70kgf.cm) Motor
Drive Belt
Pulley
Gantry
Screws
(70kgf.cm)
2–16 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
SECTION 3 – SHORT–FOOT–PRINT FUNCTION
3-1 CAUTION
Note
This function is available for the Gantry with TGP board 2156510–5 or later.
The short–foot–print function can limit table–DOWN movement or cradle–IN movement so that the system can be
installed in a small scan room.
WARNING
PATIENT INJURY !!
WHEN SHORT–FOOT–PRINT FUNCTION IS USED, AT THE MINIMUM THE FOLLOWING
ROOM MUST BE DEDICATED TO PREVENT A PATIENT FROM PINCHING BETWEEN TABLE
(OR CRADLE) AND WALL.
Illustration 3–1 Minimum Room for Short–foot–print mode
Table DOWN Limit Cradle IN Limit for the IMS table

More than (2200192 / 2113694)
120mm
More than
120mm
Cradle IN Limit for the NON IMS

table (except 2200192 / 2113694)
More than
0mm
NOTICE
When table height is limited between 500mm and 800mm as its DOWN limit, the Gantry front
cover must be removed by two persons and with a special protector (2225358) or blanket.
3–1 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
3-2 TABLE DOWN LIMIT
3-2-1 Adjustment
1. Move the Cradle and IMS to the out electrical limit position.
2. Lower the Table to the lowest position desired.
WARNING
PATIENT INJURY!
WHEN SHORT–FOOT–PRINT FUNCTION IS USED, A MINIMUM CLEARANCE OF 120 MM
MUST BE DEDICATED TO PREVENT A PATIENT FROM PINCHING BETWEEN TABLE AND
WALL. SEE ILLUSTRATION 3–1.
TGP BOARD
Change LED RESET
TEST1
ON
TEST2
OFF
S1
T2 T6
7. Set the T6 switch of the TGP S1 dip–switch to OFF position. ( Do NOT touch the T2 switch )
8. Press the Reset switch to reset the TGP board (illustration 3–2).
9. Move the table up and down to verify that the Table lowest position is set to the desired one.
NOTICE
Keep the T2 switch to ON position. If the T2 switch is set to OFF position and the RESET
switch is pushed, the table lowest height will be returned to the default position.
3–2 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
3-3 CRADLE IN LIMIT

Note
Prior to this adjustmet, perform adjustment of table height (or adjuntment Short Foot Print), cradle
compensation, and IMS position MUST be completed.
3-3-1 Adjustment
1. Move the Table to the highest position.
2. Move the Cradle to the IN–limit position desired.
WARNING
PATIENT INJURY!
WHEN SHORT–FOOT–PRINT FUNCTION IS USED, A MINIMUM CLEARANCE OF 120 MM
MUST BE DEDICATED TO PREVENT A PATIENT FROM PINCHING BETWEEN TABLE AND
WALL. SEE ILLUSTRATION 3–1.
TGP BOARD
Change LED RESET
TEST1
ON
TEST2
OFF
S1
T4 T6
5. Set the T4 switch of the TGP S1 dip–switch to ON position (illustration 3–3)
7. Set the T6 switch of the TGP S1 dip–switch to OFF position. ( Do NOT touch the T4 switch )
8. Press the Reset switch to reset the TGP board.
9. Move the cradle OUT and IN to verify that Cradle IN–limit position is set to the desired one.
NOTICE
Keep the T4 switch to ON position. If the T4 switch is set to OFF and the RESET switch is
pushed, the Cradle In Limit will be returned to the default position.
3–3 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123
3–4 TABLE
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
DAS/DETECTOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – DAS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 DAS DATA TRANSFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 DAS OFFSET DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1-3 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY TEST (NO X–RAYS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
SECTION 2 – DC POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

2-1 DC POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
i DAS/DETECTOR
CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123
ii DAS/DETECTOR
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
SECTION 1 – DAS OPERATION
1-1 DAS DATA TRANSFER

1. Select DAS Data Transfer Test; refer to below:
Service Menu → DAS Data Transfer Test
2. Select or specify the following test parameters:
Test Mode: Bit by Bit : Normal

Scan Mode : Rotate Scan
Scan Time : (Select the shortest time available on the system.)
No. of Scan : 20 (10 for Twin system)
No. of Test : 2
Until errors occur. : 1
3. Click on OK to execute the test.
Verify that no error occurs.
Note
The 216 ch, 270 ch, and 324 ch might have the random pattern because they are the channels for
debug.
1–1 DAS/DETECTOR
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
1-2 DAS OFFSET DATA
Precondition
Ensure that the DAS/Detector has been powered ON for at least ten minutes prior to performing the following proce-
dure.
1. Perform an axial scan with no x–rays (i.e., acquire a raw data file consisting of offset data):
b. Select Axial from ‘Technic – [Scan Type]’.
c. Perform the following scan:
Scan Time : (Select the shortest time available on the system.)

XG Ray : OFF
Rotor : ON
(Others) : (defaults)
2. Verify that Avg of Mean data are within specifications without applying Offset File Correction on the acquired raw
data (offset data):
b. For Twin ONLY:

c. Select the raw data file (Acq No: 1) from the Raw data browser lists.
d. Perform Fan Data with the following settings:
Offset File Correction No

Then, the following data ‘Fan Data Averages’ are displayed:
******************************* Displayed *******************************

Active Views
Max of Max = x.xxxxxx channel x view x
Min of Min = x.xxxxxx channel x view x
Avg of Mean = x.xxxxxx
Avg of SD = x.xxxxxx
Offset Views
************************************************************************
1–2 DAS/DETECTOR
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
1-2 DAS OFFSET DATA (continued)

e. Verify that Avg of Mean data (both of Active and Offset Views) are within specifications as described below:
Specification
NP/NP+ For Gantry 2200997–2, 2200999–2, NP++/Twin
2201000–2, 2249696–2
Active Views
3000 ≤ ≤ 6000 ≤ 6000 2000 ≤ ≤ 6000
(Avg of Mean = x.xxxxxx)
Offset Views
3000 ≤ ≤ 6000 ≤ 6000 2000 ≤ ≤ 6000
(Avg of Mean= x.xxxxxx)
f. For Twin ONLY:

Repeat step 2 for B Side (B channel).
3. Verify that Avg of Mean and Avg of SD data are within specifications, by performing Offset File Correction on
the acquired raw data (offset data):
b. For Twin ONLY:
Select A side.
c. Select the raw data file (Acq No: 1) from the Raw data browser lists.
d. Perform Fan Data with the following settings:

Then, the following data ‘Fan Data Averages’ are displayed:

******************************* Displayed *******************************
Active Views
Offset Views
************************************************************************
e. Verify that Avg of Mean and Avg of SD data (of Active Views) are within specifications as described below:
Active Views
Avg of Mean = x.xxxxxx –1.0 ≤ ≤ 1.0 (Specification)
Avg of SD = x.xxxxxx –2.0 ≤ ≤ 2.0 (Specification)
f. For Twin ONLY:
Repeat step 3 for B Side (B channel).
1–3 DAS/DETECTOR
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
1-3 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY TEST (NO X–RAYS)
Precondition
Ensure that the DAS/Detector has been powered ON for at least two hours prior to performing the following proce-
dure.
1. Perform six DAS Test scans:
c. Perform the following scan:
Scan Time : 2.0 sec

XG Ray : OFF
Rotor : OFF
No. of Scan : 2
DAS Mode : DAS 64L
(Two scans are performed, the data of the first scan will not be used, since the second data is considered to be
more stabilized)
d. Repeat the above scans with the following parameters (the other parameters are the same).
Scan DAS Mode

Exam# 2 DAS16L
Exam# 3 DAS16M
Exam# 4 DAS4M
Exam# 5 DAS4H
Exam# 6 DAS1H
1–4 DAS/DETECTOR
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
1-3 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY TEST (NO X–RAYS) (continued)

2. Store vector files (mean files) out of the acquired raw data:
Store the following vector files 1 through 6, by repeating the steps below.
DAS Mode Raw Data File No. to be SeĆ Mean Vector No. File Comment
lected
DAS64L Exam#1, Series#1, Acq# 2 1 64L Ach
DAS16L Exam#2, Series#1, Acq# 2 2 16L Ach
DAS16M Exam#3, Series#1, Acq# 2 3 16M Ach
DAS4M Exam#4, Series#1, Acq# 2 4 4M Ach
DAS4H Exam#5, Series#1, Acq# 2 5 4H Ach
DAS1H Exam#6, Series#1, Acq# 2 6 1H Ach
Note: Ach" described in File Comment means A channel for the Twin system ONLY. Bch"
should be commented when testing B channel.
b. For Twin ONLY:

Offset File Correction No

f. Select Store to File.
g. Enter 1 as “Mean Vector Number” and 64L Ach as “File Comment”, then click on OK.
2 to 6.
1–5 DAS/DETECTOR
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123

3. Apply a division to the vector files:
Calculate the following vector files NO. 7, 8, and 9, by repeating the steps below.
Vector File Division Vector Data to Output Vector Comment

be selected Number
File A File B
64L / 16L 1 2 7 64L/16L Ach
16M / 4M 3 4 8 16M/4M Ach
4H / 1H 5 6 9 4H/1H Ach
Note: Ach" described in Comment means A channel for the Twin system ONLY. Bch" should be
commented when testing B channel.

b. Select A/B from ‘Select Operation:’.
c. Select 1 (3, 5) as Vect Data File A.
Select 2 (4, 6) as Vect Data File B.
d. Enter 7 as “Output Vector Number” and 64L/16L Ach as “Comment”, then click on OK.
1–6 DAS/DETECTOR
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123

4. Check the calculated vector files using View Vector:

View Vector
b. Select MeanFile 7– 64L/16L Ach as “Select SupMean File:”.
c. Click on [Plot].
Enter 0.999 for Data Min.
Enter 1.001 for Data Max. (Change this, if necessary)
Click on OK.
Verify that the graph of active channel is in the following range:

0.9995 < < 1.0005
e. Perform the same check as above for the vector files No. 8 and No. 9.
Illustration 1–1 Linearity
1.0005
0.9995
Channel
5. For Twin ONLY:

1–7 DAS/DETECTOR
CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123
1–8 DAS/DETECTOR
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
SECTION 2 – DC POWER SUPPLY
2-1 DC POWER SUPPLY

1. Remove the front and right side Gantry covers.
2. Switch ON the Service Switch and Rotate the Gantry to approximately 190_ tube position.
3. Switch OFF the Service Switch.
4. Switch OFF the “Rotate” and “XG Power” switches at the rear Gantry base.
5. Disconnect the DAS, TEMP CONT and DAS FAN power cables.
6. Measure and adust if necessary, the potentiometers of the Power Supply according to the table 1–1. The poten-
tiometer positions is shown in the illutration 1–1.
Illustration 1–1 Power Supply PS L Votage Adjustment
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ PS1
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÉÉ
PS2
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
PS3
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ À
ÀÀÀ
ÉÉÉ
À
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÉÉ
É
PS5
PS4
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÉÉÉ
ÀÀ
ÀÀ ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÉÉ
À
ÀÀÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÀÀÀ
ÉÉÉ
À
ÀÀ
ÀÉÉ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÉÉ
ÉÀ
ÀÀÀ
À
PS6
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÉÉÉ
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀ
ÉÉÉ É
À À
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
À À
ÀÀ ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÉÉÉ ÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
À
ÀÀÀÀ
ÉÉÉ
ÀÀÀ ÀÀÉ ÀÀ
À
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ À À
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀ À
ÀÀÀ
À
ÀÀ
À ÀÀÀÀÀÀÉÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÉÉÉ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÉÉÉ
ÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
À
ÀÀÀ ÀÀÀ
À
ORG BLU RED
ÀÀ
À ÀÀ ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
À
ÀÀÀÀ
É
ÀÀÀÀ
ÉÉÉ ÀÀ
À ÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
À
ÀÀÉÉÉ
À ÀÀÉ ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀ
À À
ÀÀÀÀ À À
ÀÀ
À ÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ ÀÀ
À
ÀÀÀÀ
À À
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀ
À ÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
À À
ÀÀ
À ÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ ÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
À
ÀÀÀÀ
À À ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
À ÀÀÀ À
3 2 1 ÀÀ
À ÀÀ
ÀÀ
À
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ À À
ÀÀÀÀ
À ÀÀÀÀ
À
À
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
À À ÀÀÀÀ
À À
À
GRN 6 5
8
4
7
WHT
YEL ÀÀ
À ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
À À À
À À
ÀÀÀÀ À
9
GRY 12 11 10 BLK
DAS POWER CABLE CONNECTOR ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ

The denominations PS1 ∼ PS6 are only for reference in this procedure. They do not correspond to the part name
in Renewal Parts.
2–1 DAS/DETECTOR
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
2-1 DC POWER SUPPLY (continued)
Power Supply Measuring Point Pins Votage Range

PS1 DAS Power Cable Connector 7 & 10 5.1 ∼ 5.2V
PS2 DAS Power Cable Connector 3&6 5.0 ∼ 5.1V
PS3 DAS Power Cable Connector 1&4 12.4 ∼ 12.5V
PS4 DAS Power Cable Connector 2&5 –12.5 ∼ –12.4V
PS5 Temp Cont Power Cable Connector 23.5 ∼ 24.5V
PS6 DAS Fan Power Cable Connector 22.0 ∼ 26.0V
2–2 DAS/DETECTOR
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 24 2202123
X–RAY GENERATOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – X–RAY TUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 DAS COUNT CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 TUBE CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
1-3 HEAT SOAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
SECTION 2 – KV AND MA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 KV & MA CHECK WITH GANTRY DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 KV CHECK WITH HV DIVIDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2-3 MA CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
i X–RAY GENERATOR
CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123
ii X–RAY GENERATOR
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
SECTION 1 – X–RAY TUBE
1-1 DAS COUNT CHECK

This check verifies that the x–ray tube dose falls within specifications by checking DAS Counts.
This check should be performed when the x–ray tube is replaced.
1. Perform a stationary scan:
c. Perform the following air scan:
Scan Time : 3.0 sec

1.5 sec ( For Gantry 2200997–2, 2200999–2, 2201000–2, 2249696–2, 2246999, 2247000,
2247001, 2246999–3, 2247000–3, 2247001–3, 2247799, 2247799–3,
For Gantry of NP++ or Twin system)
(For the system with smart filter option)
Thickness : 10 mm
Focus : Large
KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA
Bow–tie filter: Installed
2. Verify that MEAN MAX data is within specifications:
b. For Twin ONLY:


1–1 X–RAY GENERATOR

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
1-1 DAS COUNT CHECK (continued)

The ‘Fan Data Averages’ screen are displayed:
f. Select Store to File.
g. Enter 1 as “Mean Vector Number” and DAS count check as “File Comment”, then click on OK.
h. The Attention window might appears. Click on OK.
i. Select Analysis → View Vector.
j. Select MeanFile 1– DAS Count check.
k. Click on Plot, then OK.
Illustration 1–1 Max of Active Mean
Max of Active Mean
Numeric indication

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
1-1 DAS COUNT CHECK (continued)

l. Verify that Max of Active Mean data is within specifications as described below:
Note
You can also display the data as a numerics using Numerical button.
Max of Active Mean: 126000 ≤ ≤ 234000 (Specification)
3. For Twin ONLY:

Repeat steps 2 for B Side (B channel).

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
1-2 TUBE CALIBRATION

The x–ray generator of this CT system requires no calibration after an x–ray tube is replaced.
Differences in characteristics of each x–ray tube are automatically learned by the generator, and the learned data will
be stored within the generator.

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
1-3 HEAT SOAK

The Heat Soak procedure should be performed when the x–ray tube is replaced.

CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
SECTION 2 – KV AND MA
2-1 KV & MA CHECK WITH GANTRY DISPLAY

1. Preparation:
a. Remove the left maintenance cover from the Gantry.
b. Set the 42 cm Polypropylene Phantom to the phantom holder.
c. Move the cradle to position the phantom at the Detector window.

(This is to protect the Detector by reducing x–ray dose to it during the check procedure)
d. Perform Warm–up scans, if the x–ray tube is cold.
e. Wait five minutes or more following the last scan prior to proceeding to the next step.
2. Set the M5 Management dip switch to ON on the TGP Board.

(KV & MA display mode on Gantry Display)

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
2-1 KV & MA CHECK WITH GANTRY DISPLAY (continued)

3. Perform scans of KV – MA stations specified in Table 2–1, following the steps below, and verify that the KV and
MA values displayed on the Gantry Display is within the following specifications:
KV: ±5 kV
MA: ±20 mA
c. Set the scan parameters according to Table 2–1 or 2–2.
(KV and MA values are displayed in real–time during an exposure, and ‘0’ is displayed after the exposure is fin-
ished)
Table 2–1 KV – mA Stations (For System with D3142T Tube)
Time Thickness Focus KV mA

1.5 sec 5 mm Large 80 60 100 160 250 300 350
120 40 60 100 160 250 350
140 40 60 100 160 250 300
1 mm Small 80 60 130 200 – – –
120 60 130 200 – – –
140 60 130 160 – – –
Stationary Scan (Present Degree)
(Other scan parameters): (defaults)
Table 2–2 KV – mA Stations (For System with D3152T Tube)
Time Thickness Focus KV mA

1.5 sec 5 mm Large 80 60 100 160 250 350 400
120 60 100 160 250 350 440
140 60 130 200 300 380 –
1 mm Small 80 60 130 160 250 250 300
120 60 130 200 – – –
140 60 100 170 – – –
(Other scan parameters): (defaults)
4. Set the M5 Management dip switch to OFF on the TGP Board.

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
2-2 KV CHECK WITH HV DIVIDER

1. Preparation:
a. Perform Warm–up scans, if the x–ray tube is cold.
b. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch at the Gantry rear base.
c. Remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers of the Gantry.
d. Switch ON the Service switch on the SUB Board near the TGP board.
e. Rotate the Gantry to the home position (x–ray tube at the 12 o’clock position).
f. Switch OFF the Service switch on the SUB Board
g. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “XG Power”, and “Slip Ring 115V” switches at the Gantry rear base.
CAUTION
Electric shock !
Use a ground bar to discharge the high voltage connector any time you disconnect it.
2. Connect an HV divider between the x–ray tube and the HV Hank:
Illustration 2–1 HV Divider Connection
For System with D3142T Tube For System with D3152T Tube
X–Ray Tube X–Ray Tube
+ST HEMIT
Tank
+HT
HV Divider HV Divider
HV Tank HV Tank

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
2-2 KV CHECK WITH HV DIVIDER (continued)

a. Connecting HV Cables to HV Tank:
i. Remove the HV cable connectors from the HV Tank (both anode and cathode connectors).
ii. Connect the HV divider cables, which are installed in the system, to the HV Tank.
(Before connecting the cables, wipe clean the HV connectors, and lubricate them with silicon oil)
i. Remove the Fan bracket from the JEDI Power Unit by unscrewing its 11 screws.
ii. Remove the HV cable connectors from the HV Tank (Cathode) and HEMIT Tank (+ST).
iii. Connect the HV divider cables, which are installed in the system, to the HV Tank (Cathode) and HEMIT
Tank (+ST).
b. Connecting HV Divider to X–Ray Tube:
i. Switch ON the Service switch on the SUB Board.
Rotate the Gantry by hand until the X–Ray Tube reaches the 3 o’clock position.
Switch OFF the Service switch on the SUB Board.
ii. Remove the HV cable connectors from the x–ray tube. (Both anode and cathode connectors)
iii. Connect the HV divider cables whose other ends are connected to the HV divider to the x–ray tube.
c. Placing HV Divider on Floor:
i. Switch ON the Service switch on the SUB Board.
ii. Rotate the Gantry by hand until the X–Ray Tube reaches the 3 o’clock position.
iii. Place the HV divider on the floor without straining the HV cables.
iv. Switch OFF the Service switch on the SUB Board.
d. Connecting HV Cables to HV Divider:
i. Connect the HV divider cables which were connected to the tanks at step a to the HV divider (see Illustra-
tions 2–1 and 2–2).

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
Illustration 2–2 HV Tank Position
For System with D3142T Tube For System with D3152T Tube
OGP Assy HEMIT Tank
X–Ray Tube X–Ray Tube
Fan
Bracket
HV Tank HV Tank

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
KV Read
3. Connect a digital multimeter to the output terminals of the HV divider.
(The multimeter should be in the DC voltage measurement mode)
Place the multimeter so that it can be read from the Operator’s room.
NOTICE
Do not switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
4. Perform x–ray exposures and read the KV values:
a. Switch ON the “Slip Ring 115V” and “XG Power” switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Perform scans described in Table 2–3, following the steps below, and verify that the KV readings are within the
specifications.
i. Select Offline Scan; refer to below:
ii. Select Stationary from ‘Technic – [Scan Type]’.
iii. Set the scan parameters according to Table 2–3.
Table 2–3 KV Check Scans
KV mA KV Specification
80 250 74.4 ≤ ≤ 85.6
120 200 111.6 ≤ ≤ 128.4
140 160 130.2 ≤ ≤ 149.8
Scan Time: 3.0 sec
Thickness: 1mm
Focus: Large
(Others): (defaults)

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
2-3 MA CHECK
1. Preparation:
a. Perform Warm–up scans, if the x–ray tube is cold.
b. Wait five minutes or more following the last scan prior to proceeding to the next step.
c. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “XG Power”, and “Slip Ring 115V” switches at the Gantry rear base.
d. Wait at least 2 minutes, and remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers of the Gantry.
e. Switch ON the Service switch on the SUB Board.
f. Rotate the Gantry by hand in the clockwise direction until the x–ray is positioned at the 12 o’clock position.
g. Switch OFF the Service switch on the SUB Board.
Load Resister Check

2. To access the resistor (SH3, SH4) on he KV Measure Board:
a. Remove the power unit cover from the JEDI Power Unit.
a. Remove the Fan bracket from the JEDI Power Unit by unscrewing its 11 screws.
3. Connect a digital multimeter probes to the resistor (SH3 or SH4) or yellow capacitor (C8) leads on the KV Mea-
sure board, located behind the KV Cont board.(see illustration 2–3).
Note
When it is difficult to access SH3 or SH4, use C8 for MA measurement.
4. Set the multimeter to the register measurement mode.
Read the value; it should be 5 (± 0.05) ohms.

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
2-3 MA CHECK (continued)
Illustration 2–3 KV Measure Board Location
ÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅ ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅ ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ ÅÅ ÅÅÅ ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ ÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅÅ ÅÅ ÅÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅÅ Fan Bracket
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
SH3
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ SH4
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
C8
Unit Cover SH3, SH4, or C8
KV Measure Board
Probes
KV Cont Board

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 33 2202123
2-3 MA CHECK (continued)
MA Check
5. Set the multimeter to the DC voltage measurement mode (mV).
Place the multimeter so that it can be read from the Operator’s room.
NOTICE
Do not switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
6. Perform x–ray exposures and read the voltage values:
a. Switch ON the “Slip Ring 115V” and “XG Power” switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Perform scans described in Table 2–4, following the steps below, and verify that the mA measurements
([measured voltage (mV)]/[5 (ohms)]) are within the specifications.
i. Select Offline Scan; refer to below:
ii. Select Stationary from ‘Technic – [Scan Type]’.
iii. Set the scan parameters according to Table 2–4.
Table 2–4 mA Check Scans
KV mA mA Specification
80 250 237.5 ≤ ≤ 262.5
120 200 190.0 ≤ ≤ 210.0
140 160 152.0 ≤ ≤ 168.0
Scan Time: 3.0 sec
Thickness: 1mm
Focus: Large
(Others): (defaults)

CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING OF BOARDS/DEVICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – OPERATOR CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 CIRCUIT BOARDS ON NEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1-2-1 DBPCI Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1-2-2 NPRIF Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-2-3 NPRM Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1-2-4 NPRS Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
1-3 BOARDS ON CONNECTOR BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
1-3-1 REAR CN1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
1-3-2 DASIFN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
1-3-3 DASIFN 110M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13
1-3-4 DASIFN2 (2214312) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14
1-3-5 DASIFN2 (2214312–2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
1-4 BOARD/DEVICES ON PERIPHERAL BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
1-4-1 FRONT PNL Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
1-4-2 CD–ROM Drive (2202991) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18
1-4-3 MOD Drive (2194318) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19
1-4-4 MOD Drive (2198923) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–22
1-4-5 MOD Drive (2245963) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23
1-4-6 Hard Disk Drive 4GB (2205368) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25
1-4-7 Hard Disk Drive 9GB (2256860/2282749) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26
1-4-8 Serial Port Expander (ST–1800) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27
1-5 OTHER CIRCUIT BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28
1-5-1 NAA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28
1-5-2 PCI Host Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30
SECTION 2 – GANTRY/TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 SWITCHES AT GANTRY REAR BASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 TGP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2-3 SUB BD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2-4 OGP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
2-5 DTRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
2-5-1 DTRF Assy (2173960) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
2-5-2 DTRF 110M Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2-5-3 DTRF2 Assy (2233745) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
2-5-4 DTRF2 Assy (2233745–2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2-6 NAA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
2-7 TBL BD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
SECTION 3 – DAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

3-1 CIF BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
i SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 4 – X–RAY GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

4-1 KV MEASURE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-1-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-1-2 Switches and Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4-1-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4-2 FILAMENT BOARD 1 INV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4-2-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4-2-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4-3 ROTATION BOARD HIGH SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4-3-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4-3-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4-3-4 J2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4-4 LV POWER SUPPLY 3 PH BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4-4-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4-4-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4-5 GATE COMMAND BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4-5-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4-5-3 Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4-6 DUAL SNUB BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4-6-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4-6-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4-7 IF BOARD NP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4-7-2 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4-8 KV CONTROL BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4-8-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4-8-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4-8-4 Non Volatile RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4-9 AC/DC THREE PHASE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4-9-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4-9-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
SECTION 5 – PDU (POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

5-1 RMT CNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5-1-1 RMT CNT of PDU2 (220XXXX / 224XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
5-1-2 RMT CNT of PDU2 (229XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
ii SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
SECTION 1 – OPERATOR CONSOLE
1-1 GENERAL
WARNING
NOTICE
Cut power before removing or inserting any of the boards or plugs.
NOTICE
Electrostatic discharge. It is essential to link yourself to ground potential by wearing an anti–
static wrist strap. No board should ever be accessed without this precaution.
Component Locations
The following illustration shows locations of some components within the operator console. The names ‘Peripheral
Box’, ‘Nest’, etc. are used to indicate board locations in the following sections.
ÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍ
CRT Monitor
PS PS Connector
AC PS Box Box
NPRS Peripheral
Box
NPRM
Host
Nest Processor
PCI
Boards
1–1 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-2 CIRCUIT BOARDS ON NEST
1-2-1 DBPCI Board
Illustration 1–2 DBPCI
SW1
Connectors SW2
Card Edge
Connector
Switch
D SW2 – Normally set to ‘0H’ as illustrated below.
ON ‘1’
‘0’
1 2 3 4
Switch Description
Bit 1 Order: Determines the way DAS data is packed.
Bit 2 Endian: Determines the data endian for the PCI bus.
Bit 3 AUX: Determines how the AUX register is used.
Bit 4 Not defined.
D SW1 – Reset Switch
1–2 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-2-2 NPRIF Board
Illustration 1–3 NPRIF
(Rev 1 Board)
JP6
JP5
JP1
JP2
JP5 JP4
(Rev 0 Board)
D JP1 – Interrupt to Host Processor – Normally set as illustrated below.

0INTRQ
JP1 (a plug is installed)
D JP2 – Synchronize Clock for NPRIF and NPRM – Normally set as illustrated below.
JP2 (a plug is installed on ‘4’)

10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1–3 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-2-2 NPRIF Board (continued)

D JP4 – Reset for CPLD Write – Normally set as illustrated below.
JP4 (a plug is installed on the ‘1’ side)
FULL_RST
1
D JP5 – Clock for Global Memory Access – Normally set as illustrated below.
(2177243 Rev 1 or
(2177243 Rev 0 Board) 2177243–2 Rev 0 or later Board)
GND
4F1
VCC
GND
4F0
VCC
4F1
JP5 (a plug is installed as illustrated)
D JP6 – Connection Port – Do not install a plug.
1–4 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-2-3 NPRM Board
Illustration 1–4 NPRM
NPRS4 NPRS5
NPRS3 NPRS6
NPRS2 NPRS7
NPRS1 NPRS8
S1
SIMM2
SIMM1
JP1, JP2, JP21
JP8 JP20
JP19
JP8
JP1, JP2, JP21 (All Open)
VCC
JP20
GND
128MB
64MB
S1
JP19
8 Bit0
7
Bit1
6
Bit2
5
Bit3
4 Bit4
3 For JP19, refer
Bit5
N 2 to the Jumper
Bit6 (Example Setting)
O 1 table below.
Bit7
ON
1–5 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-2-3 NPRM Board (continued)
Jumper
D JP1, JP2, JP21, JP8, JP19, JP20 – Normally set as illustrated above.
D JP19 – Normally set according to the table blow.

Note: The JP19 means a type of the SIMM(s) installed onto the SIMM slots of the NPRM board.
JP19 SIMM Specification

One or two
128MB
32MB SIMM 32MB SIMM
used
64MB
32MB: Chips mounted on both sides (Mitsubishi)

JP19
One or two 64MB SIMM

128MB
64MB SIMM
used
64MB
JP19
64MB: Chips mounted on one side (Transcend)
1–6 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-2-3 NPRM Board (continued)
Switch
D S1 – Refer to the following table for a proper setting.
Note
S1 switch settings referred to in this table are set using the markings on the NPRM board, not the
markings on the switch.
Bit 7 & 6 Setting Bit 3 ∼ 0 Setting

Bit7 Bit6 – Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 –
0 1 SIMM1 only is installed (32 MB SIMM 0 0 0 0 No NPRS is installed.
x 1).
1 0 SIMM1 & SIMM2 are installed (32MB 0 0 0 1 NPRS1 only is installed.
SIMM x 2).
1 1 SIMM1 only is installed (64 MB SIMM x 0 0 1 0 NPRS1 & NPRS2 are installed.
1).
1 1 SIMM1 & SIMM2 are installed (64MB 0 0 1 1 NPRS1 ∼ NPRS3 are installed.
SIMM x 2).
0 1 0 0 NPRS1 ∼ NPRS4 are installed.
–
Bit 7, Bit6, ... , or Bit0 are ‘1’, when switches 1, 2, ... , or 8 of S1 are set to ‘ON’, respectively.
Bit7, Bit6: Set to the number of SIMM’s installed. When installing one SIMM, install it to location ‘SIMM1.’
Bit 5, Bit4: Not used. Set to ‘0’, respectively.
Bit3, Bit2, Bit1, Bit0: Set to the number of NPRS boards installed. The locations of boards should be as de-
scribed above.
An example shown in Illustration 1–4 is a setting for the following:

One SIMM is installed to location ‘SIMM1.’
Two NPRS boards are installed to locations ‘NPRS1’ and ‘NPRS2.’
1–7 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-2-4 NPRS Board

This board is installed on the NPRM board.
Illustration 1–5 NPRS
JP11 JP12
A Side
B Side
JP12 JP11
U15 U5
+
C22
J1
D JP11, JP12 – Normally set as illustrated above.
1–8 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-3 BOARDS ON CONNECTOR BOX
1-3-1 REAR CN1
Illustration 1–6 REAR CN1
JP4 JP5
JP3
JP2
JP1
JP7
JP6
JP9
JP8
REAR CN1 ASSY
D JP1 – Safety Loop Control – Normally set as illustrated below (SAFEON).
SAFEON OFF
JP1
Setting Description
SAFEON Enables software to control the safety loop.
OFF Disables software to control the safety loop.
The safety line is always connected on the REAR CN1 board.
1–9 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-3-1 REAR CN1 (continued)

D JP2, 4, 5 – Minimum Intercom Volume – Normally set as illustrated below (Open).
JP2, 4, 5
Jumper Description
J2 for Auto Voice Close:
When the volume dial on the keyboard is set to the minimum
end, the OC speaker volume becomes zero.
J4 for To Patient
Open:
Though the volume dial on the keyboard is set to the minimum
J5 for From Patient end, the OC speaker volume does not go down beyond a set
minimum level.
D JP3 – Talk On SW – Normally set as illustrated below (NRM).
JP3
ON
NRM
OFF
Jumper Position Description

ON ‘Talk On’ switch is set to ON.
NRM The ‘Talk On’ switch on the keyboard is used for the intercom
function.
OFF ‘Talk On’ switch is set to OFF.
The ON and OFF jumper positions are used when using the intercom function without
the keyboard.
1–10 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-3-1 REAR CN1 (continued)

D JP6, 7 – TGP Communication – Normally set as illustrated below.
T T
JP6 JP7
Jumper Position Description

(for both JP6 & JP7)
T This Function is NOT supported yet.
(When the OC alone is used (not connected with the gantry), the mes-
sage transmission and receive are jumpered with these settings.)
If you use the OC with stand–alone mode, enter setForOcStartup
command using the shell window. To terminate a stand–alone mode,
enter setForOcStartup –r .
(Not T side) The OC communicates with the TGP board.
D JP8, 9 – Fan Alarm Enable/Disable – Normally set as illustrated below (FAN).
FAN
JP8 JP9
Jumper Description
J8 for the fan alarm de- FAN (jumper opened):
vice connected to J11 The fan alarm device is used for safety purpose.
J9 for the fan alarm de- Not FAN (jumper shorted):
vice connected to J10 The function of the fan alarm device is disabled.
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-3-2 DASIFN
Illustration 1–7 DASIFN
S2
DASIFN ASSY
Switch
D S2 – Normally set to ‘CH’ as illustrated below.
ON ‘1’
‘0’
1 2 3 4
Switch Description
Bit 1, 2 Set the highest bits of the ROM address.
Bit 3 Not defined.
Bit 4 0: NP+/NP++, 1: NP
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-3-3 DASIFN 110M
Illustration 1–8 DASIFN 110M
DASIFN 110M ASSY
S1
Switch
D S1 – Normally set to ‘CH’ as illustrated below.
ON ‘1’
‘0’
1 2 3 4
Switch Description
Bit 3 Not defined.
Bit 4 0: NP+/NP++, 1: NP
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-3-4 DASIFN2 (2214312)
Illustration 1–9 DASIFN2
DASIFN2 ASSY JP6 JP5 JP4
S2
S1
JP7
JP3 JP2 JP1
Switch
D S1, S2 – FPGA Config./View Size – Normally set to ‘CH’ as illustrated below.
ON ‘1’
‘0’
1 2 3 4
Switch Description
Bit 3 Not defined.
Bit 4 0: Twin
Jumper
D JP1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 – XC95108 Programming – Normally set as illustrated below (Open).
JP1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
D JP7 – Board Reset Enable/Disable – Normally set as illustrated below (Short).
JP7
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-3-5 DASIFN2 (2214312–2)
Illustration 1–10 DASIFN2
DASIFN2 ASSY JP6 JP5 JP4

JP8
S2
S1
JP3 JP2 JP1
JP7
Switch
D S1, S2 – FPGA Config./View Size – Normally set to ‘CH’ as illustrated below.
ON ‘1’
‘0’
1 2 3 4
Switch Description
Bit 3 Not defined.
Bit 4 0: Twin
Jumper
D JP1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 – XC95108 Programming – Normally set as illustrated below (Open).
JP1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
JP7
D JP8 – Baud Rate – Normally set as illustrated below (110Mbaud).
JP8
110Mbaud 95Mbaud
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-4 BOARD/DEVICES ON PERIPHERAL BOX
1-4-1 FRONT PNL Assy
Illustration 1–11 FRONT PNL
S2
J1
JP1
JP2 S1
Push
SW
D S1 – Push Switch
D S2, JP1, JP2 – Power OFF Delay Time – Normally set as illustrated below.
S2
ON ‘1’ JP1 (Opened)
(1, 2, 3, 4: OFF)
‘0’
1 2 3 4 JP2 (Shorted)
The delay time for the OC power off can be varied by the settings of S2 and JP1, or, S2 and JP2, according
to the following illustration and Table 1–2.
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-4-1 FRONT PNL Assy (continued)
Table 1–2 Power Off Delay Time
S2 JP1 JP2
(when shorted) (when shorted)
Hexadecimal 1 2 3 4 (sec) (sec)
Number
F ON ON ON ON 24 48
E ON ON ON OFF 26 52
D ON ON OFF ON 28 55
C ON ON OFF OFF 31 62
B ON OFF ON ON 30 60
A ON OFF ON OFF 34 68
9 ON OFF OFF ON 37 73
8 ON OFF OFF OFF 43 87
7 OFF ON ON ON 44 87
6 OFF ON ON OFF 54 109
5 OFF ON OFF ON 62 123
4 OFF ON OFF OFF 88 175
3 OFF OFF ON ON 79 157
2 OFF OFF ON OFF 130 259
1 OFF OFF OFF ON 188 376
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF ∞ ∞
Short either JP1 or JP2; DO NOT short both JP1 and JP2 jumpers at the same
time.
If a time of more than 50 sec is to be set, use JP2 (short JP2).
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-4-2 CD–ROM Drive (2202991)
Illustration 1–12 CD–ROM Drive (2202991)
Rear View
Analog Audio
Connector
Strap Signal Interface Power Supply

Connector Connector
ID PRSW
TERM Settings
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 SCSI ID: 1
Parity: ON
Terminator: OFF
1 Logical Block Size: 512 bytes
Refer to Table 1–3.
D Jumper Plug on Strap – Normally set as illustrated above.
Table 1–3 Jumper Setting Description
No. Symbol Description

S0 ID0 SCSI ID
S1 ID1 ID0 when all of ID0, ID1, ID2 are open.
S2 ID2
S3 PRSW Parity ON/OFF
S4 S512 Workstation
S5 TERM Terminator ON/OFF
S6 VNDR (Spare)
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-4-3 MOD Drive (2194318)
Illustration 1–13 MOD Drive (2194318) – Rear View
Rear View
JA3
SCSI Connector
1 19
Settings
2 20
SCSI ID: 6
SCSI Address 20 Write Cash: OFF
Read after Write: ON
SCSI Address 21 Removable Bit: 1
SCSI Address 22 Peripheral Device Type: 07H
Write Cash Terminator Power: from SCSI
Read after Write Terminator:OFF
Removable Bit
Peripheral Device Type
Terminator Power
Terminator
D Jumper Plugs on JA3 – Normally set as illustrated above.
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-4-3 MOD DRIVE (2194318) (continued)
Illustration 1–14 MOD Drive (2194318) – JP1, JP2, JP6
JA3
JA2
JP2 JP1
2 16 2 16
1 15 1 15
2 16
1 15 JA1
JP6
D JP1, JP2, JP6 – Do not change these jumper settings as were factory–set.
Refer to Table 1–4, 1–5, and 1–6.
Table 1–4 JP1 Setting Description
Pin # Function Function Enabled/Disabled

Shorted Opened
(Factory–set)
1–2 Disconnect during read/write data transfer Enabled Disabled
3–4 Parity Check Enabled Disabled
5–6 Busy Report Enabled Disabled
7–8 Statistics Overflow Report Disabled Enabled
9–10 Advance Read Cache Enabled Disabled
11–12 Send of Synchronous data transfer request Disabled Enabled
message
13–14 Certify Processing during formatting Enabled Disabled
15–16 Report of Vendor unique media type Disabled Enabled
Shorted: A jumper plug is installed.
Opened: A jumper plug is removed.
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
Pin # Function Function Setting

Shorted Opened
(Factory–set)
5–6 SCSI Mode SCSI–2 Mode is set. If 5–6 only is opened
(7–8: shorted, 9–10:
7–8 shorted), SCSI–1
9–10 Mode is set.
13–14 Auto Spin–Up Enabled Disabled
1–2, 3–4, 11–12, 15–16 are factory–set (shorted or opened); do not change these settings.

Pin # Function Function Setting

Shorted Opened
(Factory–set)
9–10 Default value change for Mode Pages 01H 88H (page 01H) and 2EH (page 01H) and
and 07H 08H (page 07H) 0EH (page 07H)
11–12 Unit Attention Report & Busy Status Report Enabled Disabled
1–2, 3–4, 5–6, 7–8, 13–14, 15–16 are factory–set (shorted or opened); do not change these setting.

CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-4-4 MOD Drive (2198923)
Illustration 1–15 MOD Drive (2198923) – Rear View
Rear View
Power Supply SCSI Connector

Connector
Parity Check Settings

SCSI ID Spare Mode Internal SCSI SCSI ID: 5
Terminator Parity Check: ON
Mode: 2 (SCSI–2 Mode)
Terminator: OFF (used)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
D Jumper Plugs – Normally set as illustrated above.
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-4-5 MOD Drive (2245963)
Illustration 1–16 MOD Drive (2245963)
4 3 2 1
DC Power Connector
SCSI Connector
B1 B12
A1 A12
SCSI Terminator Power

SCSI Terminator
Device Type
Fast SCSI
Manual Eject Initial Setting
Write Command Verify
Spin Up Mode
Write Cash Control
SCSI Parity Check
SCSI ID
Settings
SCSI ID: 6
SCSI Parity Check: ON
Write Cache Control: OFF
Spin Up Mode: by injection
Write Command Verify: ON
Manual Eject Initial Setting: Enabled
Fast SCSI: Enabled
Device Type: 07H
SCSI Terminator: OFF
SCSI Terminator Power: from SCSI
D Jumper Plugs – Normally set as illustrated above.
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
Illustration 1–17 MOD Drive (2245963) – S501, S502
(These dip switches are located on the upper part of the drive.)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8
7
4
3
2
5
1
OFF
S502
ON
N
O
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8
7
4
3
2
5
OFF
S501
ON
N
O
(Rear of MOD Drive)
D S501, S502 – Do not change these dip switch settings as were factory–set.
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-4-6 Hard Disk Drive 4GB (2205368)
Illustration 1–18 Hard Disk Drive 4GB (2205368)
2 6
1 5
CN7
CN6 Settings
Terminator Power (1–2): ON CN6

Spin–up Mode (3–4): Immediately
Terminator (5–6): Enable
CN7 Setting
2 16
SCSI ID: 1
1 15
Print Board
D Jumper Plugs on CN6, CN7 – Normally set as illustrated above.
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-4-7 Hard Disk Drive 9GB (2256860/2282749)
Illustration 1–19 Hard Disk Drive 9GB (2256860/2282749)

D Jumper Plugs on J13 – Normally set as illustrated below.
J13
27 1
28 2
SCSI ID (3)
SCSI ID (2)
SCSI ID (1)
SCSI ID (0)
(KEY)
DELAY SPIN
FORCE SE
NC
BUSY OUT
WRITE PROTECT
STAGGER SPIN
NO WIDE
RESERVED
TERM POWER
27 1
Setting for 1st HDD (SCSI ID:1)
28 2
27 1
Setting for 2nd HDD (SCSI ID:2)
28 2
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-4-8 Serial Port Expander (ST–1800)
Illustration 1–20 Dip Switch
Power Supply
SCSI Connectors LED Connector
Dip Switch
1 2 3 4 SCSI ID: 4
Terminator: OFF
D Dip Switch – Normally set as illustrated above.
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-5 OTHER CIRCUIT BOARD
1-5-1 NAA1
Illustration 1–21 NAA1
NAA1 ASSY
JP1
JP3
VR1
JP2
JP4
D JP3, 4 – Input Impedance – Normally set as illustrated below (Open).
JP3, 4
Jumper Description
JP3 for Line1+ Sets an input impedance for the line input,
Line 1+ or Line2+.
JP4 for Line2+ Shorted: Sets Low Impedance (680 ohms).

Open: Sets High Impedance (22 kohms).
D JP2 – OC Speaker Volume – Normally set as illustrated below (Lo).
JP2 Lo
Hi
Position Description
Hi Sets the volume to High.
Lo Sets the volume to Low.
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-5-1 NAA1 (continued)

D JP1 – Ground Connection – Normally set as illustrated below (Open).
JP1
FG< >GND
Setting Description
Short Connects the NAA1 board analog ground to
the frame ground.
Open Disconnects the NAA1 board analog ground
and the frame ground.
D VR1 – OC Speaker Volume – Normally set as illustrated below (Center).
VR1
Setting Description
Counterclockwise Sets the volume quieter.
Clockwise Sets the volume louder.
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 35 2202123
1-5-2 PCI Host Card
Illustration 1–22 PCI Host Card
ÉÉ ÉÉ ÉÉ
J2 J5 J6
1 1 1
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
2
3
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
2
3
2
3
ÉÉ ÉÉJ3 J4
ÉÉ ÉÉ
1 1
ÉÉÉÉ
2 2
3 3
É É É
É É É
BIT 3 COMPUTER CORPORATION MADE IN U.S.A.

ÉÉ
Edge Connector
D J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 – Normally set as illustrated above.
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
SECTION 2 – GANTRY/TABLE
2-1 SWITCHES AT GANTRY REAR BASE
Illustration 2–1 Gantry Rear Base Switches
2–1 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-1 SWITCHES AT GANTRY REAR BASE (continued)
Table 2–1 Gantry Rear Base Switches
SWITCH NORMAL FUNCTION

SETTING
Rotate ON Powers On/Off the gantry axial motor and servo amplifier with
AC 200 V.
XG Power (Safety Loop) ON Powers On/Off the x–ray generator on the gantry rotaries
frame with three–phase 380 ∼ 480 V by closing/opening the
Safety Loop.
Table/Tilt ON Powers On/Off components (including TGP board) on the
gantry stationary frame and the table with AC 115 V.
Slip Ring 115V ON Powers On/Off components on the rotative frame (DAS, Tem-
perature Controller, OGP board, etc.) with AC 115 V.
NOTICE
Avoid frequent switching On/Off of the XG Power switch (more than one On/Off per minute),
otherwise which will cause overheat in the x–ray generator and the Power Distribution Unit
(PDU), due to repeated charge/discharge of capacitors in them.
NOTICE
WHILE THE XG POWER SWITCH IS SWITCHED ON, AVOID FREQUENT SWITCHING ON/OFF
OF THE TABLE/TILT SWITCH (MORE THAN ONE ON/OFF PER MINUTE), OTHERWISE WHICH
WILL CAUSE OVERHEAT IN THE X–RAY GENERATOR AND THE PDU, DUE TO REPEATED
CHARGE/DISCHARGE OF CAPACITORS IN THEM.
2–2 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-2 TGP
Illustration 2–2 TGP
ON
OFF
SW1 SW5
RESET
LED’s
EMRG RESET S2 TEST1
JP2 TEST2
G1 G8
JP3
S1 S3
T1 T8 M1 M8
JP1
2–3 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-2 TGP (continued)
Jumper
D JP1, JP2, JP3, JP4, JP5, JP6 – Normally set as illustrated below. As for JP2 setting, see Section 5-1,
RMT CNT.
not
normal
(and)
DETECT
JP3
DETECT JP6
JP1 JP2
IHHC NORMAL
JP4
or
not Option Normal
DETECT DETECT JP5
Note: Some Jumpers
might be NOT existed,
with lock
JP2
depending on the TGP
board. (or)
Jumper Setting Description

JP1 IHHC (1–2 pins) Sets a mode where the cradle can be unlatched also by
the fluoroscopy controller.
NORMAL (2–3 pins) Sets a mode where the cradle can be latched/unlatched
only by the table latch switch.
JP2 not DETECT (1–2 pins) Sets a mode where the emergency signal lines are not
monitored.
DETECT (2–3 pins) Sets a mode where the emergency signal lines are mon-
itored to decelerate the cradle during the emergency
stop.
JP3 with lock (1–2 pins) Sets a mode where the gantry panel switches are elec-
(or) trically cut off when a DC 5 V voltage is applied to the
pin 37 of CN11 (or when a DC 24 V voltage is applied to
the pin 26 of J17).
normal (2–3 pins) Sets a mode where the gantry panel switches are al-
(and) ways connected electrically.
JP4 This Jumper is not supported yet. Always set Normal.
JP5, JP6 They are the Jumpers for Advantx ACT System (Vascular + CT system). Always be
shorted when used as a CT system.
2–4 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-2 TGP (continued)
Dip Switches
D S1, S2, S3 – Normally set as described in Tables 2–2 and 2–3.
Note: Switch OFF position
OFF
WARNING
UNCONTROLLED GANTRY RESPONSE !
CONFIRM THAT THE DIP SWITCHES ON THE TGP BOARD ARE SET AS DESCRIBED ABOVE,
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. IF ANY OF THE SWITCHES ARE SET TO ON, THE
GANTRY MIGHT BEHAVE DANGEROUSLY.
Table 2–2 S1 Description
Switch Normal Description

Setting
S1 T1 OFF When set to ON, disables the temporary halt function of table up or gantry tilt
operation.
T2 OFF or For TGP board of 2156510–5 or later:
ON When set to ON, the lowest table height allowed can be changed. For de-
tails, see the Table tab.
For TGP boards of earlier revisions above:
Normally set to OFF. When set to ON, disables the interlock function of table
up/down and gantry tilt.
T3 OFF For TGP board of 2156510–5 or later:
When set to ON, disables the interlock function of table up/down and gantry
tilt.
Set always to OFF.
T4 OFF or For TGP board of 2156510–5 or later:
ON When set to ON, the most extended cradle In–position allowed can be
changed. For details, see the Table tab.
Set always to OFF.
T5 OFF or For TGP board of 2156510–8 :
ON When set to ON, the lowest table height can be limited. (55mm higher than
standard)
Set always to OFF.
T6 OFF When set to ON, Table/Tilt off–line test programs can be executed.
T7 ∼ T8 OFF (Not used)
2–5 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-2 TGP (continued)
Table 2–3 S2, S3 Description
Switch Normal Description

Setting
S2 G1 OFF (Not used)
G2 OFF When set to ON, the gantry rotation initialization is not executed.
G3 OFF (Not used)
G4 OFF or Normally set to OFF.
ON
For TGP board of 2156510–5 or later, this switch can select a positioning light
operation mode as follows:
OFF: The positioning lights turn ON with the x–ray tube at the home position.
ON: The positioning lights turn ON with the x–ray tube at the home or 270
deg. position; for detailed operations, see Illustration 2–3.
G5 OFF (Not used)
G6 OFF When set to ON, Gantry Rotation off–line test programs can be executed.
G7 ∼ G8 OFF (Not used)
S3 M1 ∼ M4 OFF (Not used)
M5 OFF When set to ON, x–ray tube MA is displayed on the gantry position display
and KV is displayed on the height display.
M6 OFF When set to ON, Communication/Scan off–line test programs can be execut-
ed.
M7 ∼ M8 OFF (Not used)
Illustration 2–3 0/270 deg. Positioning Light Operation

Single Push of Pos. Light Switch
Double Push of Pos. Light Switch
Tube: Home Position Tube: 270 deg. Position

Pos. Lights: OFF Pos. Lights: OFF
Tube: Home Position Tube: 270 deg. Position

Pos. Lights: ON Pos. Lights: ON
Tube: other than Home or 270 deg. Positions

Pos. Lights: OFF
2–6 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-2 TGP (continued)
Service Switches (SW1 ∼ SW5)

The following five switches on the TGP board provide off–line control of gantry rotation.
Illustration 2–4 TGP Service Switches
TGP BOARD
SYS ABT SPD2 FAST CNT
HOME
SPD1
OFF
SVE
MID
MNL FIX SPD0 SLOW 90°
NOTICE
Except in emergency, do not set the SYS/OFF/MNL switch to OFF while the gantry is rotating,
or the static brake will be damaged.
NOTICE
Repeated acceleration and deceleration operations of the gantry over a limited period of time
with these service switches may cause an Overload Alarm state or overheating of the energy
dissipation resistor in the servo amplifier.
When doing the operations, take a pause of approximately 20 seconds before changing the
speed.
Note
If the gantry is continuously rotated by the ABT position of the ABT/SVE/FIX switch, this may cause
an overflow of the azimuth counter on the TGP board, resulting an abnormal operation of the gantry.
If this occurs, press the reset button on the TGP board.
2–7 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-2 TGP (continued)
Table 2–4 Service Switch – SW1
SWITCH SWITCH POSITION FUNCTION

SYS The gantry and table are controlled by system.
SYS (Normal Position)
OFF OFF The gantry rotation is disabled.
MNL The gantry rotation is controlled by the other service switches

MNL
described below.

ABT This is a spring loaded switch. Rotates the gantry until the
gantry rotates to a position determined by the CNT/HOME/90_
switch.
ABT Rotation Speed: 15.0 sec/Rev
SVE SVE The servo amplifier is in ready–to–operate state; however,
(Normal Position) since the speed command is zero volts, the gantry will not ro-
FIX tate.
FIX Same as ABT except that the speed is determined by the
SPD2/SPD1/SPD0 and FAST/MID/SLOW switches
Table 2–6 Service Switch – SW3 & SW4
SWITCH ROTATION SPEED

SWITCH POSITION SPD0 SPD1 SPD2
(Normal Position)
SLOW 15 sec/Rev 3 sec/Rev 1.0 sec/Rev
SPD2
SPD1 MID 10 sec/Rev 2 sec/Rev 0.8 sec/Rev

(Normal Position)
SPD0
FAST 5 sec/Rev 1.5 sec/Rev 0.7 sec/Rev
FAST
MID The rotation speed is determined by a combination of the two switch settings as de-
scribed above.
SLOW
2–8 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-2 TGP (continued)
CNT CNT Continuous rotation
HOME Home (zero degrees) position

HOME (Normal Position)
90° 90_ 90 degrees position
Push Switches
D SW6 – RESET – Resets the gantry.
D SW7 – TEST1 – Increments the program No. of the TGP off–line test.
D SW8 – TEST2 – Used in the TGP off–line test.
D SW9 – EMRG RESET – When power supply for the gantry and table is cut off by an emergency switch,
the switch SW9 restores the power supply.
NOTICE
While the XG Power switch is switched ON at the gantry rear base, avoid performing frequent
alternate operations of Emergency OFF – Reset – Emergency OFF – Reset – ... (more than one
operation / minute), otherwise which will cause overheat in the x–ray generator and the Pow-
er Distribution Unit (PDU), due to repeated charge/discharge of capacitors in them.
2–9 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-3 SUB BD
Illustration 2–5 SUB BD
SUB BD ASSY
SW1
SW2
D SW1 – SERVICE – Normally set to OFF.

When set to ON, the gantry static brake is released, and the gantry can be rotated by hand. With this
setting (ON), the servo amplifier is disabled to operate.
D SW2 – SV AMP RESET – An alarm state of the servo amplifier can be cleared by pushing this button.
(When the servo amplifier displays numbers other than ‘0’ or ‘–’ on its LED, it is in an alarm state.)
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-4 OGP
Illustration 2–6 OGP
CN7
CN2
S3 S5
S4
D S3, S4, S5 – Normally set as illustrated below.
ON ON ON
S3 1 8 S4 1 8 S5 1 8
SW SW No. Setting SW No. Setting Description

S3 1 OFF 2 OFF For the system With OC and With JEDI
ON OFF For the system Without OC and Without JEDI
OFF ON For the system With OC and Without JEDI
ON ON For the system Without OC and With JEDI
3 When setting this switch to OFF, the Positioning Light Test can be per-
formed. Press and hold the test SW on the OGP B’d to enter the PL test
mode. In this mode, once the positioning light is ON, it is ON steadily until
the light switch is pressed again. This is the mode only for a laser light be-
cause of a small heat generation.
4 ON: 2mm slice mode, OFF: 1mm slice mode.
5 Not defined.
6 Not defined.
7 Not defined.
8 ON: Watch Dog Timer (WDT) OFF, OFF: WDT ON
S4 To generate hardware reset signals.
S5
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-5 DTRF
2-5-1 DTRF Assy (2173960)
Illustration 2–7 DTRF
DTRF ASSY
JP8
JP7
JP6
JP5
JP10
JP9
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-5 DTRF (continued)
2-5-1 DTRF Assy (2173960) (continued)
Jumper
D JP5 ∼ JP8 – FEC Blocks / View – Normally set as illustrated below.
(NP)
JP8
JP7
JP6
JP5
‘1’: Short
‘0’: Open
(NP+)
JP8
JP7
JP6
JP5
‘1’: Short
‘0’: Open
Jumper Description
JP8 JP7 JP6 JP5
1 0 0 0 Eight FEC Blocks / View
1 0 0 1 Nine FEC Blocks / View
D JP9, JP10 – FPGA Configuration Data ROM Address – Normally set as illustrated below.
JP10
JP9
‘1’: Short
‘0’: Open
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-5-2 DTRF 110M Assy
Illustration 2–8 DTRF 110M
DTRF 110M ASSY
JP9
JP8
JP7
JP6
JP12
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-5-2 DTRF 110M Assy (continued)
Jumper
JP6
JP7
JP8
JP9
‘1’: Short
‘0’: Open
Jumper Description
JP6 JP7 JP8 JP9
1 0 0 0 Eight FEC Blocks / View
1 0 0 1 Nine FEC Blocks / View
D JP12 – Board Reset Enable/Disable – Normally set as illustrated below.
JP12
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-5-3 DTRF2 Assy (2233745)
Illustration 2–9 DTRF2 Assy (2233745)
DTRF2 ASSY
JP5 JP4 JP3

JP9
JP8
JP7
JP6
JP13
Jumper
JP6
JP7
JP8
JP9
‘1’: Short
‘0’: Open
D JP3, 4, 5 – XC95108 Programming – Normally set as illustrated below (Open).
JP3, 4, 5
JP7
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-5-4 DTRF2 Assy (2233745–2)
Illustration 2–10 DTRF2 Assy (2233745–2)
DTRF2 ASSY
JP5 JP4 JP3

JP9
JP8
JP7
JP6
JP13
JP15
JP14
JP12
Jumper
JP6
JP7
JP8
JP9
‘1’: Short
‘0’: Open
D JP3, 4, 5 – XC95108 Programming – Normally set as illustrated below (Open).
JP3, 4, 5
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123

JP7
D JP13 – Baud Rate – Normally set as illustrated below (110Mbaud).
JP13
95Mbaud 110Mbaud
D JP14 – Clock – Normally set as illustrated below (SRC; source).
CLK
SRC
SS
D JP15 – SS (Spread Spectrum) – Normally set as illustrated below.
SS%
–3.75%
–1.25%
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-6 NAA2
Illustration 2–11 NAA2
NAA2 ASSY
JP2
JP1
VR1
D JP1 – Input Impedance – Normally set as illustrated below (Open).
JP1
Jumper Description
JP1 for Line1+ Sets an input impedance for the line input
Line 1+.
Shorted: Sets Low Impedance (680 ohms).

Open: Sets High Impedance (22 kohms).
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-6 NAA2 (continued)

D JP2 – Ground Connection – Normally set as illustrated below (Open).
JP2
FG< >GND
Setting Description
Short Connects the NAA2 board analog ground to
the frame ground.
Open Disconnects the NAA2 board analog ground
and the frame ground.
D VR1 – From Patient Intercom Volume – Normally set as illustrated below (Center).
VR1
Setting Description
Counterclockwise Sets the volume quieter.
Clockwise Sets the volume louder.
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 34 2202123
2-7 TBL BD
Illustration 2–12 TBL BD
JP1
TBL BD ASSY
D JP1 – Normally set as illustrated below.

For the system with IMS Function
1 2 3
JP1
no IMS
with IMS
For the system without IMS Function
1 2 3
JP1
no IMS
with IMS
CT HISPEED SERIES
blank 2202123
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
SECTION 3 – DAS
3-1 CIF BOARD
SW2
D Set all the switches to OFF.
Illustration 3–1 SW2 Setting
(A)
ON
O
N
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
SW2
BEAM TRACKING CONTROL
Switch Description
1 Action enable:
When manual selection or special function 0 is selected, operation by toggle switch is en-
abled or disabled.
OFF: operation disable
ON: operation enable
2 Zch Ratio:
Set Zch ratio used during tracking.
OFF: Uses value downloaded from OC via System Config communication.
ON: Uses specified value of ROM table
3 SPCFM0 Mode Selection. See below.
4 SPCFM1
5 Stand Alone mode:
OFF: Normal mode
ON: Stand alone mode (system config communication is skipped.)
6 Operation Selection. See below.
7
8
3–1 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
3-1 CIF Board (Continued)
Mode Selection, selected by combination of SW3 and SW4
Mode Selection
SW3 SW4 Mode
OFF OFF Normal/Manual mode
OFF ON Special Function 0
ON OFF Special Function 1
ON ON Not used
Operation Selection, selected by combination of SW6, SW7, and SW8
Normal / Manual Mode (selected by SW3–OFF and SW4–OFF)

SW6 SW7 SW8 Operation
OFF OFF OFF No motion
OFF OFF ON FWD, 10 pulses of travel
OFF ON OFF FWD, 100 pulses of travel
ON OFF ON BWD, 10 pulses of travel
ON ON OFF BWD, 100 pulses of travel
– ON ON Home position
Note: Set the dip switch above, then press the toggle switch on the CIF board to execute the selected
mode.
Special Function 0 Mode (selected by SW3–OFF and SW4–ON)
OFF OFF OFF Vibration: The collimator vibrates, using for belt tension adjust-
ment.
OFF OFF ON Test motion 0: The collimator moves 20 pulses of a reciprocat-
ing motion for test.
OFF ON OFF Test motion 1: The collimator moves 140 pulses of a recipro-
cating motion for test.
OFF ON ON Not used
– ON ON Not used
Note: Set the dip switch above, then press the toggle switch on the CIF board to execute the selected
mode. To return from this mode, reset is required.
(Continued)
3–2 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
Special Function 1 Mode (selected by SW3–ON and SW4–OFF)

OFF OFF OFF ZIGZAG: The collimator moves zigzag. This mode can be
used in combination with a tracking mode.
OFF OFF ON Step A: The collimator moves in 20 pulse steps.
OFF ON OFF Step B: The collimator moves in 5 pulse steps.
OFF ON ON Step C: The collimator moves + 10 pulse every one scan.
ON OFF OFF Step D: The collimator moves + 1 pulse every one scan.
SW3
D Normally set as illustrated below.
If switch ‘8’ is set to ON as illustrated, data is transferred at the time of ‘Zero Detect.’
(Do not forget to set this switch to OFF later.)
Illustration 3–1 SW3 Setting
(A)
ON
O
N
D for 2169221,
2169221–4 or later, or
2169221–3 (See the
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
description below.)
SW3
RESET
(B)
8
ON
D for 2169221–2
O
N
D for 2169221–3 and if the gantry

is the following:
2200997, 2200999, 2201000, or
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
2249696 (Mobile systems)

SW3
For other than the above gantry

7
models, the SW3 setting should

be (A). RESET
3–3 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 20 2202123
Switch Description
1 Not used
2
3
4
5
6 For multi–gain set–up. See below.
7
8 For investigation of Zero Detect data.
ON: Investigation mode
OFF: Normal mode (No investigation)
Multi–gain set–up
Dip switch –> 6 7
Gain, Automatic OFF OFF
Gain 1 ON OFF
Gain 2 OFF ON
Gain 3 ON ON
3–4 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
SECTION 4 – X–RAY GENERATOR
Note
For board location, refer to the Renewal Parts manual.
4-1 KV MEASURE BOARD
4-1-1 Illustration
CAUTION
This board forms part of the oil seal of the High Voltage Tank. It can only be removed
at the factory. The Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) is the complete HV Tank.
LF (Large Focus)
C (Common)
SF (Small Focus)
4–1 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-1-2 Switches and Jumpers

None.
4-1-3 Fuses
None.
4–2 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-2 FILAMENT BOARD 1 INV
4-2-1 Illustration
DANGER
HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT DO INTO GENERATOR UNTIL INDICATOR DS3
GOES OUT.
DC
160v LF Common
SF
DS3 – Green – +160v

DC present DS4 – Yellow – Inverter
160v Output Running
DC
0
SF_LF – Yellow – Small ON – Yellow – Invert-
Focus / Large Focus er Command ON
Relay Feedback
RST – Red – Board being
reset or powered up
DS2 – Yellow – Status

LED
DS1 – Yellow – Status

LED
4–3 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123

None.
4-2-3 Fuses
None.
4–4 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-3 ROTATION BOARD HIGH SPEED
4-3-1 Illustration
DANGER
HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT GO INTO GENERATOR UNTIL INDICATOR DS6 AND
DS7 (NEON–ORANGE) GO OUT.
Auxiliary
DC DC bus
bus Common
Main
DS6
DC bus
4–5 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123

None.
4-3-3 Fuses
None.
4-3-4 J2 Wiring
NP/NP+ JEDI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
115V
sense
Fan, 115v AC
Line input
Fan, 115V AC X–ray tube
Line output
Thermal safety
NP++ JEDI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
115V
sense
HEMIT
X–ray tube
Thermal safety
4–6 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-4 LV POWER SUPPLY 3 PH BOARD
4-4-1 Illustration
DANGER
HIGH VOLTAGE AND HOT SURFACE: DO NOT TOUCH BOARD UNTIL INDICA-
TOR NE1 (NEON – ORANGE) GOES OUT.
NE1 – Orange – indicates presence of DC Bus

– 400 + 400
DC bus
160V
DC
0
DS2 – Green – 160 VDC
DS1 – Red – Mains Drop
4–7 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123

None.
4-4-3 Fuses
None.
4–8 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-5 GATE COMMAND BOARD
4-5-1 Illustration
DANGER
HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT TOUCH BOARD UNTIL DS300 ON THIS BOARD AND
DS1 ON DUAL SNUB BOARD ARE OUT.
CAUTION
Hot surface on transformer T300 and heat sink.
DS300
DS300 – Neon (Orange) –

DC bus Presence of voltage on DC
bus for Flyback Converter to
create power supplies for
both Gate Commands
DS200 – Yellow – High

DS200
IGBT* (Q200) Gate Com-

mand running
DS201 – Green – Presence
of +20 V Supply on high
DS201
DS202
IGBT* Gate Command

DS202 – Green – Pres-
ence of –10 V Supply on
high IGBT* Gate Com-
mand
Inverter ILP
current
feedback ILR
DS100 –Yellow–Low IGBT*

DS100
(Q100) Gate Command run-

ning
DS102
DS101
DS101 – Green – Presence of DS102 – Green – Pres-

+20 V Supply on low IGBT* ence of –10 V Supply on
Gate Command low IGBT* Gate Command
* Insulated Gate
Bipolar Transistor
4–9 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123

None.
4-5-3 Fuse
None.
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-6 DUAL SNUB BOARD
4-6-1 Illustration
DANGER
HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT GO INTO GENERATOR UNTIL INDICATOR DS1
(NEON – ORANGE ) GOES OUT.
DS1 – Neon (Orange) – Indicates presence of voltage on DC Bus

None.
4-6-3 Fuses
None.
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-7 IF BOARD NP
Service
Laptop
System I/F
System I/F

None.
4-7-2 Fuses
None.
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-8 KV CONTROL BOARD
4-8-1 Illustration
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
SWITCH OR FUNCTION
JUMPER
RST RESET PUSH BUTTON
4-8-3 Fuses
None.
4-8-4 Non Volatile RAM
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
U32 NON VOLATILE PARAMETERS RAM (BATTERY INCLUDED)
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
4-9 AC/DC THREE PHASE BOARD
4-9-1 Illustration
DANGER
HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT GO INTO GENERATOR UNTIL DS1 (NEON –
ORANGE) GOES OUT.
CAUTION
Some components on this board can become very hot.
DC Bus to inverter DC Bus out
DS1 – Neon F1 – Fuse –

(Orange) – Indi- Protects (on DC Bus):
cates presence LV Power Supply 3 Phase Board
of voltage on the Rotor Board High Speed
DC Bus. Gate Command Board
Type: 15 A, 600 VDC
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123

None.
4-9-3 Fuses
FUSE PROTECTS: TYPE

F1 ON DC BUS FOR: 15A, 600 V DC
LV POWER SUPPLY 3 PHASE BOARD
ROTOR BOARD HIGH SPEED
GATE COMMAND BOARD
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 28 2202123
SECTION 5 – PDU (POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT)
5-1 RMT CNT
5-1-1 RMT CNT of PDU1 (220XXXX / 224XXXX)
Illustration 5–1 RMT CNT
JP1
K10 K11
D JP1 – Set the jumper plug according to the following table. This table describes that the JP2 jumper on
the TGP board equipped on the gantry may also be changed.
Refer to Section 2-2, TGP.
Part No. of RMT Jumper Setting

CNT
Part No. of TGP: Part No. of TGP: Part No. of TGP:
2156510–3 or earlier 2156510–4 or later 2284399–X
2175741 (No settings) JP2 on TGP: JP2 on TGP:
Set a plug across pins 1–2 Set a plug across pins 1–2
(not DETECT) (not DETECT)
2175741–2 or later JP1 on RMT CNT: JP2 on TGP: JP2 on TGP:
Set a plug across pins 2–3. Set a plug across pins 2–3 Set a plug across pins 2–3
(DETECT) (DETECT)
JP1 on RMT CNT: JP1 on RMT CNT:
Set a plug across pins 1–2. Set a plug across pins 1–2.
2250079 JP1 on RMT CNT: JP2 on TGP: JP2 on TGP:
Set a plug across pins 2–3. Set a plug across pins 2–3 Set a plug across pins 2–3
(DETECT) (DETECT)
JP1 on RMT CNT: JP1 on RMT CNT:
Set a plug across pins 1–2. Set a plug across pins 1–2.
5–1 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 28 2202123
5-1 RMT CNT (continued)
5-1-2 RMT CNT of PDU2 (229XXXX)
Illustration 5–2 RMT CNT
JP1 K5 K7
K19 K6
JP2 K9 K24
D JP1, JP2 – Set the jumpers according to the following table. This table describes that the JP2 jumper on
the TGP board equipped on the gantry may also be changed.
Refer to Section 2-2, TGP.
Part No. of RMT CNT Jumper Setting

Part No. of TGP:
2284399–X
2301670 JP2 on TGP:
Set a plug across pins 2–3 (DETECT)
JP1, JP2 on RMT CNT:
Set a plug across pins 1–2.
5–2 SWITCH/JUMPER
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
APPENDIX A – SYMBOLS AND CLASSIFICATION
Symbol Publication Description
417–5032 Alternating Current
335–1 Three–phase Alternating Current

3
335–1 Three–phase Alternating Current with neutral con-

3N ductor
Direct Current
417–5019 Protective Earth (Ground)
348 Attention, consult ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTS
417–5008 OFF (Power: disconnection from the mains)
417–5007 ON (Power: connection to the mains)
Warning, HIGH VOLTAGE
Emergency Stop
A–1
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
APPENDIX A – SYMBOLS AND CLASSIFICATION (continued)
Symbol Publication Description

Type B
417–5339 X–ray Source Assembly Emitting
417–5009 Standby
Start
Table Set
Abort
Intercom
(on Operator Console)

Power On: light on
Standby: light off
A–2
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
Symbol Description
Microphone (Mic)
Contrast
Brightness
60_C System storage prior to installation:

Maintain storage temperature between –10° C and +60° C
–10_C
System storage prior to installation:

Maintain non–condensing storage
humidity below 95%
DO NOT store system longer than 90 days
Humidity 5–95%
Excluding Condensation
Air Pressure System storage and shipment:

Maintain Air Pressure between 750 and 1060hPa
750–1060hPa
A–3
CT HISPEED SERIES
REV 19 2202123
CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
Any permanently installed equipment containing operator or patient accessible surfaces must provide backup protec-
tion against electric shock,in case the BASIC INSULATION fails. In addition to BASIC INSULATION,Class1 equip-
ment contains a direct connection to a PROTECTIVE(EARTH) CONDUCTOR which prevents shocks when a person
touches a broken piece of equipment or touches two different equipment surfaces simultaneously.
TYPE B EQUIPMENT
CLASS I, II, or III EQUIPMENT or EQUIPMENT with INTERNAL ELECTRICAL POWER SOURCES provide an ade-
quate degree of protection against electric shock arising from (allowable) LEAKAGE CURRENTS or a breakdown
in the reliability of the protective earth connection.
ORDINARY EQUIPMENT
Enclosed EQUIPMENT without protection against the ingress of water.
OPERATION 0f EQUIPMENT
CONTINUOUS OPERATION WITH INTERMITTENT LOADING.
Operation in which EQUIPMENT is connected continuously to the SUPPLY MAINS. The stated permissible loading
time is so short that the long term on–load operating temperature is not attained. The ensuing interval in loading is,
however, not sufficiently long for cooling down to the long term no–load operating temperature.
EQUIPMENT not suitable for use in the presence of a FLAMMABLE ANESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR or WITH
OXYGEN or NITROUS OXIDE
CLEANING
The ProSpeed S series system is NOT WATERPROOF. It is NOT designed to protect internal components against
the ingress of liquids.Clean external system surfaces(Gantry,table,consoles and accessories)with a soft cloth dipped
in hot water and wrung DAMP/DRY. (NOT dripping!) IF NECESSARY, use only mild (dish washing liquid) soap to re-
move dirt.
NOTICE
Avoid damage to equipment! Some ”spray and wipe”cleaners etch and permanently cloud
clear plastic surfaces!! Use only warm water and mild liquid soap to clean surfaces.
A–4
GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371
P.O. Box 414, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 U.S.A.
(Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America)
GE Medical Systems – Europe: Telex 698626

283, rue de la Miniére, B.P. 34, 78533 Buc Cedex, France

Manuais Ge 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manuais Ge 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical

Copyrighte 1998–2002 by General Electric Company

D THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

D CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

D DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN

D ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

D ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA

D IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

Devices not to be used near this equipment:

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Tab – Section Page REV Rotational Mechanism 2–1 to 2–24 20

– Title page 35 Rotational Operation 3–1 to 3–7 19

(Warning and other impor- a to d 19 Tilt Operation 5–1 to 5–15 19

General 1–1 to 1–7 22 Elevation Function 1–1 to 1–6 19

OC Operation 2–1 to 2–12 33 Appendix

DC Power Supplies 1–1 to 1–3 19 – Blank/Rear cover –

REV Date Primary Reason for Change

System Added: V7 LFC Information (sec. 2)

Switch/Jumper Added: NPRM JP19 information (sec. 1).

34 09/20/02 System Added: A note for InSite Installation (Sec. 2).

Table Added: Information of the Home Lock function (Sec 2)

Switch/Jumper Added: TGP T5 setting (sec 2)

33 07/03/02 Introduction Corrected: Service menu for V6 (sec 3)

OC Corrected: Service menu for V6 (sec 2)

Gantry Corrected: Service menu for V6 (sec 6)

DAS Corrected: Service menu for V6 (sec 1)

XG Corrected: Service menu for V6 (sec 1, 2)

32 04/19/02 System Changed: X–RAY TUBE OVERHEAT SAFETY (sec1)

30 12/21/01 System Changed: POR, ISO Center Alingment (sec6)

Table Added: Cradle Belt Tension

X–ray Generator Changed: MA check (sec2)

28 10/05/01 System Changed: Image Performance Specifications (sec 8)

DAS Changed: scan parameters for DAS Data transfer test

Switch/Jumper Added: RMT CNT board for PDU2

27 08/10/01 System Added: V/R 6 System software loading (sec 2)

Switch / Jumper Added: JP19 (NPRM) jumper setting

26 07/06/01 System Changed: Image Performance Specification (sec 8)

Switch / Jumper Added: NPRM board (sec1)

25 04/20/01 Introduction Changed: Asymmetric Option calibration (sec 3)

System Changed: Entry limitation for Reconfiguration (sec2, 3, 4, 5)

REVISION HISTORY (continued)

System Added: V/R 5.5 or later software loading (sec2)

X–ray Generator Corrected: DAS Count Check

23 12/22/00 Introduction Added: Gantry service angle caution (Sec3)

22 10/27/00 Introduction Minor corrections: Sec. 1.

DAS/Detector Added: DAS data transfer note,

Switch / Jumper Added : New HDD,

21 09/14/00 System Added: . Aurora Information for LFC V4

20 08/18/00 System Improved: Diagnosis settings (LFC–sec2, 3, 4)

Gantry Changed 2–3 Rotation Balance.

Switch/Jumper Corrected : CIF SW2 (DAS)

Introduction Added a torque conversion table.

Operator Console Adopted the new revision control.

Gantry Corrected Aperture Z–Axis Belt Tension.

Table Adopted the new revision control.

Switch/Jumper Adopted the new revision control.

18 6/02/00 – Software Loading for V5 Dicom print

REVISION HISTORY (continued)

1 4/10/98 – MA load resister specs, Serial Port Expander switch setting, .

0 4/01/98 – Initial release.